Yamaha RX-V4600 - AV Receiver Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario

Este manual también es adecuado para

YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V4600
Printed in Malaysia WF09590
RX-V4600
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
i
Explanation of Graphical Symbols
The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an
equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the
presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within
the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient
magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to
persons.
The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle
is intended to alert you to the presence of important
operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in
the literature accompanying the appliance.
1 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions
should be read before the product is operated.
2 Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions
should be retained for future reference.
3 Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the
operating instructions should be adhered to.
4 Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions
should be followed.
5 Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before
cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners.
6 Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by
the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards.
7 Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water
for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or
laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool;
and the like.
8 Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart,
stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall,
causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious
damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod,
bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold
with the product. Any mounting of the product should
follow the manufacturers instructions, and should use a
mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer.
9 A product and cart combination should be moved with care.
Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may
cause the product and cart combination to
overturn.
10 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided
for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the
product and to protect it from overheating, and these
openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings
should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed,
sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not
be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack
unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s
instructions have been adhered to.
11 Power Sources – This product should be operated only from
the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home,
consult your product dealer or local power company. For
products intended to operate from battery power, or other
sources, refer to the operating instructions.
12 Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped
with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having
one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the
power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you
are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try
reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact
your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not
defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug.
13 Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be
routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched
by items placed upon or against them, paying particular
attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the
point where they exit from the product.
14 Lightning – For added protection for this product during a
lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for
long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and
disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent
damage to the product due to lightning and power-line
surges.
15 Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be
located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other
electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such
power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna
system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching
such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be
fatal.
16 Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension
cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result
in a risk of fire or electric shock.
17 Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind
into this product through openings as they may touch
dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result
in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on
the product.
18 Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself
as opening or removing covers may expose you to
dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to
qualified service personnel.
19 Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the
wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel
under the following conditions:
a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged,
b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the
product,
c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water,
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
CAUTION
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF
ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE
COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE
PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO
QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS
ii
EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING
MAST
GROUND
CLAMP
ANTENNA
LEAD IN
WIRE
ANTENNA
DISCHARGE UNIT
(NEC SECTION 810–20)
GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
(NEC SECTION 810–21)
GROUND CLAMPS
POWER SERVICE GROUNDING
ELECTRODE SYSTEM
(NEC ART 250. PART H)
ELECTRIC
SERVICE
EQUIPMENT
NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE
d) If the product does not operate normally by following
the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls
that are covered by the operating instructions as an
improper adjustment of other controls may result in
damage and will often require extensive work by a
qualified technician to restore the product to its normal
operation,
e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any
way, and
f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in
performance - this indicates a need for service.
20 Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required,
be sure the service technician has used replacement parts
specified by the manufacturer or have the same
characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized
substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other
hazards.
21 Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to
this product, ask the service technician to perform safety
checks to determine that the product is in proper operating
condition.
22 Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted
to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the
manufacturer.
23 Heat – The product should be situated away from heat
sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other
products (including amplifiers) that produce heat.
24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or
cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna
or cable system is grounded so as to provide some
protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges.
Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70,
provides information with regard to proper grounding of the
mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire
to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors,
location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding
electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode.
Note to CATV system installer:
This reminder is provided to call the CATV system
installers attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that
provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in
particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be
connected to the grounding system of the building, as
close to the point of cable entry as practical.
FCC INFORMATION (for US customers)
1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS
UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the
instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC
requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by
Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to
use the product.
2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to
accessories and/or another product use only high quality
shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST
be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to
follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to
use this product in the USA.
3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply
with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15
for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these
requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that
your use of this product in a residential environment will
not result in harmful interference with other electronic
devices.
This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if
not installed and used according to the instructions found
in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the
operation of other electronic devices.
Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that
interference will not occur in all installations. If this
product is found to be the source of interference, which
can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”,
please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the
following measures:
Relocate either this product or the device that is being
affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit
breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient
the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead,
change the lead-in to coaxial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory
results, please contact the local retailer authorized to
distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the
appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics
Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA
90620.
The above statements apply ONLY to those products
distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its
subsidiaries.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
iii
1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual
carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference.
2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean
place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration,
dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least
30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on
the back of this unit.
3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors,
or transformers to avoid humming sounds.
4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from
cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with
high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent
condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical
shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto
this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or
splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place:
Other components, as they may cause damage and/or
discoloration on the surface of this unit.
Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire,
damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid
may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to
this unit.
6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain,
etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature
inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit,
and/or personal injury.
7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections
are complete.
8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat,
possibly causing damage.
9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords.
10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet,
grasp the plug; do not pull the cable.
11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might
damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth.
12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this
unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may
cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury.
YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage
resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than
specified.
13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the AC power
cable and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an
electrical storm.
14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified
YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The
cabinet should never be opened for any reasons.
15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time
(i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall
outlet.
16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on
common operating errors before concluding that this unit is
faulty.
17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit
in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from
the wall outlet.
18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
We Want You Listening For A Lifetime
YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your
equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or
distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is
often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group
recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels.
CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT.
WARNING
TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC
SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN
OR MOISTURE.
This unit is not disconnected from the AC power
source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet,
even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called
the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to
consume a very small quantity of power.
FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS
To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to
wide slot and fully insert.
This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian
ICES-003.
POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS
Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la
plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de
la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond.
Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à
la norme NMB-003 du Canada.
IMPORTANT
Please record the serial number of this unit in the space
below.
MODEL:
Serial No.:
The serial number is located on the rear of the unit.
Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future
reference.
1
PREPARATIONINTRODUCTION
BASIC
OPERATION
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
FEATURES............................................................. 2
GETTING STARTED............................................ 3
Supplied accessories .................................................. 3
Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 5
Front panel ................................................................. 5
Remote control........................................................... 7
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 9
Using the remote controls.......................................... 9
Front panel display .................................................. 10
Rear panel ................................................................ 12
SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 13
Speaker placement ................................................... 13
Speaker connections ................................................ 15
CONNECTIONS .................................................. 18
Before connecting components................................ 18
Connecting video components................................. 19
Connecting audio components................................. 22
Connecting the antennas .......................................... 24
Connecting the power cable..................................... 25
Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 26
Turning on the power............................................... 26
AUTO SETUP....................................................... 27
Introduction.............................................................. 27
Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 27
Starting the setup ..................................................... 28
Confirming the results ............................................. 30
PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33
Basic operations....................................................... 33
Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34
Additional operations............................................... 35
Selecting audio input modes .................................... 40
TUNING ................................................................ 41
Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41
Presetting stations .................................................... 42
Selecting preset stations........................................... 44
Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44
Using HD Radio
................................................... 45
HD Radio
tuning................................................... 45
Selecting HD Radio
audio programs .................... 46
Displaying HD Radio
information ....................... 46
RECORDING ....................................................... 47
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM
DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 48
For movie/video sources.......................................... 48
For music sources .................................................... 50
ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................51
Using the sleep timer ............................................... 51
SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................52
Changing parameter settings ................................... 54
Input Select .............................................................. 55
Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 58
Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 61
Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 66
System Memory....................................................... 69
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................70
Control area ............................................................. 70
Setting remote control codes ................................... 71
Programming codes from other
remote controls (Learn) ....................................... 73
Changing source names in the display window....... 75
Using the Macro feature .......................................... 76
Clearing function sets .............................................. 78
Clearing individual functions .................................. 79
Controlling each component.................................... 81
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ...................................................82
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 82
Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel ..... 83
Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using
the remote control................................................ 84
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................86
Advanced setup menu.............................................. 86
Front panel display system options menu................ 87
USING i.LINK.......................................................91
What is i.LINK? ...................................................... 91
Connecting i.LINK components.............................. 91
Basic i.LINK operations .......................................... 92
Changing i.LINK Select parameters........................ 92
i.LINK display messages ......................................... 94
USING HDMI........................................................95
What is HDMI? ....................................................... 95
Connecting HDMI components............................... 96
Basic HDMI operations ........................................... 97
Changing HDMI parameters.................................... 97
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......99
What is a sound field? ............................................. 99
Changing parameter settings ................................... 99
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER
DESCRIPTIONS.............................................100
TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................105
GLOSSARY.........................................................110
Audio formats ........................................................ 110
Sound field programs............................................. 111
Audio information ................................................. 111
Video signal information ....................................... 113
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER
INFORMATION .............................................114
SPECIFICATIONS.............................................115
CONTENTS
INTRODUCTION
PREPARATION
BASIC OPERATION
SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS
ADVANCED OPERATION
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
FEATURES
2
Built-in 7-channel power amplifier
Minimum RMS Output Power
(0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 )
Front: 130 W + 130 W
Center: 130 W
Surround: 130 W + 130 W
Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W
Sound field features
Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of
sound fields
THX Select2
SRS CS (U.S.A. model only)
Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder
DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1,
DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24
Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic /
Dolby Pro Logic x decoder
Virtual CINEMA DSP
SILENT CINEMA
Sophisticated AM/FM tuner
40-station random access preset tuning
Automatic preset tuning
Preset station shifting capability (preset editing)
HD Radio
digital broadcast reception capability
Other features
YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer for automatic speaker setup
192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter
GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to
optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video
system
6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete
multi-channel input
Short message function
PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog,
DSD, PCM and multi-channel PCM sources
S-video signal input/output capability
Component video input/output capability
Video signal conversion (composite video
S-video component video) capability for monitor
out
i.LINK interface for direct digital transfer of digital
audio signals
HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or
high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital
audio
Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks
Sleep timer
Cinema and music night listening mode
Remote control with preset remote control codes and
learning/macro capability
Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control for controlling
Zone 2/Zone 3 components connected to this unit
y indicates a tip for your operation.
Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button
names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses.
This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc.
In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority.
Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.
“Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are
trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
“DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of
Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
“HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia
Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing LLC.
HD Radio
technology manufactured under license from
iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD
Radio” and “HD” symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity
Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents.
“i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo are trademarks of Sony
Corporation.
“SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA
CORPORATION.
Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the
symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc.
Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are
incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc.
The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be
registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved.
FEATURES
GETTING STARTED
3
INTRODUCTION
Please check that you received all of the following parts.
GETTING STARTED
Supplied accessories
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
TUNER CD CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
DTV
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
+
MUTE
DISPLAY
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
ZONE 3ZONE 2
ID2ID1
Remote control
Batteries (4)
(AAA, LR03)
Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control
Batteries (2)
(AAA, R03)
AM loop antenna
(Canada, Asia,
General, China, Korea,
Australia, U.K. and
Europe models)
Optimizer microphone
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna
adapter (U.K. model only)
Speaker terminal
wrench
Power cable
Indoor FM antenna
(Australia, U.K. and
Europe models)
Indoor FM antenna
(U.S.A., Canada, Asia,
General, China and
Korea models)
AM loop antenna
(U.S.A. model)
GETTING STARTED
4
Notes on batteries
Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not
flash, or its light or display window become dim.
Do not use old batteries together with new ones.
Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these
different types of batteries may have the same shape and color.
If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with
clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries.
Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations.
Remote control
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03)
according to the polarity markings on the
inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
1 Press the part and slide the battery
compartment cover off.
2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03)
according to the polarity markings (+ and –)
on the inside of the battery compartment.
3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place.
Installing batteries in the remote controls
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new
batteries, set up the remote control code and program
any acquired functions that may have been cleared.
1
3
2
1
3
2
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
5
INTRODUCTION
1 STANDBY/ON
Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode.
When you turn on the main unit, there will be a 6 to 7
second delay before the main unit can reproduce sound.
In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of
power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote
control.
You can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 or set them to
the standby mode simultaneously using the remote control.
For details, see page 85.
2 INPUT selector
Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch.
3 AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
(AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
this unit (see page 40).
4 MULTI CH INPUT
Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes
priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector
(or the input selector buttons on the remote control).
5 A/B/C/D/E
Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when
the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 44).
6 PRESET/TUNING l / h
Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the unit is in the
tuner mode and the colon (:) is displayed next to the band
indication in the front panel display.
Selects the tuning frequency when the unit is in the tuner
mode and the colon (:) is not displayed.
See pages 41 to 44 for details.
7 Front panel display
Shows information about the operational status of this
unit.
8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT)
Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h
between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when
the unit is in the tuner mode (see pages 41 to 44).
9 FM/AM
Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when the unit is
in the tuner mode (see page 41).
0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
Stores a station in the memory when the unit is in the tuner
mode. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to
start automatic preset tuning (see pages 42 to 43).
A TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L)
Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO”
indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off) when
the unit is in the tuner mode.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
Front panel
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDI O
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
FI MNLKJHG
1 2 34 5 6 7 890A B D E
C
Notes
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
6
B STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
C Remote control sensor
Receives signals from the remote controls.
D TONE CONTROL
Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right
and center channels (see page 35).
E PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when
turned on (see page 38).
F REC OUT/ZONE 2
Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video
recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source
you are listening to or watching in the main room. When
set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is
directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the
source you record are always identical.
G OPTIMIZER MIC jack
Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied
microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function
(see page 27).
H SPEAKERS A/B
Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the
A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the
corresponding button is pressed.
I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack
Outputs audio signals for private listening with
headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals
are output at the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers.
All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down
to the front left and right channels.
J VIDEO AUX jacks
Input audio and video signals from an external source
such as a game console. To reproduce source signals at
these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source.
K ZONE ON/OFF
MAIN
Turns on the power of the main unit or sets it to the
standby mode (see page 83).
ZONE 2
Turns on the power of Zone 2 or sets it to the standby
mode (see page 83).
ZONE 3
Turns on the power of Zone 3 or sets it to the standby
mode (see page 83).
L ZONE CONTROL
Press to control the input or adjust the volume level for the
currently selected zone (the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3)
(see page 83). After you press ZONE CONTROL, the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the
front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the
indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation.
M PROGRAM selector
Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble
balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL).
N VOLUME
Controls the output level of all audio channels.
This does not affect the REC OUT level.
Opening and closing the front panel
door
When you want to use the controls behind the front panel
door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of
the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these
controls.
To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel.
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
7
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the function of each control on the
remote control used to control this unit. To operate other
components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on
page 70. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this
unit.
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 Transmission indicator
Flashes while the remote control is sending signals.
3 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER
to select the TUNER mode.
4 Display window
Shows the name of the selected source component that
you can control.
5 LIGHT button
Press to light up remote control buttons and display
window.
6 TOP, BAND
Displays the top screen in the graphical user interface
(GUI) menu on your video monitor when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode.
7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER
Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI
menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode.
Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode.
8 RETURN
Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel
display menu mode.
9 Sound field program / numeric buttons
Use to select sound field programs or input numbers when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode.
Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in
multi-channel format (see page 37).
Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel
playback of multi-channel software (see page 36).
0 MEMORY 1/2
Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO
settings or additional preset stations (see page 69).
A MACRO ON/OFF
Turns the macro function on and off.
Remote control
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
t
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
B
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
8
B MACRO
Use to program a series of operations for control by a
single button (see page 76).
C STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
D SYSTEM POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
E AUDIO SELECT
Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack
(AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when
one component is connected to two or more input jacks on
this unit (see page 40).
F SLEEP
Sets the sleep timer.
G MULTI CH IN
Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external
decoder (etc.).
H SELECT k / n
Selects another component that you can control
independently of the input component selected with the
input selector buttons.
I VOL +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
J AMP/SOURCE/TV
Selects the component you want to control with the
remote control.
AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit.
SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component
selected with an input selector button.
TV: Set to this position to operate the television.
To set the remote control codes for components, see
page 71.
K MUTE
Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to
the previous volume level.
L PURE DIRECT
Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 38).
M EXIT, PRG SELECT
Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
(U.S.A. model only)
Selects the HD Radio audio program when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode (see page 46).
N NIGHT
Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38).
O DISPLAY
Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP.
(U.S.A. model only)
Toggles between HD Radio information displays when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in
the tuner mode (see page 46).
P STRAIGHT/EFFECT
Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is
selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are
output directly from their respective speakers without
effect processing.
Q SPEAKERS A/B
Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to
the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel when
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP, then the corresponding
button is pressed each time.
R RE-NAME
Used to change the input source name in the display
window (see page 75).
S CLEAR
Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn,
macro and rename features, or setting remote control
codes (see page 78).
T LEARN
Used to set up the remote control code or program
functions from other remote controls (see page 73).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
9
INTRODUCTION
This section describes the controls and functions of the
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. Use the Zone 2/Zone 3
remote control to control components connected to this
unit in Zone 2 (the second room) or Zone 3 (the third
room).
1 Infrared window
Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the
component you want to operate.
2 POWER
Turns on the power of this unit.
3 STANDBY
Sets this unit in the standby mode.
4 Input selector buttons
Select the input source and change the control area.
5 PRESET/CH k / n
Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when
the unit is in tuner mode.
6 VOLUME +/
Increases or decreases the volume level.
7 MUTE
Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the
MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio
output to the previous volume level.
8 A/B/C/D/E
Press repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E)
when the unit is in tuner mode.
9 DISPLAY
Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode.
(U.S.A. model only)
Toggles between HD Radio information displays when the
unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46).
0 PRG SELECT
(U.S.A. model only)
Selects the HD Radio audio program when the unit is in
the tuner mode (see page 46).
A ID1/ID2
Slide to set the remote control AMP/tuner ID for this unit
(see page 72).
B ZONE 2/ZONE 3
Slide to set the operation of this unit to Zone 2 or Zone 3
(see page 82).
The remote controls transmit a directional infrared ray.
Be sure to aim the remote controls directly at the remote
control sensor on the main unit during operation.
Handling the remote controls
Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote
controls.
Do not drop the remote controls.
Do not leave or store the remote controls in the
following types of conditions:
places of high humidity, such as near a bath
places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or
stove
extremely low temperatures
dusty places
Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control
TUNER CD CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
DTV
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
+
MUTE
DISPLAY
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
ZONE 3ZONE 2
ID2ID1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
A
B
8
0
Using the remote controls
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR2
30 30
TUNER CD CD-R
POWER
STANDBY
DTV
CBL/SATMD/TAPE
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVD
+
MUTE
DISPLAY
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
PRESET/CH
VOLUME
ZONE 3ZONE 2
ID2ID1
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
Approximately 6 m (20 ft)
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
10
1 i.LINK indicator
Lights up when an i.LINK component is connected, and
this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK
connections.
Flashes when an i.LINK component is connected, but this
unit is playing back signals input via connections other
than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK
connections.
Turns off when no i.LINK component is connected.
See page 94 for details.
2 HDMI indicator
Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and
this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI
connections.
Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this
unit is playing back audio signals input via connections
other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via
HDMI connections.
Turns off when no HDMI component is connected.
See page 96 for details.
3 NIGHT indicator
Lights up when you select night listening mode.
4 VIRTUAL indicator
Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active
(see page 39).
5 Sound field indicators
Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields.
6 Input source indicators
A cursor lights to show the current input source.
7 CINEMA DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field
program.
8 YPAO indicator
Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the
auto setup speaker settings are used without any
modifications.
9 AUTO indicator
Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode.
0 STEREO indicator
Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an
FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit.
A HD Radio indicator
(U.S.A. model only)
Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio
reception band.
B VOLUME level indicator
Indicates the volume level.
C Decoder indicators
When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective
indicator lights up.
D DSD indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct
stream digital) digital audio signals.
E PCM indicator
Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code
modulation) digital audio signals.
F SLEEP indicator
Lights up while the sleep timer is on.
G ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators
Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on.
H THX indicator
Lights up when a THX program is selected.
I STANDARD indicator
Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 37).
J Headphones indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected.
Front panel display
96
24
MUTE
VOLUME
MATRIX
DISCRETE
STANDARD
NIGHT
VIRTUAL
SLEEP
ZONE3
ZONE2
CINEMA
SILENT
HiFi DSP
MEMORY
TUNED
YPAO
AUTO
STEREO
HD
A B
SP
LFE
dB
mS
ft
96/24
LL C R
SL SB SR
MULTI CH
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
DIGITAL
PL
PCM
DSD
THX
PL
EX
PL x
CS
13 4 5 6 78 90AB
CDEFHIJKL M N OPQRS
U
t
2
G
Presence DSP sound field
Listening position
Left surround
DSP sound field
Right surround
DSP sound field
Surround/surround back DSP sound field
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
11
INTRODUCTION
K SP A B indicators
Light up according to the set of front speakers selected.
Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are
selected, or when bi-wiring.
L SILENT CINEMA indicator
Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound
field program is selected (see page 36).
M Multi-information display
Shows the current sound field program name and other
information when adjusting or changing settings.
N HiFi DSP indicator
Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field
program.
O MEMORY indicator
Flashes to show a station can be stored.
P TUNED indicator
Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station.
Q MUTE indicator
Flashes while the MUTE function is on.
R 96/24 indicator
Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit.
S LFE indicator
Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal.
T Input channel indicators
Indicate the channel components of current digital input
signal.
U Presence and surround back speaker
indicators
Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back
speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 27) or
Speaker Level setting (page 65).
CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS
12
1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks
See page 22 for details.
2 i.LINK connectors
See page 91 for connection information.
3 Antenna terminals
See page 24 for connection information.
4 Video component jacks
See pages 19 and 21 for connection information.
5 Audio component jacks
See page 22 for connection information.
6 Speaker terminal wrench hook
Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use.
7 RS-232C terminal
This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only.
Consult you dealer for details.
8 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks
See page 82 for details.
9 CONTROL OUT jacks
These are control expansion terminals for factory use only.
0 AC OUTLETS
Use to supply power to your other A/V components
(see page 25).
A AC INLET
Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable
(see page 25).
B DIGITAL INPUT jacks
See pages 19, 21 and 22 for details.
C HDMI IN/OUT connectors
See page 95 for connection information.
D ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks
See page 82 for details.
E MULTI CH INPUT jacks
See page 20 for connection information.
F PRE OUT jacks
See page 23 for connection information.
G Speaker terminals
See page 15 for connection information.
H PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals
See page 15 for connection information.
Rear panel
GND
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
SURROUND
CLASS 2 WIRING
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
SURROUND BACK SINGLE
CENTER
SINGLE
(SB)
R
L
R
R
R
L
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
MONITOR
OUT
AUDIOVIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
VIDEO
IN
OUT
OUT
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
ZONE 2
IN
CENTERSUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
OUTPUT
AUDIO
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
OUT
(REC)
OUT
(REC)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
SURROUND
TUNER
HDMI
(AUDIO)
S400
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
CD
CD
DVD
COAXIAL
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
RS-232C
DVR/VCR 2
CONTROL OUTREMOTE
IN IN OUT
21
OUT
1
2
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
MONITOR
OUT
PBY
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
+12V 15mA MAX.
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
ZONE 3
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
AC IN
12 3 4 5 67 8 9 0 A
BC D E F G H
(U.S.A. model)
SPEAKER SETUP
13
PREPARATION
+
The speaker layout below shows the standard ITU-R
*
speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP,
multi-channel audio sources and THX.
*
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union).
Front speakers (FR and FL)
The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus
effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from
the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker
from each side of the video monitor should be the same.
Center speaker (C)
The center speaker is for the center channel sounds
(dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical
to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results,
however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front
face of the center speaker with the front face of your video
monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front
speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as
directly over or under it.
Surround speakers (SR and SL)
The surround speakers are used for effect and surround
sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening
position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above
the floor.
Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL)
The surround back speakers supplement the surround
speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back
transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the
listening position and at the same height as the surround
speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in)
apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width
as the front speakers.
Subwoofer
The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active
Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only
for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels,
but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (low-
frequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and
DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so
critical, because low bass sounds are not highly
directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the
front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the
room to reduce wall reflections.
Presence speakers (PR and PL)
Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front
speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA
DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that
filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the
screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place
these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m
(1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly
inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor.
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in
the Sound menu (see page 61).
SPEAKER SETUP
Speaker placement
More than 30 cm (12 in)
60˚
30˚
PL
PR
SBR
SBL
FL
FR
C
SL
SR
SR
80˚
SL
1.8 m (6 ft)
1.8 m (6 ft)
Note
14
SPEAKER SETUP
Di-pole speaker layout
Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used
for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please
place the surround and surround back speakers according
to the speaker layout below.
FL
SR
SL
FR
C
SBR
SBL
30˚ 30˚
: Di-pole speaker
: Direction of di-pole speaker
15
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R),
“+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are
faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the
polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound
will be unnatural and lack bass.
If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set
this unit’s speaker impedance setting to
6 ohms before using (see page 26). If you will
use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial
setting for speaker impedance.
Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this
unit is disconnected from the power source.
Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or
do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This
could damage this unit and/or speakers.
Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of
speaker still creates interference with the monitor,
place the speakers away from the monitor.
A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables
running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped
differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges.
Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red)
terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain
cable to the “–” (black) terminals.
1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of
insulation from each of the speaker cables.
2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together
to prevent short circuits.
3 Loosen the knob.
The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for
loosening or tightening knobs.
4 Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side
of each terminal.
5 Tighten the knob to secure the wire.
Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or
PRESENCE speaker terminals
1 Open the tab.
2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each
terminal.
3 Return the tab to secure the wire.
Banana plug connections
(With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models)
First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug
connector into the end of the corresponding terminal.
y
You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and
PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one
banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not
attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs.
Speaker connections
CAUTION
10 mm (3/8 in)
1
2
Red: positive (+)
Black: negative (–)
5
4
3
Speaker terminal wrench
2
1
3
Banana plug
(With the exception of U.K., Europe
and Asia models)
16
SPEAKER SETUP
SPEAKERS
FRONT
SURROUND
FRONT
CENTER
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
SURROUND
CLASS 2 WIRING
SPEAKER IMPEDANCE
SURROUND BACK SINGLE
CENTER
SINGLE
(SB)
R
L
R
R
L
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
R
L
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
+
A
B
PRESENCE/ZONE 2
2 31
7 8 65 109
4
Center
speaker
Front speakers (A)
Surround back speakers
LeftRight
LeftRight LeftRight
Surround speakers
Front
speakers
(B)
1
2
3
4
5
6
9
10
8
7
Speaker layout
(U.S.A. model)
LeftRight
Presence speakers
You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set
to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61).
The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only
operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic x decoder is turned on.
The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields
are selected.
Subwoofer with
built-in amplifier
17
SPEAKER SETUP
PREPARATION
FRONT terminals
Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals.
If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of
the FRONT A or B terminals.
The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems
simultaneously.
Bi-wired connection
The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to
one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for
each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the
tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press
SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so
that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display.
CENTER terminals
Connect a center speaker to these terminals.
SURROUND terminals
Connect surround speakers to these terminals.
SUBWOOFER jack
Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
SURROUND BACK terminals
Connect surround back speakers to these terminals.
If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it
to the left (L) terminals.
PRESENCE terminals
Connect presence speakers to these terminals.
You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers
(see page 83).
Note
Note
Bi-wired connection
FRONT
R
L
+
+
+
+
A
B
This unit
CONNECTIONS
18
Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains
power until all connections between components are
complete.
Cable indications
Analog jacks
You can input analog signals from audio components by
connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this
unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs
to the left jacks.
Digital jacks
This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital
signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You
can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and
DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both
the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to
signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks
are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals.
This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus
audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the
analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input at the
digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the
DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks.
Video jacks
This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection
depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor.
The signals input at the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are
automatically converted for output at the VIDEO jacks.
When
Video Conv.is set toOn (see page 66), signals
input at the VIDEO jacks can be output at the S VIDEO
and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input
at the S VIDEO jacks can also be output at the
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks.
VIDEO jack
For conventional composite video signals.
S VIDEO jack
For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color
reproduction.
COMPONENT VIDEO jacks
For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and
color difference (P
B, PR) to provide the best quality in
picture reproduction.
When signals are input at both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks,
signals input at the S VIDEO jack have priority.
CONNECTIONS
Before connecting components
Note
CAUTION
S
V
O
V
V
V
L
R
C
left analog cables
right analog cables
optical cables
coaxial cables
video cables
S-video cables
For analog signals
For digital signals
For video signals
Note
VIDEO
S VIDEO
COMPONENT VIDEO
P
R
P
B
Y
S VIDEO
VIDEO
COMPONENT
VIDEO
Signal flow inside this unit
Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On”
(see page 66)
Output
(MONITOR OUT)
Input
19
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connections for DVD playback
Connecting video components
R
L
MONITOR
OUT
AUDIOVIDEO
S VIDEO
DVD
VIDEO
OUTPUT
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
DVD
DVD
COAXIAL
COMPONENT VIDEO
PR
MONITOR
OUT
PBY
DVD
C
O
LR
DVD player
Video
monitor
(U.S.A. model)
Optical out Video out
Audio out
Video in
Coaxial out
20
CONNECTIONS
Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks
This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and
SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or
pre-amplifier.
If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign:
Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels.
Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to
match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels.
When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you
cannot select sound field programs.
This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that
you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature.
When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output.
Notes
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
R
L
R
L
AUDIO
DVD
DTV
CBL/
SAT
IN
OUT
DVR/VCR 2
VCR 1
IN
AUDIO
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
OUT
(REC)
OUT
(REC)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
LRLR
L
R
FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH)
SURROUND
LR
LR
CENTER
SUBWOOFER
MULTI CH INPUT
Multi-format player/
External decoder
Multi-format player/
External decoder
For 6-channel input For 8-channel input
Front
out
Surround
out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Front out
Surround out
Subwoofer
out
Center
out
Surround
back out
21
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connections for other video components
VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel)
Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a
game console or video camera, to this unit.
R
L
AUDIOVIDEO
S VIDEO
CBL/
SAT
VIDEO
OUT
VCR 1
IN
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
CBL/SAT
COAXIAL
DVR/VCR 2
COMPONENT VIDEO
PRPBY
DTV
CBL/
SAT
O
LR
LR LR
C
Cable TV or
satellite tuner
(U.S.A. model)
DVD recorder
or VCR
Audio out
Video out
Optical out
Audio out
Video out
Video in
Audio in
Coaxial out
S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
O
V
S
L
R
Game
console or
video camera
Video out
S-video out
Audio out L
Audio out R
Optical out
22
CONNECTIONS
Connections for audio components
Connecting a turntable
PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM
or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with
a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting
transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to
these jacks.
y
Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in
the signal. However you may hear less noise without the
connection to the GND terminal for some record players.
Connecting audio components
GND
R
L
AUDIO
(
PLAY
)
IN
(
PLAY
)
IN
OUT
(REC)
OUT
(REC)
CD-R
MD/TAPE
CD
PHONO
DIGITAL OUTPUT
DIGITAL INPUT
OPTICAL
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD
CD
COAXIAL
O
LRLRLR LR
LRLR
C
O
O
CD player
MD recorder or
tape deck
(U.S.A. model)
CD recorder
Turntable
Optical out
Coaxial out
Audio in
Optical in
Optical in
Audio inAudio out
Audio out
GND
Audio out
Audio out
23
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connecting to an external amplifier
If you want to increase the power output to the speakers,
or want to use another amplifier, connect an external
amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows.
When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for
output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the
corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the
external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum.
The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE
OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings.
If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set
to “Zone B” (see page 67), signals will only be output at the
FRONT PRE OUT jacks.
1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks
Front channel line output jacks.
2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks
Surround channel line output jacks.
3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack
Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the
YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System,
to this jack.
4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT
jacks
Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If
you only connect one external amplifier for the surround
back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack.
5 CENTER PRE OUT jack
Center channel line output jack.
Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the
corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround
back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals
output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks
may not correspond to the correct speakers.
Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on
the subwoofer.
Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE
OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 62).
Connecting i.LINK components
If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you
can enjoy digital audio from CD, DVD, Super Audio CD
and DVD-A discs.
For details on i.LINK, see “USING i.LINK” on page 91.
An i.LINK cable shorter than 3.5 m is recommended.
Connecting HDMI components
This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for
signal input as well as the HDMI OUT jack for signal
output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this
unit to the HDMI OUT jack of other HDMI-compatible
components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other
HDMI-compatible components (such as TV and a
projector).
For details on HDMI, see “USING HDMI” on page 95.
An HDMI cable shorter than 5 m with the HDMI logo printed on
it is recommended.
Notes
Notes
FRONT
SURROUND
PRE OUT
SUBWOOFER
SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE
CENTER
SINGLE
(SB)
R
L
R
L
R
L
1
2
3
4
5
Note
Note
DIGITAL OUTPUT
OPTICAL
(AUDIO)
S400
i.LINK component
DIGITAL INPUT
CBL/SAT
COAXIAL
DVR/VCR 2
D
C
S
HDMI
IN 1
IN 2
OUT
DVD Player
Video monitor
HDMI OUT
DVD Player
HDMI OUT
HDMI IN
24
CONNECTIONS
Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this
unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient
signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the
designated terminals.
Connecting the AM loop antenna
1 Set up the AM loop antenna.
2 Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop
antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND
terminals.
3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best
reception.
The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit.
The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an
outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit.
A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception
than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an
outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest
authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor
antennas.
75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter
(U.K. model only)
1 Open the cover of the
included 75-ohm/300-ohm
antenna adapter.
2 Cut the external sleeve
of the 75-ohm coaxial
cable and prepare it for
connection.
3 Cut the lead wire and
remove it.
4 Insert the cable
wire into the slot,
and clamp it with
pliers.
5 Snap the cover into place.
Connecting the antennas
TUNER
75
UNBAL.
AM
ANT
GND
FM
ANT
AM loop antenna
(included)
Ground (GND terminal)
For maximum safety and minimum interference,
connect the antenna
GND terminal to a good earth
ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven
into moist earth.
Indoor FM antenna
(included)
(U.S.A. model)
Notes
11 (7/16)
8 (5/16)
6 (1/14)
Unit:
mm (in)
Lead wire
Clamp
Clamp
Insert the wire
into the slot
25
CONNECTIONS
PREPARATION
Connecting the AC power cable
Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other
connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an
AC wall outlet.
Do not use other AC power cables. Use the provided
cable. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard
or electrical shock.
AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED)
U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet
Korea model ............................................................... None
Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets
Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your
other components to this unit. Power to the AC
OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON
(or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets
will supply power to any connected component whenever
this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power
consumption of components) that can be connected to the
AC OUTLET(S) is:
Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W
Other models ...........................................................100 W
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models only)
The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit
must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging
into the AC main supply. Voltages are:
General model .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
Asia model ...........................AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode.
However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC
wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one
week, the stored data will be lost.
Connecting the power cable
AC OUTLETS
SWITCHED
AC IN
(U.S.A. model)
VO
L
TA
G
E
SELECTO
R
VOLTAGE SELECTOR
(Asia and General models)
CAUTION
26
CONNECTIONS
Follow the procedure below to change the impedance
setting for all speakers.
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to
6 ohms before using this unit.
Be sure this unit is in the standby mode.
1 On the front panel, while holding down
STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.
“SP IMP.–8MIN” appears on the front panel
display.
2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the
impedance of your speakers.
If you are using 6 ohm speakers, select 6 ohms; if you
are using 8 ohm speakers, select 8 ohms.
3 Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting.
This unit will be set to the standby mode.
Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced
menu (see page 86).
When all connections are complete, turn on the power of
this unit.
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on
the remote controls) to turn on the power of
this unit.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
Press STANDBY/ON again (or STANDBY on the remote
control) to enter the standby mode.
Speaker impedance setting
CAUTION
Note
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
SP IMP.-8 MIN
Turning on the power
Note
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
1
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
++
AMP
1
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
or
Front panel
Remote control
AUTO SETUP
27
PREPARATION
This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room
Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you
avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and
achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied
optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound
your speakers produce in your actual listening
environment.
Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be
output during the auto setup procedure.
If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen,
follow the troubleshooting on page 31.
YPAO performs the following checks and makes
appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible
sound from your system.
Wiring
Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of
each speaker.
Distance
Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening
position and adjusts the timing of each channel.
Size
Checks the speakers frequency response and sets the
appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel.
Equalizing
Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric
equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and
create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly
important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers
for some channels or have a room with unique sonic
characteristics.
YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three
parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the
seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly
precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics.
Level
Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each
speaker.
1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone
to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front
panel.
After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to
disconnect the optimizer microphone.
The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat.
Keep it away from direct sunlight.
Do not place it on top of this unit.
2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat
level surface with the omni-directional
microphone head upward, at your normal
listening position.
If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer
mic at the same height as your ears would be when
you are seated in your listening position.
AUTO SETUP
Introduction
Notes
Optimizer microphone setup
Notes
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
PROGRAM
MD/TAPEDV D
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
Optimizer microphone position
28
AUTO SETUP
For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible
during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too
much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory.
y
If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut
frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as
viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high
cut frequency to the maximum.
1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup,
then press h.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu,
then press h.
5 Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring,
Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then
press h.
y
Equalizing is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 87).
6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select:
Check To automatically check and adjust the selected
item.
Skip To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
y
When using THX speakers, select “Skip” for Size and make
sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set
(page 62) and that “80Hz” is selected in Bass Cross Over
(page 63).
Starting the setup
CROSSOVER/
HIGH CUT
MIN
MAX
Subwoofer
VOLUME
MIN
MAX
TOP
TITLE
Sound
Option
Basic
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
Information
Setup Type
Start
Setup Menu
Auto Setup
System Memory
Audio Info.
Manual Setup
Input Select
Setup Menu
Setup Type
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
Skip
Check
Wiring
Distance
Size
Skip
Check
Size
Equalizing
Level
Distance
Wiring
Skip
Check
Distance
Size
Equalizing
Wiring
Skip
Check: Natural
Check: Flat
Check: Front
Equalizing
Level
Size
Distance
Skip
Check
Level
Equalizing
Size
29
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
For Equalizing, press k / n to select:
Skip To skip the selected item and perform no
adjustments.
Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all
speakers with higher frequencies being less
emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat”
setting sounds a little harsh.
Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all
speakers. Recommended if all of your
speakers are of similar quality.
Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each
speaker in accordance with the sound of
your front speakers. Recommended if your
front speakers are of much higher quality
than your other speakers.
7 Once you have selected the desired setting,
press l to move back to Setup Menu.
8 Press n to select Setup Type, then select:
Auto To automatically perform the entire
auto setup procedure.
Step To pause for confirmation between
each check in the auto setup procedure.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 87).
9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER.
Loud test tones are output from each speaker and
“Measuring” appears during the auto setup
procedure.
y
To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor
buttons (
k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode,
press k to retry the procedure,
l to cancel auto setup.
If an error message appears during testing, refer to
“Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on
page 31, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto
setup procedure.
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 87).
Setup Menu
Setup Type
Start
Wiring
Distance
Size
Information
Setup Type
Start
Auto
Step
Setup Menu
Information
Start:ENTERStart
Setup Type
Setup Menu
30
AUTO SETUP
You can confirm the results of each analysis.
If you set Setup Type to “Auto”
The results are displayed after all items have been
analyzed.
•Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
•Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
•Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 31.
•Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.
If you set Setup Type to “Step”
The results are displayed individually after each analysis.
Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next
menu item.
Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 31.
Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.
After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement
Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item
are displayed.
Press n and select Setup to set the measured values.
Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure.
Press h and select Detail to view information about
measurement results and warning messages. For more
details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for
the auto setup procedure” on page 31.
Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup
procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on
the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes.
To cancel the settings and exit, select No.
y
If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system
parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to
the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup
menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu,
press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust,
then press ENTER.
If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your
listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate
your system.
Depending on your listening environment, SubWfr:REV may
appear in the Wiring results. In this case, SWFR Phase in the
Manual Setup menu (see page 64) is automatically set to
Reverse. To select the desired setting, change the SWFR Phase
parameter in the Manual Setup menu.
In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer
than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your
subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external
amplifier.
In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the
same band to provide finer adjustments.
Confirming the results
Measurement Over
Successfully
Start
Setup Type
Setup Menu
Retry
Setup
Exit Detail
Notes
Equalizing
Size
Distance
Level
Result
Retry
Next
Exit Detail
31
AUTO SETUP
PREPARATION
Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure
Before auto setup
During auto setup
Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.
Error message Cause Remedy
Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. Unplug the headphones.
No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. Select at least one setup menu item.
Memory Guard! This setting is protected. Remove the protection setting for auto setup
(see page 68).
Error message Cause Remedy
E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not
detected.
Select the front speakers by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP,
then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote
control).
Check the front L/R speaker connections.
E02:No Sur. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. Check the surround speaker connections.
E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. Check the presence speaker connections.
E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is
detected.
Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT
SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you
only have one surround back speaker.
E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. Try auto setup in a quiet environment.
Turn off noisy electric equipment like air
conditioners, or move them away from this unit.
E06:Check Sur. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected,
though surround L/R speakers are not.
Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround
back speaker(s).
E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged
during the auto setup procedure.
Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the
OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel.
E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test
tones.
Check the microphone setting.
Check the speaker connections and placement.
E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled
because a setting that affects auto setup (such as
changing speaker settings, etc.) was changed
during the procedure.
Perform the auto setup procedure again.
E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure
again.
32
AUTO SETUP
After auto setup
The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We
recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again.
Warning message Cause Remedy
W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may
appear depending on the speakers even when
they are connected correctly.
Check the speaker connections.
W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the
listening position is over 24 m (80 ft).
Bring the speaker closer to the listening position.
W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the
speakers is excessive. (No level correction is
made.)
Readjust the speaker installation.
Check the speaker connections.
Use speakers of similar quality.
Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer.
W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the
measurement results of wiring (only occurs
when the wiring measurement procedure is
skipped).
Check the speaker connections.
PLAYBACK
33
BASIC
OPERATION
1 Press STANDBY/ON (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV
to AMP, then press SYSTEM POWER on the
remote control) to turn on the power.
2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this
unit.
3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel
(or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote
control).
Each press turns the respective speakers on or off.
When bi-wiring, select both A and B.
4 Select the input source.
Use the INPUT selector (or press one of the input
selector buttons on the remote control) to select the
input you desire.
The current input source name appears in the front
panel display and video monitor for a few seconds.
5 Start playback or select a broadcast station
on the source component.
Refer to the operation instructions for the component.
See page 41 for details about tuning instructions.
6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level.
PLAYBACK
Basic operations
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
14
7
6
3
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
UU
U
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
EXIT
PURE DIRECT
TOP
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
1
1
7
4
6
3
STANDBY
/ON
POWER
SYSTEM
Front panel
Remote control
or
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A
SPEAKERS
B
B
+10
ENT.
A
SPEAKERS
or
Front panel Remote control
INPUT
Front panel Remote control
or
VOLUME
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
DVD
VCR 1
Selected input source
VOLUME
VOL
+
or
Remote control
Front panel
34
PLAYBACK
7 Select a sound field program if desired.
Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field
program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field
program. See page 48 for details about sound field
programs.
When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following
display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal
level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX
recommendation).3
Front panel operation
Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
Note
PROGRAM
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Remote control
Front panel
or
DialNorm;;+4dB
Selecting sound field programs
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
PROGRAM
VOLUME
HiFi DSP
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
Hall in Munich
Program name
PROGRAM
35
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Remote control operation
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of
the sound field program buttons repeatedly to
select the desired program.
The name of the selected program appears in the front
panel display and video monitor.
y
Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference,
and not on the name of the program.
When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects
the last sound field program used with that source.
Sound field programs cannot be selected when the
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
To adjust the tone
You can adjust the bass/treble
balance for the front left/right and
center channels.
Press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly on the front panel to
select TREBLE or BASS.
Select TREBLE, then rotate
PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the high-
frequency response.
Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to
increase or decrease the low-frequency response.
To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL
repeatedly to select BYPASS.
If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the
low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of
the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right
and center speakers.
TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or
PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected, or when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
If headphones are connected to this unit, the Tone Control
setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones
(see page 60).
To mute the sound
Press MUTE on the remote control.
The MUTE indicator flashes on the
front panel display.
To resume the audio output, press
MUTE again (or press VOL –/+).
The MUTE indicator disappears from
the display.
y
You can adjust the muting level (see page 60).
Notes
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
Sound field
program buttons
AMP/SOURCE/TV
VOLUME
HiFi DSP
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
Hall in Munich
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Program name
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Additional operations
Notes
TONE CONTROL
PROGRAM
MUTE
36
PLAYBACK
To listen with headphones
(“SILENT CINEMA”)
“SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel
music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS
surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT
CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect
headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to
CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When
activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in
the front panel display.
This unit will not be set to SILENT CINEMA when
MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
SILENT CINEMA is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a
2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode.
Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT
Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT”
appears in the front panel display and video monitor.
When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display
and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select
another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel
(or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press
MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the
front panel display and the video monitor.
Enjoying multi-channel software in
6.1/7.1 channel surround
If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use
this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for
multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x,
Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD
SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1
and 6.1/7.1 channel playback.
To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly
when PL xMovie (etc.) is displayed.
Auto (AUTO)
When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is
input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing
back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels.
If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in
the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in
6.1/7.1 channels.
Decoders (select with l / h)
You can select from the following modes depending on
the format of the software you are playing.
PL xMovie
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder.
PL xMusic
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder.
EX/ES
For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels
using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the
DTS-ES decoder.
EX
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1
channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder.
Off (OFF)
For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1
channels.
y
When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1”
(see page 63), the surround back channel will output from the left
SURROUND BACK speaker terminals.
Notes
Note
MULTI CH
INPUT
MULTI CH IN
Front panel Remote control
or
EXTD SUR.
8
II
II
37
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag)
which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these
kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie,
PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually.
6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is
pressed in the following cases:
When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None”
(see page 63).
When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is
being played.
When the source being played does not contain surround L/R
channel signals.
When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played.
When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected.
When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be
reset to AUTO.
The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back
is set to “None” (see page 63).
“PL xMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to
“Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63).
Enjoying 2-channel software in surround
Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played
back on multiple channels.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
STANDARD on the remote control to switch
between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR.
ENHANCED programs.
Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to
select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs.
Press SELECT on the remote control to select
the decoder.
You can select from the following modes depending on
the type of software you are playing and your personal
preference.
When you select the SUR. STANDARD program
<PRO LOGIC>
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
<PL x Movie>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
<PL x Music>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.
<PL x Game>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.
<Neo:6 Cinema>
DTS processing for movie software.
<Neo:6 Music>
DTS processing for music software.
<CS Cinema>*
SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software.
<CS Music>*
SRS Circle Surround processing for music software.
* (U.S.A. model only)
When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE
THEATER or THX programs
<PRO LOGIC>
Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources.
<PL x Movie>
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
<Neo:6 Cinema>
DTS processing for movie software.
y
You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter
in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 99).
You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote
control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message
display.
The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is
set to “None” (see page 63).
Notes
STANDARD
6
MOVIE
4
THX
5
or
SELECT
7
Note
II
II
II
II
II
II
38
PLAYBACK
Listening to high fidelity stereo sound
(PURE DIRECT)
PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP
processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry,
allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity
from analog and PCM sources.
Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct.
The button lights up and the front panel display
automatically goes out
.
y
The front panel display switches on momentarily when an
operation is performed.
To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again.
The indicator around the front panel button goes out and
the previous settings are restored.
To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in
this mode.
When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input,
this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog
input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will
be heard.)
No sound will be output from the subwoofer.
Tone Control (page 35) and GUI menu (page 52) settings are
not effective.
The following operations are not possible during PURE
DIRECT operation:
switching the sound field program
displaying the short message
adjusting GUI menu parameters
all video functions (video conversion etc.)
PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is
set to the standby mode.
Night listening modes
The night listening modes are designed to improve
listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the
type of material you are playing.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press NIGHT
on the remote control repeatedly to select
cinema or music.
When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in
the front panel display lights up.
Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to
reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and
make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes.
Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources
to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds.
Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this
function.
Press l / h to adjust the effect level while
NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed.
This adjusts the level of compression.
Select “MIN” for minimum compression.
Select “MID” for standard compression.
Select “MAX” for maximum compression.
y
NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored
independently.
You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT,
MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected
(even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE
DIRECT is selected).
The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending
on the input source and surround sound settings you use.
Notes
PURE DIRECT
PURE DIRECT
Front panel Remote control
or
Notes
Remote control
NIGHT
AUDIO
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
Remote control
Effect.Lvl:MID
39
PLAYBACK
BASIC
OPERATION
Downmixing to 2 channels
You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multi-
channel sources.
Rotate PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to
AMP, then press STEREO on the remote control)
to select 2ch Stereo.
You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or
BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT.
Listening to unprocessed input signals
In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are
output from only the front left and right speakers. Multi-
channel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate
channels without any additional effect processing.
Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT”
disappears from the display when you want to turn the
sound effect back on.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA
DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates
virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field.
If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP
activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA
DSP sound field program.
Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is
set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases:
When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source.
When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack.
Playing video sources in the
background
You can combine images from a video source with sound
from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy
listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery
from the video source on the video monitor.
Use the input selector buttons to select a video
source, then select an audio source.
If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select
the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT.
Note
Note
2ch Stereo
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
Front panel
or
PROGRAM
Remote control
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
EFFECT
STRAIGHT
Front panel Remote control
or
Note
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
Audio sources
Video sources
40
PLAYBACK
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use as follows.
Press AUDIO SELECT to select an input mode.
In most cases, use AUTO.
AUTO Automatically selects input signals in
the following order:
1) i.LINK
2) HDMI
3) Digital signals
*
4) Analog signals
i.LINK Selects only i.LINK signals.
If no i.LINK signals are input, no
sound is output.
HDMI Selects only HDMI signals.
If no HDMI signals are input, no sound
is output.
COAX/OPT Selects digital signals input at the
OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.
Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also
being input.
ANALOG Selects only analog signals.
If no analog signals are input, no sound
is output.
* If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal,
the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate
sound field program.
y
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 56).
DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD
encoded in DTS.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Displaying information about the input
source
You can display the type, format and sampling frequency
of the current input signal.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
2 Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info.
The following information appears in the display.
Format Signal format display. When the unit
cannot detect a digital signal it
automatically switches to analog input.
Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is
unable to detect the sampling
frequency “?” appears.
Channel Number of source channels in the input
signal. For example, a multi-channel
soundtrack with 3 front channels,
2 surround channels and LFE, is
displayed as “3/2/0.1”.
Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to
detect the bit rate “– – –” appears.
Dialogue Dialogue normalization information
for Dolby Digital signals.
Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby
Digital signals that cue this unit to
automatically switch decoders.
3 Press EXIT.
Selecting audio input modes
Note
AUDIO
SELECT
A.SEL: AUTO
V–AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD–R CD TUNER
PHONO
VOLUME
A
SP
LL R
dB
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
Front panel Remote control
or
Input mode
TOP
TITLE
Sound
Option
Basic
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Sampling
Bitrate
Channel
Format
Flag1
Flag2
Dialogue
---
---
2/0/---
Analog
---
---
---
Auto Setup
Audio Info.
System Memory
TUNING
41
BASIC
OPERATION
There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual.
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Automatic tuning
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select TUNER
as the input source.
2 Press FM/AM to select the reception band.
“FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display.
3 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up on the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin
automatic tuning.
Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l
to tune into a lower frequency.
When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator
lights up and the frequency of the received station is
shown on the front panel display.
Manual tuning
If the signal from the station you want to select is weak,
you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an
FM station will automatically change the reception mode
to monaural reception to increase the signal quality.
1 Select TUNER and the reception band
following steps 1 and 2 as described in
“Automatic tuning”.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator disappears from the front
panel display.
If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this
unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible.
Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into
the desired station manually.
Hold down the button to
continue searching.
TUNING
Automatic and manual tuning
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
1
332
4
INPUT
Front panel
FM/AM
or
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
Lights up
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
AUTO
A
SP
2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD T
U
A AM 630 kHz
PRESET/
TUNING
TUNED
AUTO
A
SP
2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD T
U
A AM 1530 kHz
HiFi DSP
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
Disappears
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
AUTO
A
SP
2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD T
U
A AM 630 kHz
PRESET/
TUNING
42
TUNING
Automatically presetting FM stations
You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store
FM stations. This function enables this unit to
automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals,
and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through
E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any
preset station easily by selecting the preset station number.
1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band.
2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that
the AUTO indicator lights up on the front
panel display.
3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM)
for more than 3 seconds.
The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO
indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic
presetting starts from the frequency currently
displayed and proceeds toward the higher
frequencies.
When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front
panel display shows the frequency of the last preset
station.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8),
automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after
searching all stations.
Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored
automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you
want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually
and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting
stations”.
Automatic preset tuning options
You can select the preset number from which this unit will
store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower
frequencies.
After pressing MEMORY in step 3:
1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to
select the preset number under which the first station
will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when
stations have all been stored up to E8.
2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon
(:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin
tuning toward lower frequencies.
Presetting stations
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
321
FM/AM
AUTO/MAN'L
TUNING
MODE
AUTO
Lights up
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
VOLUME
MEMORY
AUTO
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A1:FM 87.5 MHz
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the preset stations may be cleared.
If so, store the stations again by using the presetting
station methods.
43
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
Manually presetting stations
You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations
in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually.
1 Tune into a station.
See page 41 for tuning instructions.
When tuned into a station, the front panel display
shows the frequency of the station received.
2 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM).
The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds.
3 Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset
station group (A to E) while the MEMORY
indicator is flashing.
The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:)
appears on the front panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a
preset station number (1 to 8) while the
MEMORY indicator is flashing.
Press h to select a higher preset station number.
Press l to select a lower preset station number.
5 Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the
front panel while the MEMORY indicator is
flashing.
The station band and
frequency appear in the front
panel display with the preset
group and number you have
selected.
6 Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations.
Any stored station data existing under a preset number is
cleared when you store a new station under that preset number.
The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with
the station frequency.
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
3 2,5
4
VOLUME
TUNED
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A :AM 630 kHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
MEMORY
Flashes
A/B/C/D/E
VOLUME
MEMORY
TUNED
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
C :AM 630 kHz
Preset group
Notes
PRESET/
TUNING
VOLUME
MEMORY
TUNED
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
C3:AM 630 kHz
MAN'L/AUTO FM
MEMORY
VOLUME
TUNED
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
C3:AM 630 kHz
Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3.
44
TUNING
You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the
preset station number under which it was stored.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press
TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode.
2 Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote
control) to select the preset station group.
The preset group letter appears on the front panel
display and changes each time you press the button.
3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or
PRESET k / n on the remote control) to
select a preset station number (1 through 8).
The preset group and number appear on the front
panel display along with the station band, frequency
and the TUNED indicator lights up.
You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations
with each other. The example below describes the
procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”.
1 Select preset station “E1” by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
See “Selecting preset stations”.
2 Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for
more than 3 seconds.
“E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
3 Select preset station “A5” by using
A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h.
“A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front
panel display.
4 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again.
The stations stored at the two preset assignments are
exchanged.
Selecting preset stations
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
2
3
2
1
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
PRESET
3
2
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1
A/B/C/D/E
or
Front panel
Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
PRESET/
TUNING
or
Front panel
Remote control
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
TUNED
A
SP
/
VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
Exchanging preset stations
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
1,3
1,3
2,4
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MEMORY
TUNED
A
SP
/
VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
E1:FM 87.5 MHz
VOLUME
MEMORY
TUNED
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A5:FM 90.6 MHz
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
A
SP
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
EDIT E1-A5
45
TUNING
BASIC
OPERATION
HD Radio is a new technology that enables AM and FM
radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital
broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved
audio quality and reception as well as new data services.
Furthermore, supplemental program services allow
listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs
multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further
information on HD Radio, visit “www.ibiquity.com”.
This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature,
facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog
FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit
can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist
names, album names, and genres) from supplemental
program services (HD1 to HD8).
Just as for tuning into an analog FM or AM station,
2 tuning methods are available: automatic and manual.
This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD
Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically
receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning
operation may stop. In this case, select one of the preset stations,
or manually tune into the FM station you want to select, then set
the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L).
HD Radio automatic tuning
Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are
strong and there is no interference.
Follow steps 1 through 4 as described in
“Automatic tuning” on page 41.
Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when
tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD
indicators light up and the frequency of the received
station is displayed in the front panel.
If the HD indicator lights up, the broadcast being received
contains an HD Radio digital signal.
HD Radio manual tuning
Manual tuning is recommended when station signals are
weak.
Follow steps 1 through 3 as described in
“Manual tuning” on page 41, then set the tuning
mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE
(AUTO/MAN’L).
Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when
tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD
indicators light up and the frequency of the received
station is displayed in the front panel.
If station signals are weak, analog broadcasts will be played back
instead even in the automatic tuning mode, and the HD indicator
does not light up.
Using HD Radio
HD Radio
tuning
CAUTION
Note
46
TUNING
Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio
programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner
mode. Each audio program contains data programs.
Press PRG SELECT on the remote control
repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio audio
programs.
Press PRG SELECT again within 2 seconds to select
another data program.
The HD indicator may disappear from the front panel
display while toggling between data programs.
Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM
broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are
available for FM broadcasts.
When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD
indicator
disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is
automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds.
Some audio programs may not contain data programs
depending on the broadcasting station and the time period.
The audio programs from HD2 to HD8 can be selected only
when they contain data programs.
There are 3 types of front panel displays that show HD
Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode:
frequency, station and music information.
Press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly
to toggle between the following 3 front panel
displays.
Frequency information
(Preset group / FM or AM / Frequency)
Station information
(Station name / FM or AM / Audio program)
Station information is available when a station name is
received as data in 4 alphabetical codes.
Music information
(Song title / Artist name / Album name / Genre)
Music information is available only when data programs
are received.
If the music information is long, it automatically scrolls to
the left in the front panel display.
y
HD Radio information is also available in the GUI menu
(see page 55).
Selecting HD Radio
audio programs
Notes
Displaying HD Radio
information
VOLUME
TUNED
AUTO HD
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A FM 87.5 MHz
HiFi DSP
VOLUME
TUNED
AUTO
STEREO
HD
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
WXYZ-FM : HD1
HiFi DSP
Station name
Audio program
VOLUME
TUNED
AUTO HD
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
FM Radio - CD
HiFi DSP
RECORDING
47
BASIC
OPERATION
You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 control to record one
source while watching and/or listening to another source.
Recording adjustments and other operations are
performed from the recording components. Refer to the
operation instructions for those components.
1 Turn on the power of this unit and all
connected components.
2 Select the source component you want to
record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2.
To record the current input source that you are
watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to
SOURCE/REMOTE.
To record a source other than the one that you are
watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to
the source you want to record.
After this setting, you can change the source you
are listening to and/or watching without effecting
the recording by rotating the INPUT selector (or
pressing one of the input selector buttons on the
remote control).
3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station)
on the source component.
4 Start recording on the recording component.
y
To record audio and video from different sources, set REC
OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source
first then select an audio source (see page 39).
Do a test recording before you start an actual recording.
The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 are always
the same.
When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record
between other components connected to this unit.
The setting of TONE CONTROL, (see page 60) VOLUME,
Speaker Level (page 65) and programs does not affect recorded
material.
A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit
cannot be recorded.
S-video and composite video signals pass independently
through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or
dubbing video signals, if your video source component is
connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite
video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a
composite video) signal to your VCR.
Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not
output at the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording.
Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are
not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your
source component is connected to provide only digital (or
analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals.
A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT
channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not
output on VCR 1 OUT.)
Check the copyright laws in your country to record from
records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may
infringe copyright laws.
Audio signals input from the selected i.LINK or HDMI
components are output to REC OUT when REC OUT/ZONE 2
on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE or to the source
you want to record. However, multi-channel DVD audio
signals, DSD signals of Super Audio CD and 2-channel PCM
signals over 48 kHz of sampling frequency cannot be output to
REC OUT.
Special considerations when recording
DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to
digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise
being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to
record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them,
the following considerations and adjustments need to be
made.
For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player
is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation
instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will
be output from the player.
RECORDING
A
SPEAKERS
B
MULTI CH
INPUT
AUDIO
SELECT
TONE
CONTROL
STRAIGHT
PRESET/
TUNING
EDIT
MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EFFECT
TUNING
MODE
MEMORY
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
FM/AM
A/B/C/D/E
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO VIDEO L
VIDEO/AUX
AUDIO R OPTICAL
PHONES
PRESET/
TUNING
OPTIMIZER
MIC
VOLUME
PROGRAM
INPUT
PURE DIRECT
STANDBY
/ON
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
21
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
Notes
If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the
picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
48
This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from
almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field
processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience.
Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous
concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters.
y
The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to
AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal.
This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in
actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right.
Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself.
You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI”
can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel
(stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35.
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
Notes
For movie/video sources
Sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features
MULTI
2-CH
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back
2-channel sources as is.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
TV Sports
CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow,
the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall.
This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as
news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs.
ENTERTAINMENT
Mono Movie
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural
video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum
reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field.
ENTERTAINMENT
Game
CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video
game sounds.
4
MOVIE THEATER
Spectacle
CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field
of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail,
making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any
kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS
(especially large-scale movie productions).
MOVIE THEATER
Sci-Fi
CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound
effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad
and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films
in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and
DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques.
MOVIE THEATER
Adventure
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the
sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The
sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the
reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible.
MOVIE THEATER
General
CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm
and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive
sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all
around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations
without losing clarity.
49
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
SOUND FIELD
PROGRAMS
MULTI
2-CH
5
THX
THX Cinema
THX processing for movie software.
THX
THX Game
THX processing for game software.
THX
THX Select2 Cinema
THX Select2 processing for movie software.
MULTI
THX
THX Surr. EX
THX processing for any 5.1 channel source.
6
SUR. STANDARD
DOLBY DIGITAL
Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
SUR. STANDARD
q D+PL x Movie
Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DOLBY D EX
Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS
Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS 96/24
Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS+PL x Movie
Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS+DOLBY EX
Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS ES
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for DTS sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS 96/24 ES
Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete)
for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources.
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
2-CH
SUR. STANDARD
PRO LOGIC
Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources.
SUR. STANDARD
PL x Movie
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software.
SUR. STANDARD
PL Movie
Dolby Pro Logic processing for movie software.
SUR. STANDARD
PL x Game
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software.
SUR. STANDARD
PL Game
Dolby Pro Logic processing for game software.
SUR. STANDARD
Neo:6 Cinema
DTS processing for movie software.
SUR. STANDARD
CS Cinema
SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software.
(U.S.A. model only)
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
Sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features
II
II
II
II
II
II
II
50
SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS
You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc.
Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to
select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35.
For music sources
Sources
Remote
control
button
Program Features
MULTI
2-CH
1
STEREO
2ch Stereo
2 channel (left and right) playback.
STEREO
7ch Stereo
HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all
speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at
parties, etc.
2
MUSIC
Hall in Munich
HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has
approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is
relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully.
MUSIC
Hall in Vienna
HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately
1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which
produce a very full, rich sound.
MUSIC
Freiburg
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big
church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is
very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field
programs.
MUSIC
The Bttm Line
HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”,
a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in
a sound field offering real and vibrant sound.
MUSIC
The Roxy Thtr
HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data
for this program was recorded at LAs “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual
seat is at the center-left of the hall.
MUSIC
Pop/Rock
CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets
you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert.
MUSIC
Classic/Opera
CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and
overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is
relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a
concert hall.
3
ENTERTAINMENT
Disco
HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively
disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is
also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound.
5
THX
THX Music
THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources.
MULTI
6
SUR. STANDARD
q D+PL x Music
Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.
SUR. STANDARD
DTS+PL x Music
Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources.
SUR. ENHANCED
CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder.
2-CH
SUR. STANDARD
PL x Music
Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software.
SUR. STANDARD
PL Music
Dolby Pro Logic processing for music software.
SUR. STANDARD
Neo:6 Music
DTS processing for music software.
SUR. STANDARD
CS Music
SRS Circle Surround processing for music software.
(U.S.A. model only)
II
II
II
II
II
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
51
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the
standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep
timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit
is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also
automatically turns off any external components
connected to the AC OUTLET(S).
Setting the sleep timer
1 Select a source and start playback on the
source component.
2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to
set the amount of time.
Each time you press SLEEP, the front
panel display changes as shown
below. The SLEEP indicator flashes
while switching the amount of time for
the sleep timer.
The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel
display, and the display returns to the selected sound
field program.
Canceling the sleep timer
Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on
the front panel display.
After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the
SLEEP indicator goes off.
y
The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing
STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front
panel) to set this unit to the standby mode.
ADVANCED OPERATIONS
Using the sleep timer
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
2
SLEEP
SLEEP 120 min SLEEP 90 min
SLEEP 60 minSLEEP 30 minSLEEP OFF
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
SLEEP 120min
VOLUME
SLEEP
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
VCR 1
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
Hall in Munich
SLEEP
SYSTEM OPTIONS
52
You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates.
Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment.
HDMI (HDMI menu)
Use to edit HDMI parameters (see page 95).
i.LINK Select (i.LINK select menu)
Use to edit i.LINK parameters (see page 91).
Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu)
Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 99).
Input Select (Input select menu)
Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack
(see page 55).
Manual Setup (Manual setup menu)
Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings (see page 58).
Sound (Sound menu)
Use to manually adjust the sound parameters.
Basic (Basic menu)
Use to quickly setup basic system parameters.
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Item Features Page
I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
55
Audio Select Selects the type of input signal to be used.
56
Decoder Mode Selects the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
56
Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
56
Rename Changes the name of the input.
57
Item Features Page
LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
58
Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker.
59
Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones.
60
Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.
60
Item Features Page
Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.
62
Speaker Set
Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output,
and the cross over frequency.
62
Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
64
Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
65
THX Set Adjusts the THX settings.
65
53
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Option (Options menu)
Use to adjust the optional system settings.
Auto Setup (Auto setup menu)
Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 27).
System Memory (System memory menu)
Use to save and recall various settings (see page 69).
Audio Info. (Audio signal information menu)
Use to check audio signal information (see page 40).
Item Features Page
Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.
66
Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings.
67
Sur.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs.
67
Audio Select Selects the initial input mode of the source.
68
Decoder Mode Selects the decoder used by this unit.
68
Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings.
68
54
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter. (Speaker set is used in the following example
to change parameter settings.)
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
2 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then
press h to enter the selected menu.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n
repeatedly to change the setting of the item
you want to adjust.
5 Press EXIT.
y
If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press
ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item.
The available parameters may be displayed on more than one
page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n.
You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is
set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set
Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68).
Changing parameter settings
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
1
1
2-4
5
TOP
TITLE
Sound
Option
Basic
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Center
Surround
Front
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
None
Large
Small
Surround
Surround Back
Presence
Center
Front
Notes
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data
from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby
mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC
outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to
power failure. However, if the power is cut for more
than one week, the parameter values will return to the
factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter
value again.
60Hz
40Hz
90Hz
100Hz
80Hz (THX)
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Bass Out
Presence
60Hz
40Hz
90Hz
100Hz
80Hz (THX)
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Bass Out
Presence
55
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the
input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the
signal input at each jack.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select Input Select, then press h.
3 Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then
press h to access and adjust.
Information (Information)
There are 2 types of GUI displays that show HD Radio
information when the unit is in the tuner mode: station and
music information.
Input Select > TUNER > Information >
Station information
(Band / Frequency / Station name / Program /
Program type)
Station information is available when a station name is
received as data in 4 alphabetical codes.
Music information
Page 1: the summary of music information
(Song title / Artist name / Album name)
Page 2: the details of the song title
Page 3: the details of the artist
Page 4: the details of the album
Page 5: the details of the genre
Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between pages.
Press ENTER on the remote control to hold the display
temporarily. “Hold:ENTER” changes to
“Release:ENTER”. Press ENTER again to release it.
Music information is available only when data programs
are received.
y
HD Radio information is also available in the front panel display
menu (see page 46).
I/O Assignment
(Input/output assignment)
You can assign the digital audio input/output and
component video jacks to other components if this unit’s
initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change
the following parameters to reassign the jacks and
effectively connect more components.
Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the
corresponding component using the INPUT selector on
the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote
control.
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
I/O Assignment >
Example 1:
To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input.
1) Select Input Select, then select DVD.
2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select
7 CD.
Input Select
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MD/TAPE
CD-R
DTV
CBL/SAT
DVD
Input Select
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
Stereo/Surround
Station
Current
Information
Volume Trim
Rename
Music
Freq.
Program Type
Name
Band
Program
FM
87.50MHz
Current
Station
Music
Hold:ENTER [1] 2
Station
Music
56
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Example 2:
To clear a jack assignment.
1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD,
etc.).
2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment
(Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or
Component Video).
3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the
assignment.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same
type of jack.
When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and
OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the
COAXIAL jack.
Audio Select (Audio selection)
This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can
select the type of input signal you want to use.
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Audio Select >
Choices: Auto, i.LINK, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog
Select “Auto” if you want signals to be input to this
unit in the following order: i.LINK signals,
HDMI
signals, digital signals
*
and analog signals.
Select “i.LINK” if you only want i.LINK signals to be
input to this unit. If no i.LINK signals are input, no
sound is output.
Select “HDMI” if you only want HDMI signals to be
input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no
sound is output.
Select “Coax/Opt” if you want digital signals to be
input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks.
Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input.
Select “Analog” if you only want analog signals to be
input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no
sound is output.
*
If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the
decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound
field program.
y
You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the
power is turned on (see page 68).
DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD
encoded in DTS.
If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any
way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you
make a digital connection between this unit and the player.
Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can
designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 55)
for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.).
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
Decoder Mode >
Choices: Auto, DTS
Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the
input mode.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Volume Trim (Volume trimming)
You can adjust the level of the signal input at each jack.
This is useful if you want to balance the level of each
input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when
switching between input sources.
Manual Setup > Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) >
Volume Trim >
Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using
this setting.
Notes
Optical Input
Coaxial Input
Optical Output
I/O Assignment
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
i.LINK
HDMI
Auto
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
I/O Assignment
Note
Note
DTS
Auto
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Audio Select
I/O Assignment
Volume Trim
Rename
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
0.0dB
57
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Rename (Rename)
Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the
GUI or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the
source component in the following example.)
Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename
1 Press an input selector button to select the
input you want to change the name of.
2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under
the space or character you want to edit.
3 Press ENTER to select a character type
(CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK).
4 Press k / n to select the character you want
to use and l / h to move to the next one.
You can use up to 8 characters for each input.
Press n to change the character in the following
order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press
ENTER to switch between character types:
CAPITAL A to Z, space
SMALL a to z, space
FIGURE 0 to 9, space
MARK !, #, %, &, etc.
Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input.
5 Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER
when complete.
y
To change source names in the display window on the remote
control, see page 75.
This menu item is also available in the changing source names
in the display window feature (see page 75), and in the front
panel display system options menu (see page 89).
You can only change the name of the current input source
(except for multi channel input sources) using this setting.
Multi CH Assign
(Multi channel assignment)
Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input
into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a
source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT
jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an
external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the
additional front signals.
Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign >
Input Channels
This setting is used to select the number of channels input
from an external decoder.
Choices: 6ch, 8ch
If Zone2 Amplifier (page 67) is set to “Internal”, no sound is
output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”.
In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external
component to 6 channels.
Front Input
If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select
analog jacks at which front signals from an external
decoder will be input.
Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2,
V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Note
CAPITAL
OK RESET
DVD
Decoder Mode
Volume Trim
Rename
Note
Input Channels
Front Input
Multi CH Assign
Volume Trim
58
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
3 Select Sound, then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level)
Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency
effect) channel according to the capacity of your
subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries
low-frequency special effects which are only added to
certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level >
Choices: –20.0 to 0.0 (dB)
Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level)
Select to adjust the speaker LFE level.
Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect
level)
Select to adjust the headphone LFE level.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be
output at the SUBWOOFER jack.
Dynamic Range (Dynamic range)
Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to
be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting
is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital
and DTS signals.
To access these parameters, select:
Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range >
Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard),
MIN (minimum)
Speaker (Speaker dynamic range)
Select to adjust the speaker compression.
Headphone (Headphone dynamic range)
Select to adjust the headphone compression.
Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of
dynamic range.
Select “STD” for general use.
Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume
levels.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Manual Setup (Sound)
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Sound
Basic
Option
Speaker
Headphone
0.0dB
Note
Speaker
Headphone
STD
MIN
MAX
59
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer)
Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer for any
speaker.
Manual Setup > Sound > Parametric EQ >
1 Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker
you want to adjust.
Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output
when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker.
Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left
speaker.
Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right
speaker.
Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center
speaker.
Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround left speaker.
Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround right speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence left speaker.
Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the
presence right speaker.
2 Press h to access the settings window.
3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press
ENTER to select a parameter from Band
(band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor).
4 Press n to select EDIT and press ENTER to
access the edit window.
The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted.
•Press l / h to adjust the parameter.
•Press k / n to adjust the Gain.
Press ENTER to exit the edit window.
5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied
with the results.
y
If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the
selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER.
6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the
settings window.
y
If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a
graphic equalizer.
For more information on the parametric equalizer, see
“PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 114.
Front L
Front R
Test Tone
Dynamic Range
LFE Level
Tone Control
Audio Option
Parametric EQ
Front L
Band / Gain
PARAM RESET
EDIT EXIT
Front R
Center
Test Tone
Front L
Q
Freq.
Gain
Band
1.000
125.0Hz
0.0dB
#1
Front R
Center
Test Tone
60
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Tone Control (Tone control)
Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your
speakers and headphones.
Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control >
Choices: Control, Bass, Treble
Control (Tone control)
Choices: Defeat, Speakers, Headphones
Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any
adjustments.
Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of
your speakers.
Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance
of your headphones.
Bass (Bass control)
Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz (frequency)
–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB
Treble (Treble control)
Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your
speakers or headphones.
Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz (frequency)
–6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Tone Control is not effective when:
THX (pages 49 to to 50) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is
selected.
MULTI CH INPUT is selected.
Audio Option (Audio options)
Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings.
Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option >
Choices: Muting Type, Audio Delay, PR/SB Select
Muting Type (Muting type)
Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the
output volume.
Choices: Full, –20dB
Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound.
Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB.
Audio Delay (Audio delay)
Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the
video image. This may be necessary when using certain
LCD monitors or projectors.
Choices: 0 to 240 (ms)
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Speakers
Headphones
Defeat
Bass
Treble
Control
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 125Hz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
-6
Bass
Treble
Control
Speaker
Freq : 3.5kHz
Gain : 0.0dB
+6
+0
-6
Note
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/SB Select
-20dB
Full
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/PB Select
0ms
61
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
PR/SB Select (Presence/surround back speaker
selection)
Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound
simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker
set when playing sources that contain surround back
channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field
programs.
Choices: Presence, Surround Back
Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when
surround back channel signals are input. The signals
for the surround back channel will be output from
surround speakers.
Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers
when a surround back channel signal is detected in a
CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will
be output from front speakers.
Use this menu to set up basic system parameters.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
3 Select Basic, then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
y
Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set
automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic
menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running
auto setup first.
You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup
procedure (see page 27).
Muting Type
Audio Delay
PR/SB Select
Surround Back
Presence
Manual Setup (Basic)
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Test Tone
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Sound
Basic
Option
62
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Test Tone (Test tone)
Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set,
Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings.
Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone >
Choices: Off, On
y
If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point
upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the
meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each
speaker to 75 dB.
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 88).
Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case,
make sure no children are present in the listening room.
Speaker Set (Speaker set)
Use to manually adjust any speaker setting.
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set >
Choices: Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back,
Presence, Bass Out, Bass Cross Over, SWFR Phase
y
If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers,
you can change these settings according to your preference.
Set any THX speakers to Small.
Front (Front speakers)
Choices: Large, Small
Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The
unit directs the entire range of the front left and right
channel signals to the front left and right speakers.
Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.
Center (Center speaker)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The
unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal
to the center speaker.
Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The
unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center
channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out.
Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The
unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front
left and right speakers.
Surround (Surround left/right speakers)
Choices: Large, Small, None
Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right
speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the
surround speakers. The entire range of the surround
channel signal is directed to the surround left and right
speakers.
Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass
Out.
Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers.
This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode
(see page 39) and automatically sets the surround back
speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”.
Note
Note
Off
On
Speaker Set
Speaker Distance
Test Tone
Large
Small
Center
Surround
Front
Large
Small
NoneSurround
Surround Back
Center
Front
Large
Small
NoneSurround Back
Presence
Surround
Center
Front
63
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Surround Back (Surround back left/right
speakers)
Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2,
None
Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back
speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back left
speaker.
Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back
speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channel are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are
directed to the surround back left speaker.
Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back
speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround
back channels are directed to the speakers selected with
Bass Out.
Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back
speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the
surround back channel signal to the surround back
speakers.
Select “None” if you do not have a surround back
speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back
channel signal to the surround left and right speakers.
If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the
SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals.
Presence (Presence speakers)
Choices: None, Yes
Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers.
This unit directs all presence channel signals to the
front left and right speakers.
Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers.
When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 67),
Presence is automatically set to “None”.
Bass Out (Bass out)
LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit
decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These
low-frequency signals can be directed to both front left
and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be
used for both stereo reproduction and sound field
programs).
Choices: Both, SWFR, Front
THX recommendation: SWFR
Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer.
Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both
the subwoofer and front channels, and all other
low-frequency signals are directed in accordance with
other speaker settings.
Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit
directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in
accordance with other speaker settings.
Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer.
The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to
the front speakers (even if you have previously set
Front to Small in Speaker Set).
Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over)
Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency
for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the
selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer.
Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz,
110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz
THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX)
Note
Note
Small x1
Small x2
Large x1
None
Large x2
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Surround
Center
None
Yes
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
Surround
Notes
Both
SWFR
Front
Surround Back
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
60Hz
40Hz
80Hz (THX)
90Hz
100Hz
Presence
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
64
SYSTEM OPTIONS
SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase)
If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to
adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your
subwoofer.
Choices: Normal, Reverse
Select “Normal” not to reverse the phase for your
subwoofer(s).
Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase for your
subwoofer(s).
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 88).
Speaker Distance (Speaker distance)
Use this feature to manually input the distance of each
speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective
channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance
from the main listening position. However, this is not
possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount
of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker
so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the
same time.
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance >
Unit (Unit)
Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft)
Initial setting:U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet (ft)
Other models: Meter (m)
Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters.
Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet.
Speaker distances
Choices: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft)
Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft)
Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker.
Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker.
Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker.
Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left
speaker.
Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right
speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the
surround back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left
speaker.
Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right
speaker.
Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 88).
You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
distance in Surround Back L.
Normal
Reverse
Bass Out
Bass Cross Over
SWFR Phase
Speaker Distance
Speaker Level
Test Tone
Speaker Set
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Center
THX Set
Meter
Feet
Front L
Front R
Subwoofer
Unit
Presence R
Notes
65
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Speaker Level (Speaker level)
Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels
between the front left speakers and each speaker selected
in Speaker Set (see page 62).
Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level
Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB
Initial setting: 0.0 dB
Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker.
Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker.
Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker.
Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left
speaker.
Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right
speaker.
Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround
back left speaker.
Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the
surround back right speaker.
Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and
presence left speakers.
Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and
presence right speakers.
Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer.
y
To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use Test Tone
(see page 62).
This menu item is also available in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 88).
You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to
the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the
balance in Surround Back L.
THX Set (THX settings)
Use to manually adjust the THX settings.
Manual Setup > Basic > THX Set >
SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker
distance)
Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when
you have to place the surround back speakers apart.
Choices:
U.S.A. and Canada models: under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft
Other models: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m
Select “under 0.3m” or “under 1ft” if the distance
between the two surround back speakers is less than
0.3 m (1 ft).
Select “0.3 – 1.2m” or “1 – 4ft” if the distance between
the two surround back speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2
m (1 and 4 ft).
Select “over 1.2m” or “over 4ft” if the distance
between the two surround back speakers is more than
1.2 m (4 ft).
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 88).
Notes
Speaker Distance
Presence R
Subwoofer
Speaker Level
Speaker Set
Front R
Center
Front L
THX Set
Speaker Level
Information
Input Mode
THX Set
SB Speaker Dist.
Output
Dimmer
Dimmer
Speaker B
Speaker B
Zone 3 Volume
Speaker Distance
Support Audio
Information
Input Mode
SB Speaker Dist.
0.3-1.2m
over 1.2m
Dimmer
Dimmer
Zone 3 Volume
Input Assign
under 0.3m
66
SYSTEM OPTIONS
This menu adjusts the optional system settings.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select Manual Setup, then press h.
3 Select Option then press h.
4 Select the desired parameters, then press h
to access and adjust.
5 When finished adjusting parameters, press
ENTER.
Display (Display)
Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays.
Manual Setup > Option > Display >
Choices: Dimmer, Video Conv., Short Message, Position,
Wall Paper
Dimmer (Dimmer)
Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display.
Choices: –4 to 0
Video Conv. (Video conversion)
Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite
(VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals.
This allows you to output converted video signals at
the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no
S-video or component signals are input. This feature also
converts S-video signals to component signals when no
component signals are input.
Choices: Off, On
Select “Off” not to convert any signals.
Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video
and component signals, and to convert S-video signals
to component signals.
y
When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv.
to “Off”.
Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT
jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video
connections (composite or S-video) between each component.
When converting composite video or S-video signals from a
VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer
depending on your VCR.
Short Message (Short message)
Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display.
Choices: Off, On
Select “Off” to turn off the short message display.
Select “On” to turn on the short message display.
The short message display may not display properly depending
on the type of input signal and video monitor used.
If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not
displayed even if “On” is selected.
Position (Position)
Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the
GUI display.
Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right)
•Press k to raise the position of the GUI display.
•Press n to lower the position of the GUI display.
•Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the
right.
Press
l
to shift the position of the GUI display to the left.
Wall Paper (Wallpaper)
Use this feature to select the background when no image is
input from an external source. If you do not want to
display the background, select None.
Choices: None, Yes, Gray
If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if
“Yes” is selected.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
Manual Setup (Option)
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Multi Zone
Display
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Sur.Initialize
Sound
Basic
Option
Display
Sur.Initialize
Multi Zone
Short Message
Position
Dimmer
Video Conv.
Wall Paper
Notes
Notes
Note
67
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Multi Zone (Multi zone)
Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B
settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone >
Choices: Speaker B, Zone2 Amplifier, Zone2 Volume,
Zone3 Volume
Speaker B (Speaker B)
Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers
connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals.
Choices: Main, Zone B
Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B
when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B
terminals are set in the main room.
Select “Zone B” if the speakers connected to the
SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If
SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is
turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in
the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound
from SPEAKERS B only.
If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES
jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones
and SPEAKERS B.
When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters
the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode.
Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier)
Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified.
Choices: Internal, External
Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers
through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s
ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks.
Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if
you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s
PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals.
Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2
feature.
When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting
automatically switches to “None”.
When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting
automatically switches to “Variable”.
Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2
Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically
set to “Variable”.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume)
Use to select how the volume control will operate with
regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks.
Choices: Fixed, Variable
Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume
level to a standard line level.
Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT
volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote
control.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize)
Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound
field program within sound field program groups. When
you initialize a sound field program group, all of the
parameter values within that group revert to their initial
settings.
Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in
blue.
Manual Setup > Option > Sur.Initialize
Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT,
MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All
Press k / n to select the sound field program you want
to initialize, then press ENTER.
Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field
program parameters.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory
Guard is set to “On” (see page 68).
Notes
Notes
Display
Sur.Initialize
Audio Select
Multi Zone
Zone2 Amplifier
Zone2 Volume
Speaker B
Zone3 Volume
Note
Multi Zone
Display
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
SURROUND
All
Audio Select
Decoder Mode
Sur.Initialize
68
SYSTEM OPTIONS
Audio Select (Audio selection)
Use this feature to designate the default input mode this
unit selects when the power is turned on and the input
source (such as a DVD player) is connected to the
DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit.
Manual Setup > Option > Audio Select
Choices: Auto, Last
Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
input mode.
Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last input mode used for the connected
source.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 89).
Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the
EXTD SUR. button.
Decoder Mode (Decoder mode)
You can select the decoder used by this unit.
Manual Setup > Option > Decoder Mode
Choices: Auto, Last
Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically
detect input signal types and select the appropriate
decoder.
Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically
select the last decoder used for the connected source.
Memory Guard (Memory Guard)
Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP
program parameter values and other system settings.
Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard
Choices: Off, On
Select “On” to protect:
DSP program parameters
All menu items except Memory Guard and System
Memory – Load.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
In general, front panel and remote control operations are not
affected when Memory Guard is set to “On”. However, you
cannot adjust the tone control using Tone Control.
Note
Multi Zone
Audio Select
Sur.Initialize
Decoder Mode
Auto
Last
Memory Guard
Sur. Initialize
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
Memory Guard
Auto
Last
Note
Decoder Mode
Audio Select
Memory Guard
Off
On
69
SYSTEM OPTIONS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite
settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can
save settings such as the following:
Sound field program parameters
Speaker settings
Speaker channel settings
LFE level
Dynamic range settings
Parametric equalizer settings
To save settings
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select System Memory, then press h.
3 Select Save, then press ENTER.
Current displays the current settings of this unit.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory
number under which you want to save the
settings, then press h.
“Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
5 Press ENTER to save the settings.
To recall settings
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select System Memory, then press h.
3 Select Load, then press ENTER.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory
number you want to recall, then press h.
“Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of
the window.
5 Press ENTER to recall the settings.
y
Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by
pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control.
When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1?
Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings.
When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2?
Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press
MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings.
System Memory
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Sci-Fi
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Sci-Fi
Speaker
SpeakerCH
LFE Level
D-Range
PEQ
A:ON B:OFF
3/4/0.1
0dB
MAX
Reset
Current
Memory 1
Memory 2
Memory 3
0
MEMORY1 2
9
0
MEMORY1 2
9
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
70
In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by
YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the
appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire
functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter.
Controlling this unit
The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit
after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the
AMP mode.
Controlling other components
The shaded areas below can be used to control other
components. Each button has a different function
depending on the selected components. Select the
component you want to control by pressing an input
selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the
selected component appears in the display window.
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
Control area
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1 2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
The buttons inside
the dotted lines
control this unit in
any mode
(SYSTEM
POWER,
STANDBY,
SLEEP, AUDIO
SELECT, the input
selector buttons,
VOL +/–, MUTE,
PURE DIRECT and
STRAIGHT/
EFFECT).
AMP/SOURCE/
TV
Set to AMP to
operate this unit.
Display
window
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
1 2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD. SUR
STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
EXIT
MENU
FREQ/RDS
FREQ/RDS
EON
EON
MODE
MODE
PTY SEEK
PTY SEEK
START
START
REC
DISC SKIP
RETURN
DISPLAY
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
1 2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
POWER POWER
AV
TV
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
+
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
Component
control area
You can control up
to 14 different
components by
setting appropriate
remote control
codes (see page 81).
The A/B and input
selector buttons
switch the function
of the component
control area below.
*
Use the A/B
buttons to control
other components
regardless of whether
they are connected to
this unit.
Factory setting:
A...LD player
B...Tape deck
Display
window
AMP/
SOURCE/
TV
Set to
SOURCE to
operate the
component
selected with
an input
selector
button.
Set to TV to
operate the
television
(you must set
the remote
control code
in DTV or
PHONO).
SELECT k / n
switches control to
another component
without changing
the input source on
this unit.
71
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Controlling optional components
(OPTN area)
OPTN is an additional component control area that can be
programmed with remote control functions independently
from any input source. This area is useful for
programming commands that are to be used only as a part
of a macro function or for components that do not have a
valid remote control code.
To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until
OPTN appears in the display window.
You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 73
to program buttons operated within this component control
area.
The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is
selected in the amplifier library (see page 72).
You can control other components by setting the
appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for
each input area. For a complete list of available remote
control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL
CODES” at the end of this manual.
The following table shows the default component
(Library: component category) and the remote control
code for each input area.
Remote Control Code Default Settings
You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even
if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above.
In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to set up.
Notes
Setting remote control codes
Input area
Library
(component
category)
Default YAMAHA
code
ALD2200
BTAPE2700
PHONO TV –
TUNER TUNER 2602
CD CD 2300
MULTI CH
INPUT
DVD 2102
V-AUX VCR –
CBL/SAT CABLE
MD/TAPE MD 2500
CD-R CD-R 2400
DTV TV
VCR 1 VCR
DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807
DVD DVD 2102
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
72
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds
using a ballpoint pen or similar object.
The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected
component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in
the display window.
y
If you want to setup for another component, press the input
selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component.
Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds,
otherwise the learning process will start.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
If you want to change a library (component
category), press l / h. You can set a
different type of component.
Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L;CD,
L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner),
L;AMP
*
, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite),
L:VCR
* The amplifier library (L;AMP) code is preset to “2000” in
order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by
entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary.
Setting remote control AMP codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
AMP code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE, then
change the remote control code settings.
Setting remote control tuner codes
Select one of the following codes to set the remote control
tuner code for the component you want to use.
Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and the unit to the
tuner mode by pressing TUNER on the remote control,
then change the remote control code settings.
When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you
may be able to operate the other components simultaneously
with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the
alternative codes to operate this unit separately.
4 Press ENTER.
The four-digit code set for the selected component
appears in the display window.
“0000” appears in the display window if no code has been
set.
5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the
four-digit remote control code for the
component you want to use.
For a complete list of available remote control codes,
refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
6 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if the setting
was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
y
If you continuously want to set up another code for another
component, press the input selector button or
SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4
through 6.
Notes
AMP library
code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control
AMP ID
(this unit’s
setting:
see page 86)
2000
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2001
To operate this unit using
the default code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features (see page 82).
2002
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
2003
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3
features of other YAMAHA
receivers/amplifiers
(see page 82).
LEARN
Tuner
library code
(remote
control
setting)
Function
Remote
control
tuner ID
(this units
setting:
see page 86)
2602
(initial setting)
To operate this unit using
the default code.
ID1
(initial setting)
2603
To operate this unit using an
alternative code.
ID2
Note
Note
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
73
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup
mode.
8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to
see if you can control your component. If you
can, the remote control code is correct.
y
If the manufacturer of your component has more than one
code, try each of them until you find the correct one.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes
for commercially available audio and video components
(including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible
with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote
control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming
codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote
control supplied with the component.
Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over
remote control code functions.
Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not
included in the basic operations covered by remote control
codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not
available. You can program any of the buttons available in
the component control area (see page 70). The buttons can
be programmed independently for each component.
This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote
control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most
of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some
special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the
operating instructions for the other remote control.)
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select a
source component.
3 Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm
(2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control
on a flat surface so that their infrared
transmitters are aimed at each other.
Notes
LEARN
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS
FREQ/RDS
EON
EON
MODE
MODE
PTY SEEK
PTY SEEK
START
START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
Programming codes from other
remote controls (Learn)
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in)
74
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name (ex.
“DVD”) appear alternately in the display window.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control
code setting mode.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
5 Press the button for which you want to
program the new function.
“LEARN” appears in the display window.
6 Press and hold the button you want to
program on the other remote control until
“OK” appears in the display window.
“NG” appears in the display window if learning was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5.
y
If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5
and 6.
If you continuously want to program another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, then repeat steps 5 and 6.
7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more
than one button simultaneously.
This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions.
However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may
appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this
case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room
for further learning.
Learning may not be possible in the following cases:
When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other
components are weak.
When the distance between the two remote controls is too
great or too small.
When the remote control infrared windows are not facing
each other at the appropriate angle.
When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight.
When the function to be programmed is continuous or
uncommon.
Notes
LEARN
EXIT
MENU
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
Notes
LEARN
75
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
You can change the name that appears in the display
window on the remote control if you want to use a
different name than the factory preset. This is useful when
you have set the input selector to control a different
component.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component you want to rename.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press RE-NAME again.
4 Press k / n to select and enter a character.
Pressing n changes the character as follows:
A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon),
/ (slash), and space.
(Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.)
5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next
position.
6 Press ENTER to set the new name.
“OK” appears in the display window if renaming was
successful.
“NG” appears in the display window if renaming was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
y
If you continuously want to rename another component,
press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select
the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6.
7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming
mode.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Changing source names in the
display window
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
RE-NAME
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
Note
A/B/C/D/E
ENTER
PRESET
RE-NAME
76
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example,
when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button
to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button.
The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros
(see page 77).
*1
You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC
OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component.
For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.)
*2
When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 71), you can turn on the power of your TV
without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO.
*3
When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode.
*4
Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD
recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that
component (see page 73) or set a remote control code (see page 71).
Using the Macro feature
Macro buttons First Second Third
(*1)
(CD area) (*4)
(MD/TAPE area) (*4)
(CD-R area) (*4)
(VCR 1 area) (*4)
(DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4)
(DVD area) (*4)
CD
POWER
SYSTEM
CD
(CD area)
Press a macro button To automatically transmit these signals in order
STANDBY
STANDBY
POWER
SYSTEM
POWER
SYSTEM
(*1)
POWER
TV
(*2)
A
B
PHONO
POWER
SYSTEM
PHONO
TUNER
TUNER
(*3)
CD
CD
MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN
V
-
AUX
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT
CBL/SAT
MD/TAPE
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD-R
DTV
DTV
VCR 1
VCR 1
DVR/VCR2
DVR/VCR2
DVD
DVD
77
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Macro operations
1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON.
2 Press a macro button.
When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO
ON/OFF to OFF.
While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not
accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is
complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing).
Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro
is operating until the macro operation is complete.
Programming macro operations
You can program your own macros and use the macro
feature to transmit several remote control commands in
sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote
control codes or perform learning operations before
programming the macro. We do not recommend
programming continuous operations such as volume
control in a macro.
The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is
programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again
when the programmed macro is cleared.
It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default
macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press the macro button you want to use to
operate the macro.
The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the
selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear
alternately in the display window.
“AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a
button other than a macro button.
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS
FREQ/RDS
EON
EON
MODE
MODE
PTY SEEK
PTY SEEK
START
START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
MACROMACRO ON/OFF
Macro buttons
Notes
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
78
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4 Press the buttons for the functions you want
to include in the macro operation in
sequence.
You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you
have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote
control automatically exits the macro mode.
To change the selected source component, press
SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will
program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes
the selected component and corresponding component control
area.
5 Press MACRO again when the operation
sequence you want to program is complete.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a
button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press
more than one button simultaneously.
You can clear all changes made in each function set, such
as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and
setup remote control codes.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“CLEAR” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled.
In this case, press CLEAR again.
3 Press k / n to select the clear mode.
L;CD (L: name of a component)
Clears all learned functions in the respective
component control area. Press an input selector
button to select the component.
L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control
area.
L;ALL Clears all learned functions.
M;ALL Clears all programmed macros
RNAME Clears all renamed source names.
FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote
to the factory settings.
4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3
seconds.
“WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing
was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display
window.
y
Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the
button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer
setting, if you have set remote control codes).
“L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to
complete.
Note
Note
Memory back-up
If the remote control is without batteries for more than
2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the
remote control, the contents of the memory may be
cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries,
set up the remote control code(s) and program any
acquired functions that may have been cleared.
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
1
2
3
Indicates the
number of macro
steps entered
Flashes alternately so you can
set the next step
MCR 1: DVD
MCR 2: AV POWER
MCR 3: AUDIO SELECT
Clearing function sets
Note
Note
AMP
SOURCE
TV
CLEAR
CLEAR
79
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode.
“C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Clearing a learned function
You can clear the function learned for a certain button in
each control area.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE.
2 Press an input selector button to select the
source component containing the function
you want to clear.
The selected component name appears in the display
window.
3 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar
object.
“LEARN” and the selected component name
(ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display
window.
Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for
more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote
control code setting mode.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within
30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically
canceled. In this case, press LEARN again.
Notes
CLEAR
Clearing individual functions
Notes
AMP
SOURCE
TV
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
LEARN
80
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the button you
want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 4.
If you continuously want to clear another function for
another component, press SELECT k / n to select the
component, then repeat step 4.
Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the
factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have
set remote control codes).
5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the learning mode.
6 Press LEARN again to exit.
“C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Clearing a macro function
You can clear the function programmed for a certain
macro button.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE.
2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or
similar object.
“MCR ?” appears in the display window.
If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30
seconds, the macro programming mode will be
automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again.
3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen
or similar object, then press the macro
button you want to clear for about 3 seconds.
“C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing
was successful.
y
If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat
step 3.
Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts
to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you
have set remote control codes).
4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode.
The remote control returns to the macro
programming mode.
5 Press MACRO again to exit.
“C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was
unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3.
“ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button
not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than
one button simultaneously.
Notes
Note
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
AMP
SOURCE
TV
MACRO
Notes
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
REC
DISC SKIP
MACROONOFF
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
81
REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you
can use this remote to control your other components.
Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the
selected component. Use the input selector buttons to
select the component you want to operate. The remote
control automatically switches to the appropriate control
mode for that component.
*1
This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button.
*2
These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO.
When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area.
*3
These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1.
*4
These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only.
*5
These buttons function for the U.S.A. model only.
Controlling each component
FREQ/RDSFREQ/RDS EONEON MODEMODE PTY SEEKPTY SEEK STARTSTART
CLEAR
LEARN
RE–NAME
EXIT
MENU
REC
DISC SKIP
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDI O
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
1
2B
THX
STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR.
STEREO
MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE
VOL
+
3421
90
+10
ENT.
5678
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
SOURCE
TV
MACROONOFF
A
SPEAKERSMEMORY
PRESET
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
VOL
+
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
1
2
3
5
4
0
A
B
6
7
8
9
DVD player/
DVD recorder
VCR
Cable TV/
Satellite tuner
TV LD player CD player
MD recorder/
CD recorder
Tape deck Tuner
1 AV PO WE R
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
VCR power
*3
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
Power
*1
2 TV POWER
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
Power
*1
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
TV power
*2
3 TV VOL +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
Volume +
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV volume +
*2
TV VOL –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
Volume –
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
TV volume –
*2
CH +
TV channel +
*2
Channel +
Channel + Channel +
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
TV channel +
*2
CH –
TV channel –
*2
Channel –
Channel – Channel –
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV channel –
*2
TV INPUT
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
Input
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV input
*2
TV MUTE
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
Mute
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
TV mute
*2
4 TITLE
Title Title Title Title Band
5 MENU
Menu Menu Menu
Program
select
*5
6 ENTER
Menu enter Menu select Menu select
k Menu up Menu up Menu up
Preset up
(1 to 8)
n Menu down Menu down Menu down
Preset down
(1 to 8)
l
Menu left Menu left Menu left
Preset down
(A to E)
h Menu right Menu right Menu right Direction A/B
Preset up
(A to E)
7 RETURN
Return Return Return Return
8 1-9, 0, +10
Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons
Preset stations (1-8)
9 ll
Search
backward
Search
backward
VCR search
backward
*3
VCR search
backward
*3
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
Search
backward
FREQ
*4
hh Search forward Search forward
VCR search
forward
*3
VCR search
forward
*3
Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward
EON
*4
b Skip backward
Chapter/Skip
backward
Skip backward Skip backward Direction back
PTY MODE
*4
a Skip forward
Chapter/Skip
forward
Skip forward Skip forward
Direction
forward
PTY START
*4
REC/
DISC SKIP
Disc skip (player)
Rec (recorder)
Rec
VCR rec
*3
VCR rec
*3
Disc skip Rec Rec
s Stop Stop
VCR stop
*3
VCR stop
*3
Stop Stop Stop Stop
e Pause Pause
VCR pause
*3
VCR pause
*3
Pause Pause Pause Pause
h Play Play
VCR play
*3
VCR play
*3
Play Play Play Play
0 AUDIO
Audio Audio
A DISPLAY
Display Display Display Display Display Display
Display
*5
B ENTER
Enter Enter/recall
Enter/
numeric button
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
82
This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit
to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control
this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control.
You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit:
An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room.
An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second
and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example).
An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room.
A video monitor for the second room.
y
Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit
in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult
with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center
for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your
requirements.
Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the
CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products,
you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six
YAMAHA components can be connected as shown.
System configuration and connections example
Using external amplifiers
To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 67).
When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the
amplifier in the second/third room.
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third
room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit.
Zone 2/Zone 3 connections
OUT
IN
OUT
IN
CONTROL OUT
This unit
Notes
REMOTE OUT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
MONITOR OUT
SP OUT
REMOTE 1 IN
ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT
ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT
REMOTE 2 IN
MAIN
ZONE 3
ZONE 2
ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT
Infrared emitter
DVD player
(or other component)
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Amplifier
Remote control
Infrared signal
receiver
Second room Third roomMain room
SYSTEM
This unit
83
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Using this unit’s internal amplifier
To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 67).
You can control the input or adjust the volume level for
Zone 2 and Zone 3 components using ZONE CONTROL
on the front panel.
1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to
SOURCE/REMOTE.
2 Press MAIN, ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to select the
zone you want to change the input for or
adjust the volume level.
Press each button repeatedly to turn the respective
zone on or off.
You can choose from the following modes:
ZONE2 Controls the Zone 2 component
connected to the ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R
jacks on this unit.
ZONE3 Controls the Zone 3 component
connected to the ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R
jacks on this unit.
MAIN Controls the main component
(this unit).
3 Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel
repeatedly to choose the zone you selected
in step 2.
Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front
panel display changes as shown below, and the
indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for
approximately 5 seconds.
y
You must complete this step within 5 seconds of pressing
ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. Otherwise, the zone
mode selection process is automatically canceled.
In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again.
The initial setting is “ZONE 2” when both the Zone 2 and
Zone 3 components connected to this unit are turned on.
If you selected MAIN in step 2, no indicator flashes on the
front panel display when ZONE CONTROL is pressed.
4 Use the INPUT or VOLUME selector on the
front panel to switch the input or adjust the
volume level for the selected zone
component.
y
You must complete this step within 5 seconds of performing
step 2. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is
automatically canceled. In this case, repeat steps 2 and 3
again.
R
L
+
PRESENCE/ ZONE 2
Second room
This unit
Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the
front panel
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
MAIN ZONE 2
ZONE ON/OFF
ZONE 3
ZONE CONTROL
ZONE 2
ZONE 3
MAIN
INPUT
VOLUME
or
84
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
The supplied remote control can be used to control
Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and
control components located in the main room directly
from the second/third room regardless of the listening
condition in the main room.
To enable Zone mode on the remote
control
You will be able to switch the remote control mode from
one room to another, and use the input selector,
STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and
VOLUME +/– to control the selected room.
1 Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to
SOURCE/REMOTE.
2 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in
“Setting remote control codes” on page 71.
3 Press l / h to select “L;AMP”.
4 Press ENTER.
“2000” appears in the display window.
5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”.
For details, see page 72.
6 Press ENTER to set the number.
“OK” appears in the display window if setting was
successful.
7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup.
The remote control will be able to operate this unit
from Zone 2 or Zone 3.
To control Zone 2/Zone 3
1 Press SELECT k repeatedly to display
“ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window.
2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or
Zone 3 power on.
3 Press an input selector button to select the
input source you want to listen to in the
second/third room.
The display window shows “2: name of selected
input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote
control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
Signals input at V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to
Zone 2/Zone 3.
4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone
3 by using the input selector, STANDBY,
SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/–
buttons.
* VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or
Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu
(see page 67).
Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using
the remote control
SOURCE/
REMOTE
REC OUT/ZONE 2
MD/TAPEDVD
DTV
CBL/SAT
VCR 1
CD-R
TUNER
CD
DVR/
VCR 2
ENTER
LEARN
Note
SELECT
or
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DVD
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
DTV DVR/VCR2VCR 1 DV D
V
-
AUX
CBL/SAT MD/TAPE
CD-R
PHONO TUNER CD
MULTI CH IN
POWER POWER POWER
SYSTEM
STANDBY
AVTV
SLEEP
AUDIO SELECT
A
B
EXIT
MENU
PURE DIRECT
TOP
TITLE
SELECT
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
*
85
ZONE 2/ZONE 3
ADVANCED
OPERATION
5 Press SELECT k / n to exit from the
Zone 2/Zone 3 mode.
The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are
always the same.
“ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only
when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed.
Turning on this unit or setting it to the
standby mode
SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently
depending on the selected mode that appears on the
display window.
When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you
can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them
to the standby mode individually.
When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or
“2002” (see page 72) is selected as the amplifier library
(L;AMP) code, pressing SYSTEM POWER turns on
the main unit only. However, pressing STANDBY sets
everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the
standby mode simultaneously.
*
“MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM
POWER or STANDBY is pressed.
To control Zone 2 or Zone 3 again when System mode is selected
and the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are in the standby mode,
press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the main unit, then repeat
steps 1 through 5 of the procedure in “To control Zone 2/Zone 3”
on pages 84 and 85.
Special considerations for DTS software
The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to
send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will
only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers).
Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need
to be made when playing DTS encoded discs.
For DVDs encoded with DTS
Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the
second/third room.
Use the disc menu to set the DVD players mixed
2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or
Dolby Digital soundtrack.
For CDs encoded in DTS
To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the
Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS.
Notes
LCD display
SYSTEM POWER/
STANDBY
Normal mode
*
Name of component
Turns on the main
unit only or sets it to
the standby mode.
Zone 2 mode
“Zone2” or “2:name of
component”
Turns on Zone 2 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
Zone 3 mode
“Zone3” or “3:name of
component”
Turns on Zone 3 or
sets it to the standby
mode.
System mode
“SYSTM”
SYSTEM POWER:
turns on the main
unit only.
STANDBY:
sets everything
(the main unit,
Zone 2 and Zone 3)
to the standby mode
simultaneously.
Note
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
86
This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the
front panel display.
This menu offers additional operations to adjust and
customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial
settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect
the needs of your listening environment.
1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode.
2 On the front panel, while holding down
STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON.
3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired menu
item.
The name of the selected item appears in the front
panel display.
4 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the
setting.
5 Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting
This unit enters the standby mode.
y
The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of
this unit.
The remote controls and VOLUME control on the front panel of
this unit are ineffective while you are using the advanced setup
menu.
SP IMP. (Speaker impedance)
Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that
of your speakers.
Choices: 6MIN, 8MIN
Select “6MIN” for speakers 6 ohms or higher.
Select “8MIN” for speakers 8 ohms or higher.
PRESET (User preset)
Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial
factory settings with the exception of System Memory and
Auto Setup settings.
Choices: CANCEL, RESET
Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this
unit’s parameters.
Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters.
This setting does not affect advanced setup menu item
parameters.
REMOTE AMP (Remote control AMP ID)
Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition
(see page 72).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library
code is set to “2000” or “2001”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library
code is set to “2002” or “2003”.
REMOTE TUN (Remote control tuner ID)
Use to set this unit’s tuner ID for remote control
recognition (see page 72).
Choices: ID1, ID2
Select “ID1” when the remote control tuner library
code is set to “2602”.
Select “ID2” when the remote control tuner library
code is set to “2603”.
FAN MODE (Fan operation mode)
Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan.
Choices: AUTO, CONT.
Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically
according to the temperature of this unit.
Select “CONT.” to set the fan to operate continuously
regardless of the temperature of this unit.
< Asia and General models only >
TU (Tuner frequency step)
Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the
frequency spacing in your area.
Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50
Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South
America.
Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas.
LANG. (GUI language)
Use to set the language that appears in this unit’s GUI
(graphical user interface) display.
Choices: ENGLISH, JAPANESE, FRENCH, GERMAN
You can select the language of your choice.
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
Advanced setup menu
Note
STRAIGHT
EFFECT
STANDBY
/ON
PROGRAM
Note
87
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access
most GUI menu system option parameters without using a
video monitor.
Use the remote control to access and adjust each
parameter.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP.
2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to
enter the menu.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then
press ENTER to enter the selected item.
4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the
parameter you want to adjust.
5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to
change the setting of the item you want to
adjust.
6 Press DISPLAY to exit.
y
If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return
to the previously selected menu item.
AUTO SETUP
Front panel display system options menu
EXIT
MENU
EFFECT
RETURN
DISPLAY
STRAIGHT
BAND
PRG SELECT
A/B/C/D/E
NIGHT
AUDIO
PURE DIRECT
ENTER
TOP
TITLE
VOL
+
CH
+
TV VOL
TV MUTE TV INPUT
MUTE
+
AMP
SOURCE
TV
PRESET
2,6
1
3-5
Item Sub-items Features
SETUP
AUTO
Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup
adjusts.
Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu
(see page 29).
EQ
NATURAL
FRONT
FLAT
Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup
uses.
Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI
menu (see page 28).
START [ENTER] Use to activate the auto setup procedure.
Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 29).
88
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
MANUAL SETUP
1 BASIC MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)SPEAKER SET
FRONT;;;;SMALL
CENTER;;;;;SML
SURR LR;;;;SML
SURR B;;;SMLx2
PRESENCE;;NONE
BASS OUT;;SWFR
CrossOver;80Hz
SWFR PHASE;NRM
Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the
speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the
cross over frequency.
Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu
(see page 62).
B)SP DISTANCE
UNIT;;;;meters
FRONT L;;3.00m
FRONT R;;3.00m
CENTER;;;3.00m
SURR L;;;3.00m
SURR R;;;3.00m
SB L;;;;;3.00m
SB R;;;;;3.00m
SWFR;;;;;3.00m
PRES L;;;3.00m
PRES R;;;3.00m
Adjusts the delay time of each speaker.
Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu
(see page 64).
Set the unit to “meters” or “feet” to input speaker
distances in meters or in feet.
UNIT;;;;;;feet
FRONT L;;10.00ft
FRONT R;;10.00ft
CENTER;;;10.00ft
SURR L;;;10.00ft
SURR R;;;10.00ft
SB L;;;;;10.00ft
SB R;;;;;10.00ft
SWFR;;;;;10.00ft
PRES L;;;10.00ft
PRES R;;;10.00ft
C)SP LEVEL
FL-----||-----
C-----||-----
FR-----||-----
SL-----||-----
SB.L----||-----
SB.R----||-----
SR-----||-----
SWFR-----||-----
PR.R----||-----
PR.L----||-----
Adjusts the output level of each speaker.
Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu
(see page 65).
D)TEST TONE
TEST TONE;;OFF
TEST TONE;;;ON
Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels.
Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu
(see page 62).
E)THX SET
SB Dis: <0.3m
SB Dis: 0.3-1.2m
SB Dis: >1.2m
Adjusts the THX settings.
Corresponds to THX Set in the GUI menu
(see page 65).
89
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
ADVANCED
OPERATION
2 SOUND MENU
3 INPUT MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)LFE LEVEL
SP LFE;;;;;;;0
HP LFE;;;;;;;0
Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby
Digital or DTS signals.
Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu
(see page 58).
B)D.RANGE
SP D.R;;;;MAX
HP D.R;;;;MAX
Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS
signals.
Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu
(see page 58).
C)TONE CON FRQ
BASS SP 350Hz
TRBL SP 3.5kHz
Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and
headphones.
Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu
(see page 60).
“BASS SP” and “TRBL SP” appear when no
headphones are connected to this unit, and
“BASS HP” and “TRBL HP” appear when
headphones are connected to this unit.
BASS HP 350Hz
TRBL HP 3.5kHz
D)AUDIO OPTION
A.MUTE;;;;MUTE
A.DELAY;;;;0ms
PRch >SBch
Customizes overall audio settings for this unit.
Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu
(see page 60).
Item Sub-items Features
A)I/O ASSIGN
C.V[A] DVD
C.V[B] DTV
C.V[C]CBL/SAT
OUT(1)MD/TAPE
OUT(2) CD-R
IN (3) CD
IN (4) DVD
IN (5) DTV
IN (6) CBL/SAT
IN (7) CD
IN (8) DVD
IN (9)DVR/VCR2
Assigns jacks according to the component to be used.
Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu
(see page 55).
B)INPUT TRIM
DVD;;;;;0.0
Adjusts the output volume of each jack.
Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu
(see page 56).
C)AUDIO SELECT
>AUTO LAST
Selects the initial input mode of the source.
Corresponds to Audio Select in the GUI menu
(see page 68).
D)DECODER MODE
>AUTO LAST
Selects the decoder used by this unit.
Corresponds to Decoder Mode in the GUI menu
(see page 56).
E)INPUT RENAME
DVD ._ DVD
Changes the name of the input.
Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu
(see page 57).
F)MULTI CH IN
>6CH 8CH
Selects the number of audio channels input at the
MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu
(see page 57).
90
FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS
4 HDMI MENU
5 i.LINK MENU
6 OPTION MENU
Item Sub-items Features
A)INPUT ASSIGN
IN 1 DVD
IN 2 CBL/SAT
Assigns input sources (such as a DVD player) to the
HDMI IN jacks.
Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu
(see page 98).
B)SUPPORT AUD.
>4600 OTHER
Selects the HDMI audio signal playback source.
Corresponds to Support Audio in the GUI menu
(see page 98).
Item Sub-items Features
A)INPUT ASSIGN
----> ---
----> DVD
Selects the input assignment for registered i.LINK
components.
Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu
(see page 93).
“---” appears if no i.LINK component is registered.
B)AUTO PLAY
<---> PLAYER
----> PLAYER
<---- PLAYER
--X-- PLAYER
Selects automatic playback for signals input from
i.LINK components connected to this unit.
Corresponds to Auto Play in the GUI menu
(see page 93).
Item Sub-items Features
A)DISPLAY SET
DIMMER;;;;;;;0
WALL PAPER;;ON
SHORT MSG. ON
V CONV.;;;;;ON
Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays.
Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu
(see page 66).
B)MEMORY GUARD
MEM.GUARD;;OFF
Locks the menu parameter settings.
Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu
(see page 68).
C)SURR. INI
PRESS DSP Key
Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound
field programs.
Corresponds to Sur.Initialize in the GUI menu
(see page 67).
D)ZONE SET
SP B;;;;MAIN
Customizes the Zone B parameters.
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu
(see page 67).
E)ZONE2 SET
OUT VOL;;;VAR.
ZONE2 AMP;;EXT
Customizes the Zone 2 parameters.
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu
(see page 67).
F)ZONE3 SET
OUT VOL;;;VAR.
Customizes the Zone 3 parameters.
Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu
(see page 67).
USING I.LINK
91
ADVANCED
OPERATION
i.LINK is a high-speed and bi-directional digital interface
in compliance with a global standard approved by the
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE).
i.LINK enables i.LINK-compatible components to send
and receive digital audio signals (bitstreams such as Dolby
Digital, and DTS; 2-channel linear PCM signals; DSD
signals of Super Audio CD) over a single i.LINK cable.
You can process audio signals by selecting between the
DSD Direct mode where DSD signals are directly output
to DSD-compatible audio DAC and the DSD mode where
DSD signals are changed to PCM signals to ensure rich
sound fields.
i.LINK currently supports three different data transfer
rates: 100 Mbps, 200 Mbps and 400 Mbps.
This unit supports hot plugging, a function that allows you
to disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable while the
power is turned on.
i.LINK compatibility with this unit
Daisy chain connections
Use to link components together in a single chain. You can
link up to 17 different components (including this unit)
with this method.
Tree connections
Use to link components in a branched configuration when
3 or more i.LINK connectors are available. You can link
up to 63 different components (including this unit) with
this method.
When making connections, use a 4-pin IEEE1394 cable that
supports the S400 transmission speed. We also recommend
using a cable less than 3.5 m (10 ft) in length.
The system will not work if components are connected in a loop
(where the output signal is returned to the original component).
This unit does not output signals not input at the i.LINK jacks.
Because the data transfer rates may vary depending on the
arrangement order of i.LINK components, it is advised that you
link i.LINK components with the same data transfer rates.
Do not disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable from this unit
or other i.LINK components while data is being transferred.
Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
When connecting the IEEE1394 cable to this unit’s i.LINK
connectors, be sure to confirm the orientation of the connector
before connecting the cable. Using excessive force to connect
the cable to the connector in the wrong orientation will damage
the connector.
Do not turn the power of i.LINK components on or off while
data is transferred. Doing so may stop playback. If this happens,
turn this unit to standby mode, and then turn it back on.
Other i.LINK components connected to this unit need to
support DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection).
This unit supports i.LINK (AUDIO) components only.
Because this unit does not support i.LINK (VIDEO), video
signals, such as MPEG2-TS (BS digital, etc.) or
DV (DV camera, DVD recorder, etc.), are not compatible with
this unit.
If this unit is in the standby mode or turned off, signals cannot
be output to the next i.LINK component.
USING i.LINK
What is i.LINK?
This unit’s i.LINK interface was based on the
following design standards:
IEEE1394 Std 1394a-2000
(Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus)
A&M Protocol
(Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.1)
DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection)
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
i.LINK
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz DVD-Audio
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video
DSD 2ch/5ch/6ch
2.8224 MHz
Super Audio CD
Connecting i.LINK components
Notes
i.LINK
component
i.LINK
component
i.LINK
component
Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft)
i.LINK
component
i.LINK
component
i.LINK
component
i.LINK
component
Maximum single
cable length:
4.5 m (14.75 ft)
92
USING i.LINK
Assigning i.LINK components
When an i.LINK component is connected, this unit
automatically recognizes the connection and registers up
to 16 i.LINK components. Assigning an i.LINK
component to a specific input allows you to select video
and audio input signals from that component received via
the i.LINK connection for simultaneous playback.
Turn on the power of this unit and the connected
i.LINK component.
The i.LINK component is automatically recognized and
registered in the following order:
DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR1 DVR/VCR2
V-AUX PHONO CD CD-R MD/TAPE
“LINK CHECK” flashes on the front panel display during
this procedure.
If you want to change the input assignment of a registered
i.LINK component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu
(see page 93) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display
system options menu (see page 90).
Only one i.LINK component is assigned to each input and
inputs that are already assigned are skipped.
If i.LINK components are assigned to all the inputs available,
no more i.LINK components can be assigned, and audio signals
input from these i.LINK components cannot be played back on
this unit.
Listening to playback from i.LINK
components
If an i.LINK component has been assigned to a specific
input, perform the following steps to listen to playback
from the registered i.LINK component.
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input
assigned to the i.LINK component.
2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set
“AUTO” or “i.LINK” as the input mode.
3 Start playback on the connected i.LINK
component.
You can turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK
component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select
whether you want the input to switch automatically when an
input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected
(see page 93).
Audio signals input at the i.LINK jacks are digitally output only
when AUDIO SELECT is set to either AUTO or i.LINK as the
input mode and REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to
SOURCE/REMOTE.
Use this menu to display information about registered
i.LINK components, delete any unused registered
components, or customize the operation and playback
settings to be used when this unit is connected to an
i.LINK component.
1 Switch on this unit and video monitor.
2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
The top display appears.
3 Press k / n repeatedly to select i.LINK Select.
4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n
repeatedly to change the setting of the item
you want to adjust.
5 Press EXIT.
Basic i.LINK operations
Notes
VOLUME
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A.SEL:AUTO
VCR 1
VOLUME
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A.SEL:i.LINK
VCR 1
or
Notes
Changing i.LINK Select
parameters
TOP
TITLE
Sound
Option
Basic
Manual Setup
Auto Setup
System Memory
Input Select
Stereo/Surround
AMP
SOURCE
TV
Information
Select
Auto Play
Information
i.LINK Select
Stereo/Surround
Input Select
HDMI
93
USING i.LINK
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Information (Information)
Use this feature to display the following information:
operation status of registered i.LINK components,
registered i.LINK components that have been deleted, and
i.LINK signals that are currently being received.
i.LINK Select > Information >
Choices: Details, Delete, Protect, i.LINK Status
Select Details to display the following information
about the selected i.LINK component.
Vendor: Displays the name of the manufacturer for
your i.LINK component.
Model: Displays the model name of your i.LINK
component.
Active (connected) or Non Active (not
connected): Displays depending on whether your
i.LINK component is connected.
Audio (for audio signals) or Non Audio (for non-
audio signals): Displays depending on whether your
i.LINK component supports audio signal playback.
Assign: Displays the name of the input assigned to
the selected i.LINK component.
Select Delete to delete the selected i.LINK component
from the registered components list. To delete, press
ENTER. You can only delete non-active and
unprotected i.LINK components.
Select Protect to protect the selected i.LINK
component from being accidentally deleted.
Select i.LINK Status to display operation status of
i.LINK signals that are currently being received. You
can also use this feature to delete all non-active and
unprotected i.LINK components together at once.
Information about unregistered i.LINK components is not
available in the GUI menu. These i.LINK components cannot be
used on this unit although they can be output to other i.LINK
components.
Select (Input select)
Use this feature to select which registered i.LINK
component’s audio signal will be selected for playback.
i.LINK Select > Select >
Select the name of the desired component and press
ENTER to switch the input. When you select the desired
component, its manufacturer and model information
appear along with its input assignment.
Input Assign (Input assign)
Use this feature if you want to change the input
assignment of a registered i.LINK component. You can
select to assign the i.LINK component to any of the
various inputs (PHONO to V-AUX).
i.LINK Select > Input Assign >
Choices: PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV,
CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX,
No Assignment
1 Press k / n repeatedly to select the i.LINK
component you want to assign, then press
h.
2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the input for
the i.LINK component, then press ENTER.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
Auto Play (Auto Play)
Use this feature to turn on/off automatic playback when an
i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or
to select whether you want the input to switch
automatically when an input stream from a connected
i.LINK component is detected.
i.LINK Select > Auto Play >
Choices: Player, → → → Player, ← ← ← Player,
– X – Player
•Select
Player if you want both playback to start
automatically on the i.LINK component selected using
the INPUT selector, and you want this unit to
automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component
which has started playing back.
•Select → → → Player if you want playback to start
automatically on the i.LINK component selected using
the INPUT selector.
•Select ← ← ← Player if you want this unit to
automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component
which has started playing back.
Select – X – Player to disable automatic playback for
the i.LINK components. This setting also prevents this
unit from automatically switching its input to the
i.LINK component.
y
This menu item is also available in the front panel display system
options menu (see page 90).
Note
94
USING i.LINK
Status display messages
The following messages may appear on the front panel display depending on the status of this unit.
*
Playback may stop while this message is displayed.
Error messages
The following messages appear on the front panel display if a connection or registration error is detected.
i.LINK indicator
i.LINK display messages
Message Contents
LINK CHECK
Flashes while the i.LINK component connection is being checked.
*
Message Cause Remedy
BUS FULL
The 1394 bus transmission band is full, and no
more data can be transmitted.
This problem may be resolved by disconnecting any
unused i.LINK components.
If an i.LINK component with a slow transmission speed
(S100 or S200) is connected between this unit and the
i.LINK (AUDIO) component which you want to play
back, the bus may become full. Changing the
connection order of the i.LINK components so that this
unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component are directly
connected may resolve this problem.
CANNOT LINK
The connected i.LINK component is not
recognized because the connection is
incomplete.
Check that all i.LINK components are connected
properly using an IEEE1394 cable.
LOOP CONNECT
This unit and the i.LINK component are
connected in a loop (where the output signal is
returned to the original component).
Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable, then reconnect it in
either a daisy chain or tree configuration.
NODE OVER
More than 63 i.LINK components (including
this unit) are connected.
Reduce the number of connected components.
HOP OVER
More than 15 i.LINK components are
connected in a daisy chain configuration.
Reduce the number of i.LINK components connected
between the two end components to 15 or less.
Reconnect the i.LINK components using tree-type
connections.
REGIST. OVER
A new i.LINK component is connected to this
unit while 16 i.LINK components are already
registered. This unit can register up to 16
i.LINK components.
Delete any unused registered i.LINK components from
the registered components list and reconnect the
i.LINK component you want to register.
See “Changing i.LINK Select parameters” on page 92.
Lights up When an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via
i.LINK connections.
Flashes When an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via
connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections.
Off When no i.LINK component is connected.
USING HDMI
95
ADVANCED
OPERATION
HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first
industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/
video) interface.
Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a
set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor
(such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports
standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as
multi-channel digital audio using a single cable.
HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports
8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to
accommodate future enhancements and requirements.
When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth
Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure
audio/video interface that meets the security requirements
of content providers and system operators.
For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website
at “http://www.hdmi.org/”.
Video or audio signals input at audio input jacks other than the
HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a
DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.
Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector).
You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this
unit to other HDMI-compatible components. Use a HDMI cable
shorter than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to
prevent losses of video quality.
This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or
DVI components.
Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack
DVI-D jack) to connect
this unit to other DVI components.
Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks.
GUI displays or analog video signals input at video input jacks
cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. To display analog
video signals, connect them to analog video output jacks.
Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the
HDMI OUT jack.
This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals
of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD
player) to the i.LINK jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks.
When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be
output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the
DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multi-
channel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD
player to the i.LINK jack or analog multi-channel audio input
jacks.
When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and
audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the
DVD player.
Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2
jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is
set to the standby mode or the power is turned off.
When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to
the instruction manuals for those components.
When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a
DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling
frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video
signal format.
Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or
turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to
the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred.
Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise.
HDMI compatibility with this unit
USING HDMI
What is HDMI?
This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following
standards:
HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface
Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI
Licensing, LLC.
HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content
Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital
Content Protection, LLC.
Notes
Audio signal
types
Audio signal
formats
Compatible
HDMI
components
2ch Linear
PCM
2ch, 32-192 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
CD, DVD-Video,
DVD-Audio, etc.
Multi-ch
Linear PCM
5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz,
16/20/24 bit
DVD-Audio, etc.
Bitstream Dolby Digital,
DTS
DVD-Video, etc.
96
USING HDMI
See page 23 for connection information.
HDMI video and audio signal flow
Video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or
HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using Select in the GUI
menu (see page 97) or the INPUT selector on the front
panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In
addition, audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI
IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and REC
OUT.
Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output
at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks.
Audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are
output to REC OUT only when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front
panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Some audio signals may
not be output to REC OUT depending on the signal type.
Connecting HDMI video components
Connecting HDMI audio components
Error messages
In case of an error, an error message appears on the GUI
or the front panel display.
Device Over: more than 5 HDMI components (including
this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of the
connected HDMI components
HDCP Error: HDCP testing failed. Check whether the
connected HDMI components support HDCP copy
protection standards.
HDMI indicator
Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and
this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI.
Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this
unit is playing back audio signals input via connections
other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via
HDMI connections.
Turns off when no HDMI component is connected.
Connecting HDMI components
Notes
HDMI OUT HDMI IN
HDMI OUT
This unit
Video
signals
Audio
signals
Video
signals
Audio
signals
HDMI IN
Speakers
Headphones
REC OUT
Audio
signals
TV
DVD player
HDMI IN 1
HDMI IN 2
Component
coaxial
Component D
S-video
Component
RCA
HDMI OUT
Component
coaxial
Component D
S-video
Component
RCA
Digital video signals
Analog video signals
Analog video signals
Analog video signals
Digital audio signals
Digital audio signals
Analog audio signals
HDMI OUT
i.LINK
(AUDIO)
HDMI IN 1
HDMI IN 2
Digital audio
(optical/coaxial)
Analog audio
Digital audio
(optical/coaxial)
Analog audio
97
USING HDMI
ADVANCED
OPERATION
Assigning HDMI components
Assigning an HDMI component to a specific input allows
you to select the video input signals from that component
together with the audio signals received via the HDMI
connection for simultaneous playback.
If you want to change the input assignment of a registered HDMI
component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98) or
INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu
(see page 90).
Listening to playback from HDMI
components
Perform the following steps to listen to playback from a
registered HDMI component.
If the HDMI component has been assigned to a
specific input
1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input
assigned to the HDMI component.
2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set
“AUTO” or “HDMI” as the input mode.
3 Start playback on the connected HDMI
component.
You can change HDMI parameters in the GUI or the front
panel display menu.
y
Input Assign and Support Audio are also available in the front
panel display system options menu (see page 90). However,
Select and Information are only available in the GUI menu.
Select (Select)
Use this feature to select the HDMI component assigned
to either the HDMI IN or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit.
HDMI > Select >
Choices: IN 1, IN 2
Select IN 1 or IN 2 to choose the HDMI component
assigned to either HDMI input jack.
When the HDMI component connected to the selected HDMI IN
jack is not transmitting audio signals (e.g. Super Audio CD or
DVI) and AUDIO SELECT is set to AUTO, audio signals input
at the analog or other digital input jacks will be selected to play
back. It may take a few seconds before this unit outputs sound.
Basic HDMI operations
Note
VOLUME
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A.SEL:AUTO
VCR 1
VOLUME
A
SP
L R
V-AUX
DVR/VCR2
CBL/SAT
DTV DVD
MD/TAPE
CD-R
CD TUNER
PHONO
dB
A.SEL:HDMI
VCR 1
or
Changing HDMI parameters
Note
Display
i.LINK Select
Stereo/Surround
HDMI
Select
Input Assign
Speaker B
Support Audio
Display
Input Assign
Support Audio
Select
IN 1
IN 2
Speaker B
Zone 3 Volume
98
USING HDMI
Input Assign (Input assign)
This unit comes with two HDMI IN jacks (HDMI IN 1
and HDMI IN 2). As a default settings, HDMI IN 1 and
HDMI IN 2 are assigned to DVD and CBL/SAT
respectively, but you may alter these settings if necessary.
The same HDMI component cannot be assigned to the
HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks at the same time.
HDMI > Input Assign >
Choices: IN 1, IN 2
Select the HDMI component you want to assign to the
HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack.
Assignable HDMI components:
DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX
Support Audio (Support audio)
Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI
audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
HDMI > Support Audio >
Choices: RX-V4600, Other
Select RX-V4600 to play back HDMI audio signals on
this unit. The audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks
of this unit are not output to the HDMI component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit.
Select Other to play back HDMI audio signals on
another HDMI component connected to the HDMI
OUT jack of this unit.
Information (Information)
Use this feature to display information about audio signals
input at the HDMI IN jack you selected.
HDMI > Information >
Choices: Input, Output
Displaying information about HDMI
video signal input
HDMI > Information > Input >
Model: displays the model name of the HDMI component
connected to the HDMI IN jack you selected. Some
HDMI components may not provide this unit with their
model information.
Type: displays the type of video signals (HDMI or DVI)
input at the HDMI IN jack you selected.
Format: displays the format of video signals input at the
HDMI IN jack you selected.
Input: displays the name of the HDMI IN jack you
selected.
Error: displays information about an error.
Displaying information about HDMI
video signal output
HDMI > Information > Output >
Model: displays the model name of the component
connected to the HDMI OUT jack you selected.
Type: displays the type of component (HDMI or DVI)
connected to the HDMI OUT jack.
Error: displays information about an error.
Display
IN 2
Input Mode
IN 1
DVD
DTV
Speaker B
CBL/SAT
Input Assign
Information
Input Mode
Support Audio
RX-V4600
Other
Dimmer
Dimmer
Speaker B
Speaker B
Zone 3 Volume
Select
Display
Output
Input Mode
Input
---
Input ---
Type ---
Error
Format
---
Model
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
99
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live
instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of
the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these
reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated,
and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting.
Elements of a sound field
In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming
straight to our ears from the players instrument, there are
two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to
make up the sound field:
Early reflections
Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly
(50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting
from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a
wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound.
Reverberations
These are caused by reflections from more than one
surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so
numerous that they merge together to form a continuous
sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen
the clarity of the direct sound.
Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent
reverberation taken together help us to determine the
subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this
information that the digital sound field processor
reproduces in order to create sound fields.
If you could create the appropriate early reflections and
subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you
would be able to create your own listening environment.
The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a
concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at
all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly
what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field
processor.
You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset
parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial
settings, you can change some of the parameters to better
suit the input source or your listening room. The following
parameters are not always found in every program.
1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press
TOP on the remote control.
2 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h.
3 Select the desired sound field program, then
press h to access and adjust.
You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set
to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory
Guard to “Off” (see page 68).
Resetting parameters to the factory values
To reset all parameters
Use Sur.Initialize (see page 67).
EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS
What is a sound field? Changing parameter settings
Note
Memory back-up
The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from
being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the
power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power
supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if
the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values
will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the
parameter value again.
TOP
TITLE
AMP
SOURCE
TV
STEREO
MUSIC
ENTERTAINMENT
MOVIE THEATER
Vienna
Freiburg
Munich
Munich
Vienna
Freiburg
Init. Delay
Room Size
DSP Level
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
100
You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your
listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program.
DSP Level (DSP level)
Function: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range.
Description: Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP
effect level relative to the level of the direct sound.
Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB
Init. Delay (Initial delay)
Function: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay
between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener.
Description: The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the
farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value.
Control range: 1
to 99 ms
Room Size (Room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround
sound field becomes.
Description: As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between
the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the
reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from
one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Source sound
Early
reflections
Time Time Time
Initial delay Initial delay Initial delay
Sound source
Reflection face
Level
Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Time
Time
Time
Source sound
Early
reflections
Small value = 0.1
Large value = 2.0
Sound source
101
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Liveness (Liveness)
Function: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections
decay.
Description: The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall
surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces
is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”.
The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the
room.
Control range: 0 to 10
Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay)
Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound
field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels
are used.
Control range: 1 to 49 ms
Sur.Room Size (Surround room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness)
Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field.
Control range: 0 to 10
SB.Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay)
Function: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field.
Control range: 1 to 49 ms
SB.Room Size (Surround back room size)
Function: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field.
Control range: 0.1 to 2.0
SB.Liveness (Surround back liveness)
Function: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field.
Control range: 0 to 10
Source sound
Level
Level
Level
Dead
Live
Time
Time Time
Small reflected
sound
Large reflected
sound
Small value = 0
Large value = 10
102
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Rev. Time (Reverberation time)
Function: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB
(at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range.
Description: The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter
the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems.
Control range: 1.0 to 5.0 s
Rev. Delay (Reverberation delay)
Function: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the
reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you
feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment.
Control range: 0 to 250 ms
Rev. Level (Reverberation level)
Function: Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound.
Description: The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes.
Control range: 0 to 100%
Reverberation
Reverberation
60 dB 60 dB 60 dB
Source sound
Reverberation time
Reverberation time Reverberation time
Sound source Short
reverberation
Long
reverberation
Small value = 1.0 s
Large value = 5.0 s
Early reflections
(dB)
60 dB
Level
Source sound
Reverberation
Reverberation timeReverberation
delay
Time
Source sound
Level
Reverberation level
Time
103
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift)
Function: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center
channel elements to the presence speakers.
Description: The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound.
Choices: 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5
For 7ch Stereo
Function: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode.
Control range: 0 – 100%
Center Level (Center level)
Surround L Level (Surround left level)
Surround R Level (Surround right level)
Sur. Back Level (Surround back level)
Presence L Level (Presence left level)
Presence R Level (Presence right level)
For PL x Music and PL Music
Panorama (Panorama)
Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect.
Choices: Off, On
Dimension (Dimension)
Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear.
Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard)
Center Width (Center width)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers.
Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only
from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3
For Neo:6 Music
Center Image (Center image)
Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees.
Control range: 0.0 to 1.0
For SRS Circle Surround
FOCUS
Function: Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate
for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location.
A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level.
Control range: 0 to 8
TruBass
Function: Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance.
A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence
of a subwoofer.
Control range: 0 to 8
104
SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS
Decode Type (Decoder type)
For MOVIE THEATER
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6
For THX Cinema
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6
For SURROUND Standard
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard.
Choices: Pro Logic / PL Movie / PL Music / PL Game / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game /
Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music / CS Cinema* / CS Music* (* U.S.A. model only)
For SURROUND Enhanced
Function: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced.
Choices: Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6
Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available, and Pro Logic appears when the surround back speakers are not
available.
Initialize (Initialize)
Function: Initializes the parameters for each sound field subprogram.
Choices: NO, YES
If you want to initialize all of the parameters within a sound field program group, use Sur.Initialize (see page 67).
Note
Note
TROUBLESHOOTING
105
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below
or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the
nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center.
General
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
This unit fails to turn
on when STANDBY/
ON (or SYSTEM
POWER) is pressed,
or enters in the
standby mode soon
after the power has
been turned on.
The power cable is not connected or the
plug is not completely inserted.
Connect the power cable firmly.
The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers.
26
The protection circuitry has been
activated.
Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit
and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for
each connection does not touch anything other than
its respective connection.
15–17
This unit has been exposed to a strong
external electric shock (such as lightning
and strong static electricity).
Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the
power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use
it normally.
No sound Incorrect input or output cable
connections.
Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
18–23
The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone.
The input mode is set to “i.LINK”,
“HDMI”, “Coax/Opt” or “Analog”.
Set the input mode to “Auto”.
40
No appropriate input source has been
selected.
Select an appropriate input source with INPUT,
MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on
the remote control.
33
Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections.
15
The front speakers to be used have not
been selected properly.
Select the front speakers by pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting
AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing
SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control).
33
The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to
cancel a mute and adjust the volume.
35
The input mode is set to “Analog” while
playing a source encoded with a DTS
signal.
Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”.
40
The signals this unit cannot reproduce are
being received from a source component
e.g.: a CD-ROM.
Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce.
The i.LINK components connected to this
unit do not support the DTCP copy
protection standards.
Connect i.LINK components that support the DTCP
copy protection standards.
The HDMI components connected to this
unit do not support the HDCP copy
protection standards.
Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP
copy protection standards.
Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI
audio signals are not being played back on
this unit.
Set Support Audio to RX-V4600 in the GUI menu.
98
No picture The output and input for the picture are
connected to different types of video
jacks.
Turn on the video conversion function.
66
106
TROUBLESHOOTING
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The sound suddenly
goes off.
The protection circuitry has been activated
because of a short circuit, etc.
Check that the impedance selector setting is correct.
26
Check the speaker wires are not touching each other
and then turn this unit back on.
The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again.
The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute.
35
Only the speaker on
one side can be
heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists,
the cables may be defective.
18
Incorrect balance settings in the GUI
menu.
Adjust the Speaker Level settings.
65
Only the center
speaker outputs
substantial sound.
When playing a monaural source with a
CINEMA DSP program, the source signal
is directed to the center channel, and the
front and surround speakers output effect
sounds.
No sound from the
effect speakers
The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on.
39
You are using a source or program
combination that does not output sound
from all channels.
Try another sound field program.
34
No sound from the
center speaker
The output level of the center speaker is
set to minimum.
Raise the level of the center speaker.
65
Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker.
62
One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for
7ch Stereo) has been selected.
Try another sound field program.
34
No sound from the
surround speakers
The output level of the surround speakers
is set to minimum.
Raise the output level of the surround speakers.
62
Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and
right speakers.
62
A monaural or stereo source is being
played with STRAIGHT.
Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound
fields.
No sound from the
surround back
speakers
Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select.
61
Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to
“None”, surround back speakers are automatically set
to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the
surround left and right speakers.
62
Surround Back is set to “None” in
Speaker Set.
Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or
“Large x2”.
63
No sound from the
subwoofer
Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby
Digital or DTS signal is being played.
Select “SWFR” or “Both”.
63
Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front”
when a 2-channel source is being played.
Select “Both”.
63
The source does not contain low bass
signals.
107
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
Dolby Digital or DTS
sources cannot be
played. (Dolby Digital
or DTS indicator on
the front panel
display does not light
up.)
The connected component is not set to
output Dolby Digital or DTS digital
signals.
Make an appropriate setting following the operations
instructions for your component.
The input mode is set to “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”.
40
A “humming” sound
can be heard.
Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem
persists, the cables may be defective.
No connection from the turntable to the
GND terminal.
Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the
GND terminal of this unit.
22
The volume level is
low while playing a
record.
The record is being played on a turntable
with an MC cartridge.
The turntable should be connected to this unit through
an MC-head amplifier.
22
The volume level
cannot be increased,
or the sound is
distorted.
The component connected to the OUT
(REC) jacks of this unit is turned off.
Turn on the power to the component.
The sound effect
cannot be recorded.
It is not possible to record the sound effect
with a recording component.
A source cannot be
recorded by a digital
recording component
connected to this
DIGITAL OUTPUT
jack.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks.
Connect the source component to the DIGITAL
INPUT jacks.
18–22
Some components cannot record the
Dolby Digital or DTS sources.
A source cannot be
recorded by an
analog component
connected to the
AUDIO OUT jacks.
The source component is not connected to
this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks.
Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO
IN jacks.
18–22
The sound field
parameters and some
other settings on this
unit cannot be
changed.
Memory Guard is set to “On”. Select “Off”.
68
This unit does not
operate properly.
The internal microcomputer has been
frozen by an external electric shock (such
as lightning or excessive static electricity)
or by a power supply with low voltage.
Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and
then plug it in again after about 30 seconds.
“CHECK SP WIRES”
appears on the front
panel display.
Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly.
15
There is noise
interference from
digital or radio-
frequency equipment,
or this unit.
This unit is too close to the digital or
radio-frequency equipment.
Move this unit further away from such equipment.
The picture is
disturbed.
The video source uses scrambled or
encoded signals to prevent dubbing.
This unit suddenly
enters the standby
mode.
The internal temperature becomes too
high and the overheat protection circuitry
has been activated.
Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and
then turn it back on.
108
TROUBLESHOOTING
Tuner
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
FM
FM stereo reception is
noisy.
The characteristics of FM stereo
broadcasts may cause this problem
when the transmitter is too far away
or the antenna input is poor.
Check the antenna connections.
Try using a high-quality directional FM
antenna.
24
Use the manual tuning method.
41
There is distortion, and
clear reception cannot
be obtained even with a
good FM antenna.
There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate
multipath interference.
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is too weak. Use a high-quality directional FM antenna.
24
Use the manual tuning method.
41
Previously preset
stations can no longer
be tuned in.
This unit has been disconnected for a
long period.
Preset the stations again.
42
AM
The desired station
cannot be tuned in with
the automatic tuning
method.
The signal is weak or the antenna
connections are loose.
Tighten the AM loop antenna connections
and orient it for the best reception.
Use the manual tuning method.
41
There are continuous
crackling and hissing
noises.
Noises result from lightning,
fluorescent lamps, motors,
thermostats and other electrical
equipment.
Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire.
This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to
eliminate all noise.
There are buzzing and
whining noises.
A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV.
109
TROUBLESHOOTING
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Remote control
Problem Cause Remedy
Refer to
page
The remote control
does not work or
function properly.
Wrong distance or angle. The remote control will function within a maximum
range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees off-
axis from the front panel.
9
Direct sunlight or lighting (from an
inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is
striking the remote control sensor of this
unit.
Reposition this unit.
The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries.
4
AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly.
When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position.
When operating the component selected by the input
selector button, set it to the SOURCE position.
When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO
area, set it to the TV position.
The remote control code was not correctly
set.
Set the remote control code correctly using
“LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end
of this manual.
71
Try setting another code of the same manufacturer
using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at
the end of this manual.
71
This unit’s library code and the remote
control ID do not match.
Switch the library code.
71
Even if the remote control code is
correctly set, there are some models that
do not respond to the remote control.
Program the necessary functions independently into
the programmable buttons using the Learn feature.
73
The remote control
does not “learn” new
functions.
The batteries of this remote control and/or
the other remote control are too weak.
Replace the batteries.
4
The distance between the two remote
controls is too much or too little.
Place the remote controls at the proper distance.
73
The signal coding or modulation of the
other remote control is not compatible
with this remote control.
Learning is not possible.
Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for
the new functions.
78
GLOSSARY
110
Dolby Digital
Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives
you completely independent multi-channel audio. It
provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels
(left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels.
An additional channel especially for bass effects, called
LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the
system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1
channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround
speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and
surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby
Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to
minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range
channels and the precise sound orientation generated
using digital sound processing provide listeners with a
previously unheard of excitement and realism.
Dolby Digital EX
Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output
channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using
a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from
the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby
Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks
recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this
additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and
realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have
“flyover” and “fly-around” effects.
Dolby Pro Logic
Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to
decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround
software. This new technology enables a 5-channel
playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center
channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of
only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic
technology). Music and Game modes are also available
for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode.
Dolby Pro Logic x
Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or
7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multi-
channel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a
Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games.
Dolby Surround
Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system
to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front
left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog
(monaural), and a surround channel for special sound
effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces
sound within a narrow frequency range.
Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes
and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as
well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit
employs a digital signal processing system that
automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to
enhance moving sound effects and directionality.
DSD
Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio
signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio
CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at
a high-frequency sampling rate of approximately 2.8224
MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to
reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high
quantization of audio signals. Due to the a high sampling
rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered
by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs.
DTS 96/24
DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality
for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully
backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers
to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz
sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length.
DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original
96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with
full-quality full-motion video for music programs and
motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video.
DTS (Digital Theater Systems)
Digital Surround
DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog
soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound
track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie
theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc.
has developed a home theater system so that you can
enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation
of DTS digital surround in your home. This system
produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound
(technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround
channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a
total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES
decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding
a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel
format.
GLOSSARY
Audio formats
111
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
Neo:6
Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for
6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the full-
range channels with higher separation comparable to
digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available;
“Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema
mode” for movies.
PCM (Linear PCM)
Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog
audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without
using any compression. This is used as a method of
recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a
technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per
very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code
modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and
then modulated for recording.
SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround )
SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) is a
high-performance 6.1 channel matrix surround sound
decoding system. It is the next-generation of the original
SRS Circle Surround technology, incorporating powerful
industry-first features including the dialog clarity
enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to
the front channels and subwoofer.
CINEMA DSP
Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were
originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect
is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed
for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room
size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can
differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in
the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured
data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original
sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic,
Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and
audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room
of your own home.
SILENT CINEMA
YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect
DSP algorithm for headphones.
Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound
field so that accurate representations of all the sound field
programs can be enjoyed on headphones.
Virtual CINEMA DSP
YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP
algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field
surround effects without any surround speakers by using
virtual surround speakers.
It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a
minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center
speaker.
ASA (Advanced Speaker Array)
ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes
the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to
provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you
set up your home theater system using all eight speaker
outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround
Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and
Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close
together facing the front of the room will provide the
largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to
place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to
go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that
most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which
will re-optimized the surround sound-field.
ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema,
THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode.
ITU-R
ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU
(International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R
recommends a standard speaker placement which is used
in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering
studios.
LFE 0.1 channel
This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals.
The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz.
This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a
low frequency range compared to the full-range
reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or
DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems.
Sampling frequency and number of
quantized bits
When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of
times the signal is sampled per second is called the
sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when
converting the sound level into a numeric value is called
the number of quantized bits.
The range of rates that can be played back is determined
based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range
representing the sound level difference is determined by
the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the
sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies
that can be played back, and the higher the number of
quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be
reproduced.
Sound field programs
Audio information
112
GLOSSARY
THX Cinema processing
THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies
established by the world-renowned film production
company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’
personal desire to make your experience of the film
soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home
theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director
intended.
Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres
called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back
in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions.
This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto
Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for
playback in a small home theatre environment.
THX engineers developed patented technologies to
accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre
environment into the home, correcting the tonal and
spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX
indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in
Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX).
Adaptive decorrelation
In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers
help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but
in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This
can make the surround speakers sound like headphones
that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround
sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you
move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive
decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time
and phase relationship with respect to the other surround
channel. This expands the listening position and
creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious
surround experience as in a movie theatre.
Re-equalization
The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively
bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment
in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be
played back in large movie theatres using very different
professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the
correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a
small home environment.
Timbre matching
The human ear changes our perception of sound
depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a
movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so
that the surround information is all around you. In a home
theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of
your head. The timbre matching feature filters the
information going to the surround speakers so that they
more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound
coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless
panning between the front and surround speakers.
THX Games Mode
For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the
THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX
ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all
5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM,
DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game
audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree
playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it
gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the
surround field.
THX Music Mode
For the replay of multi-channel music the THX Music
Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA
processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1
encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and
DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage.
THX Select2
Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2
certified, it must incorporate all the features described in
THX Cinema processing and also pass a rigorous series of
quality and performance tests. Only then can a product
feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee
that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give
you superb performance for many years to come.
THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the
product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier
performance and operation, and hundreds of other
parameters in both the digital and analog domain.
THX Select2 Cinema mode
THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all
8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching
experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side
surround speakers and back surround speakers providing
the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround
sounds.
DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital
Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically
detected in THX Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate
flag has been encoded.
Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing
the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you
know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in
Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround
EX playback mode; otherwise, THX Select2 Cinema
mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum
replay.
113
GLOSSARY
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
THX Surround EX
THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint
development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd.
In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been
encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are
able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added
during the mixing of the program. This channel, called
Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in
addition to the currently available front left, front center,
front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer
channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity
for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings
more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization
than ever before.
Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital
Surround EX technology, when released into the home
consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the
packaging. A list of movies created using this technology
can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com.
A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this
technology can be found at www.thx.com.
Only receiver and controller products bearing the
THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX
mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the
home.
This product may also engage the THX Surround EX
mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is
not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the
information delivered to the Surround Back channel will
be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing
depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of
the individual listener.
Component video signal
With the component video signal system, the video signal
is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the
P
B and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be
reproduced more faithfully with this system because each
of these signals is independent. The component signal is
also called the “color difference signal” because the
luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal.
A monitor with component input jacks is required in order
to use the component signal for output.
Composite video signal
With the composite video signal system, the video signal
is composed of three basic elements of a video picture;
color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite
video jack on a video component transmits these three
elements combined.
S-video signal
With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally
transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted
as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the
chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the
S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss
and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful
images.
Video signal information
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
114
This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic
Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the
Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the
frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to
match your listening environment. YPAO uses a
combination of the following three parameters
(Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise
adjustment of the frequency characteristics.
Frequency
This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave
increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz.
Gain
This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB
between –20 and +6 dB.
Q factor
The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as
the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the
values 0.5 and 10.
YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your
listening requirements using a combination of the above
three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each
equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit
has 7 equalizer bands for each channel.
The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise
adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2).
This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as
in Figure 1).
Figure 1
Figure 2
PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION
Gain
Frequency
Original frequency
characteristic
Band 1
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Gain
Frequency
Band 1
Band 2
Frequency
characteristic after
correction
Original frequency
characteristic
SPECIFICATIONS
115
ADDITIONAL
INFORMATION
AUDIO SECTION
Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround,
Surround back
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 ..................................... 130 W
Maximum Power (EIAJ)
[Asia, General, China and Korea models]
1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 ..........................................................180 W
Dynamic Power (IHF)
[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia
models]
8/6/4/2 ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W
DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 ......................................................... 190 W
•Dynamic Headroom
[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia
models]
8 ...................................................................................... 1.03 dB
IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models]
1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 .......................................................140 W
Damping Factor (IHF)
20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 ................................................... 140 or more
Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance
PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 k
CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 k
MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 k
Maximum Input Signal
PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .............................. 100 mV or more
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more
Output Level/Output Impedance
REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 k
PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500
SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500
ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 k
[U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]
Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance
CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 ) ............................... 150 mV/100
Frequency Response
CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB
RIAA Equalization Deviation
PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB
Total Harmonic Distortion
PHONO to REC OUT
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less
CD, etc. to Front L/R
(20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network)
PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R
[U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models]
.............................................................................. 86 dB or more
[Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ...................... 81 dB or more
CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................................... 100 dB
Residual Noise (IHF-A Network)
Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less
Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz)
PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more
CD (5.1 k shortened) to Front L/R ........... 60 dB/45 dB or more
Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R)
BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz
BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz
TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz
TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz
Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz)
H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct.
L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct.
VIDEO SECTION
Video Signal Type (Wall Paper)
[Asia, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ................ PAL
[U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC
Video Signal Type (Video Conversion)
[Asia, General, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models]
.............................................................................................. PAL
[Other models] .................................................................... NTSC
Signal Level
Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75
S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 (C)
Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 (Pb/Pr)
Maximum Input Level .......................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more
Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 60 dB or more
Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT)
Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB
Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB
FM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz
[Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz
[Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz
Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf)
Selectivity ................................................................................ 70 dB
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB
HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3%
HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB
HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB
Frequency Response
Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB
HD [U.S.A. model only] ................ 20 Hz to 18 kHz, +0.5, –3 dB
Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75
SPECIFICATIONS
116
SPECIFICATIONS
AM SECTION
Tuning Range
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz
[Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz
[Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz
Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m
Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF)
HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB
Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz)
HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03%
Stereo Separation (1 kHz)
HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB
Frequency Response (20 Hz to 12.5 kHz)
HD [U.S.A. model only] ............................................. +0.5/–3 dB
GENERAL
Power Supply
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz
[General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[Asia model].................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz
[China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz
[Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz
[Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz
[U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz
Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA
[Other models] ................................................................... 500 W
Standby Power Consumption
[U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.2 W or less
[General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less
[Other models] ....................................................... 0.15 W or less
Maximum Power Consumption [General model only]
6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W
•AC Outlets
[U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum)
[Australia and U.K. models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum)
[Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum)
[China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum)
Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm
(17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/4”)
Weight .................................................................. 18.0 kg (39.7 lbs)
i
LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES
CABLE
ABC 0030, 0035
AMERICAST 0926
BELL SOUTH 0926
BIRMINGHAM CABLE
COMMUNICATIONS
0303
BRITISH TELECOM 0030
CABLE & WIRELESS
1095
DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
DIRECTOR 0503
FILMNET 0470
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0030, 0303, 0503,
0837,
GOLDSTAR 0171
HAMLIN 0036, 0300
JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503,
0837
LG 0171
MNET 0470
MEMOREX 0027
MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837,
1133
NTL 1095
NOOS 0844
ONO 1095
PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX
0030
PACE 0264, 1087, 1095
PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134
PARAGON 0027
PHILIPS 0332, 0344
PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904,
1904
PULSAR 0027
QUASAR 0027
REGAL 0300, 0306
RUNCO 0027
SAGEM 0844
SAMSUNG 0027, 0171
SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA
0035, 0504, 0904,
1904
SONY 1033
STARCOM 0030
SUPERCABLE 0303
TS 0030
TELE+1 0470
TELEWEST 1095
TORX 0030
TOSHIBA 0027
TRANS PX 0303
UNITED CABLE 0030
ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926
CD PLAYER
AIWA 0184
ARCAM 0184
AUDIO RESEARCH 0184
AUDIO TON 0184
AUDIOLAB 0184
AUDIOMECA 0184
CAIRN 0184
CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS
0056
CARVER 0184, 0206
CYRUS 0184
DKK 0027
DMX ELECTRONICS
0184
DENON 0900
DYNAMIC BASS 0206
EMERSON 0332
FISHER 0206
GENEXXA 0059, 0332
GOODMANS 0332
GRUNDIG 0184
HARMAN/KARDON
0184, 0200
HITACHI 0059
JVC 0099
KENWOOD 0055, 0064
KRELL 0184
LXI 0332
LINN 0184
MCS 0056
MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332
MARANTZ 0056, 0184
MATSUI 0184
MEMOREX 0332
MERIDIAN 0184
MICROMEGA 0184
MIRO 0027
MISSION 0184
MYRYAD 0184
NAD 0027
NSM 0184
NAIM 0184
OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064,
0206, 0332
PANASONIC 0056
PHILIPS 0184
PIONEER 0059, 0332
POLK AUDIO 0184
PROTON 0184
QED 0184
QUAD 0184
QUASAR 0056
RCA 0059, 0206, 0332
REALISTIC 0206
REVOX 0184
ROTEL 0184
SAE 0184
SANSUI 0184, 0332
SANYO 0206
SCOTT 0332
SEARS 0332
SHARP 0064
SIMAUDIO 0184
SONIC FRONTIERS 0184
SONY 0027
SYMPHONIC 0332
TAG MCLAREN 0184
TANDY 0059
TECHNICS 0056
THORENS 0184
THULE 0184
UNIVERSUM 0184
VICTOR 0099
WARDS 0184
YAMAHA 2300, 2301
CD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0653
MARANTZ 0653
PHILIPS 0653
YAMAHA 2400
DVD PLAYER
ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS
0757
ALBA 0744
AMSTRAD 0740
APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744,
0782, 0821, 0823,
0857, 1127
BLAUPINKT 0744
BLUE PARADE 0598
BUSH 0740
CENTREX 0699
CLATRONIC 0815
CYBERHOME 0741
DVD2000 0548
DAEWOO 0811, 0797
DANSAI 0797
DECCA 0797
DENON 0517
DIAMOND 0795
DIGITREX 0699
EMERSON 0618
ENTERPRISE 0618
FISHER 0697
GE 0549, 0744
GO VIDEO 0742
GOLDSTAR 0768
GRADIENTE 0678
GREENHILL 0744
GRUNDIG 0566
HITACHI 0600, 0691
HITEKER 0699
JVC 0585, 0650
KLH 0744
KENWOOD 0517, 0561
KOSS 0678
LG 0768
LIMIT 0795
MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702
MARANTZ 0566
MEMOREX 0858
MICO 0750
MICROSOFT 0549
MINTEK 0744
MITSUBISHI 0548
MUSTEK 0757
NESA 0744
ONKYO 0530
ORITRON 0678
PALSONIC 0699
PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389
PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673,
0881
PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658,
0659
POLK AUDIO 0566
PROSCAN 0549
QWESTAR 0678
RCA 0549, 0598, 0744
ROTEL 0650
SM ELECTRONIC 0757
SAMSUNG 0600
SANYO 0697
SHARP 0657
SHERWOOD 0797
SHINSONIC 0560
SLIM ART 0811
SONY 0560, 0891
SYLVANIA 0702
TATUNG 0797
TEAC 0598, 0744
TECHNICS 0517
THETA DIGITAL 0598
THOMSON 0549
TOSHIBA 0530
URBAN CONCEPTS 0530
XBOX 0549
YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572,
2100, 2101, 2102
ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768
ZEUS 0811
DVD RECORDER
PANASONIC 2800, 2801, 2802
PHILIPS 2808
PIONEER 2804, 2805, 2806
TOSHIBA 2803
YAMAHA 2807
LD PLAYER
CARVER 0091
DENON 0086
MARANTZ 0091
MITSUBISHI 0086
NAD 0086
NAGSMI 0086
OPTIMUS 0086
PHILIPS 0091
PIONEER 0086
SALORA 0091
SONY 0228
TELEFUNKEN 0086
YAMAHA 2200
MD RECORDER
KENWOOD 0708
ONKYO 0895
SHARP 0888
SONY 0517
YAMAHA 2500, 2501, 2502
RECEIVER (TUNER)
ADC 0558
AIWA 0185, 1116, 1415,
1432, 1668
ALCO 1417
ANAM 1636
APEX DIGITAL 1284
AUDIOLAB 1216
AUDIOTRONIC 1216
AUDIOVOX 1417
BOSE 1256
CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS
1397
ii
CAPETRONIC 0558
CARVER 1116, 1216
CENTREX 1284
DENON 1387
FERGUSON 0558
FINE ARTS 1216
GRUNDIG 1216
HARMAN/KARDON
0137, 1331
INTEGRA 0162, 1325
JBL 0137, 1333
JVC 0101, 0558, 1401,
1522
KLH 1417, 1439
KENWOOD 1054, 1340
MCS 0066
MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216,
1296,
MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216,
1316
MICROMEGA 1216
MUSICMAGIC 1116
MYRYAD 1216
NAD 0347
NORCENT 1416
ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325
OPTIMUS 0558, 1050
PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545,
1790
PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293,
1295, 1296, 1310,
1316
PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050,
1411
POLK AUDIO 1316
PROSCAN 1281
QUASAR 0066
RCA 0558, 1050, 1281,
1417, 1636,
SABA 0558
SANSUI 1116
SCHNEIDER 0558
SONY 0185, 1085, 1185,
1685, 1785
STEREOPHONICS 1050
SUNFIRE 1340
TEAC 1417
TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336,
1545
TELEFUNKEN 0558
THOMSON 1281
THORENS 1216
UHER 0558
VENTURER 1417
VICTOR 0101
WARDS 0041, 0185
YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358,
2600, 2601, 2602,
2603
SATELLITE TUNER
@SAT 1327
ABSAT 0150
ALBA 0482
ALPHASTAR 0799
AMSTRAD 0874
ASTON 0169, 1156
ASTRO 0200
ATSAT 1327
AVALON 0423
BLAUPUNKT 0200
BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING
0874, 1202
CANAL DIGITAL 0880
CANAL SATELLITE 0880
CANAL+ 0880
CHAPARRAL 0243
CITYCOM 1203
CONNEXIONS 0423
CROSSDIGITAL 1136
CYRUS 0227
D-BOX 0750, 1154
DMT 1102
DNT 0227, 0423
DAERYUNG 0423
DAEWOO 1323
DIGENIUS 0326
DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593,
0666, 0751, 0776,
0846, 1103, 1136,
1169, 1776, 1883
DISH NETWORK SYSTEM
0802, 1032
DISHPRO 0802, 1032
DISTRATEL 0111
DREAM MULTIMEDIA
1264
ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637,
0802, 0880, 0898,
1032, 1113
ENGEL 1044
EXPRESSVU 0802
FTE 0890
FINLUX 0482
FRACARRO 0898
FUBA 0423
GE 0593
GOI 0802
GALAXIS 0890, 1138
GENERAL INSTRUMENT
0896
GOLD BOX 0880
GRUNDIG 0200, 0874
HTS 0802
HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423
HITACHI 0482, 0846
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM
0776, 1169, 1776
HUMAX 0890, 1203
INVIDEO 0898
JVC 0802
KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227,
0276, 0685, 1248
KREISELMEYER 0200
LABGEAR 1323
LOGIX 1044
LORENZEN 0326
MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751
MANHATTAN 0482, 1044,
1110
MARANTZ 0227
MEDIASAT 0880
MEMOREX 0751
METRONIC 0111
MITSUBISHI 0776
MOTOROLA 0896
MYRYAD 0227
NEXT LEVEL 0896
NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778,
1154, 1250, 1750
OCTALTV 1032
ORBITECH 1127
PACE 0482, 0874, 1202,
1350
PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874,
1347
PANDA 0482
PAYSAT 0751
PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482,
0749, 0751, 0776,
0880, 1103, 1169,
1776
PIONEER 0880
PROMAX 0482
PROSCAN 0419, 0593
RCA 0170, 0419, 0593,
0882
RFT 0227
RADIOSHACK 0896
RADIOLA 0227
RADIX 0423
SKY 0874, 0883, 1202
SM ELECTRONIC 1227
SABRE 0482
SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280
SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303,
1319
SAT CONTROL 1327
SATSTATION 1110
SCHWAIGER 1138
SEEMANN 0423
SIEMENS 0200
SONY 0666, 0874, 1666
STAR CHOICE 0896
STRONG 1327
TPS 0847, 1280
TANTEC 0482
TECHNISAT 1126, 1127
TELESTAR 1127
THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073,
1318
TOPFIELD 1233
TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776
ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666
UNIDEN 0749, 0751
UNIVERSUM 0200
VENTANA 0227
WISI 0200, 0423, 0482
XSAT 0150
ZEHNDER 1102
ZENITH 0883, 1883
TAPE DECK
AIWA 0056
CARVER 0056
GRUNDIG 0056
HARMAN/KARDON
0056
MAGNAVOX 0056
MARANTZ 0056
MYRYAD 0056
OPTIMUS 0054
PHILIPS 0056
PIONEER 0054
POLK AUDIO 0056
RCA 0054
REVOX 0056
SANSUI 0056
SONY 0270
THORENS 0056
WARDS 0054
YAMAHA 2700,2701
TV
AGB 0543
AOC 0036, 0057, 0087,
0119, 0120, 0135,
0205, 0207, 0478
ASA 0131
AWA 0036
ACURA 0036
ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680
ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490
ADVENT 0788
AIKO 0119
AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235,
0388, 0543, 0729,
0839
AKURA 0291
ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398,
0695
AMERICA ACTION 0207
AMPRO 0778
AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198,
0398, 0439, 0460,
0543
ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277
ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677
ANITECH 0036
APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792,
0794
AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136
BANG & OLUFSEN 0592
BASIC 0036
BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539
BAYSONIC 0207
BEAUMARK 0205
BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741,
0742
BELL & HOWELL 0181
BEON 0064
BLAUPUNKT 0222
BLUE SKY 0695, 1064
BONDSTEC 0274
BRADFORD 0207
BRANDT 0136, 0362
BROKSONIC 0263, 0490
BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398,
0401, 0695, 1064
CCE 0064
CGE 0274
CTC 0274
CXC 0207
CANDLE 0057
CARNIVALE 0057
CARVER 0081, 0197
CASCADE 0036
CATHAY 0064
CELEBRITY 0027
CELERA 0792
CENTURION 0064
CHANGHONG 0792
CHING TAI 0036, 0119
CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119,
0207
CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207
CIMLINE 0036
CINERAL 0119, 0478
CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119
CLARION 0207
CLARIVOX 0064
CLATRONIC 0274, 0397
CONDOR 0347, 0397
CONRAC 0835
iii
CONTEC 0036, 0207
CRAIG 0207
CROSLEY 0081
CROWN 0036, 0064, 0207,
0397, 0445
CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074,
0081, 0087, 0120,
0172, 0181, 0193,
0478, 0729, 1174,
1374
DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064,
0119, 0135, 0181,
0197, 0205, 0207,
0401, 0478, 0650,
0661, 1688
DANSAI 0064
DAYTON 0036
DE GRAAF 0235, 0575
DECCA 0064, 0543
DENON 0172
DIGATRON 0064
DIXI 0036, 0064
DUMONT 0044
DWIN 0747, 0801
ECE 0064
ELBE 0286
ELECTROBAND 0027
ELIN 0064, 0575
ELITE 0347
ELTA 0036
EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207,
0263, 0388, 0490,
0650
ENVISION 0057,0840
EPSON 0860
ERRES 0064
ETHER 0036, 0057
ETRON 0036
EUROPHON 0543
FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136,
0265, 0314, 0362,
0587
FIDELITY 0388
FINLANDIA 0235, 0373
FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132,
0373, 0543
FIRSTAR 0036, 0263
FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695
FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235,
0397
FLINT 0482
FORMENTI 0064, 0347
FORTRESS 0120
FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291
FUJITSU 0710, 0836
FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291
FUTURETECH 0207
GE 0057, 0074, 0078,
0119, 0205, 0207,
0478, 0587, 1174,
1374, 1481
GEC 0064, 0543
GATEWAY 1782, 1783
GELOSO 0036
GENEXXA 0190
GIBRALTER 0044, 0057
GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136,
0181, 0205, 0404
GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401,
0661
GOREMJE 0397
GRADIENTE 0080, 0197
GRAETZ 0190, 0388
GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366,
0543
GRANDIN 0637
GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514,
0583, 0614
GRUNPY 0207
HCM 0036, 0439
HALLMARK 0205
HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207
HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388,
0455, 0583
HANTAREX 0543
HARMAN/KARDON 0081
HARVARD 0207
HAVERMY 0120
HELLO KITTY 0478
HINARI 0036, 0064
HISAWA 0482
HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119,
0132, 0136, 0172,
0190, 0205, 0252,
0383, 0508, 0575,
0605, 1172, 1283
HUA TUN 0036
HUANYU 0401
HYPSON 0064, 0291
ICE 0291, 0398
ITS 0398
ITT 0190, 0388, 0575
IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445
INDIANA 0064
INFINITY 0081
INGELEN 0190
INNO HIT 0543
INNOVA 0064
INTEQ 0044
INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274,
0388, 0539
INTERVISION 0064, 0291,
0404
JBL 0081
JCB 0027
JVC 0080, 0398, 0490,
0680, 0710
JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119,
0183, 0263
JENSEN 0788
KEC 0207
KTV 0057, 0207
KAISUI 0036
KAPSCH 0190
KARCHER 0637
KATHREIN 0583
KENDO 0064
KENWOOD 0057
KNEISSEL 0286, 0462
KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207
KORPEL 0064
KOYODA 0036
L&S ELECTRONIC 0835
LG 0057, 0064, 0087,
0135, 0205, 0741
LXI 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0205
LEYCO 0064, 0291
LIESENK & TTER 0064
LOEWE 0539
LUXOR 0383, 0388
M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064,
0131, 0132, 0136,
0190, 0314, 0373,
0401, 0507
MGA 0057, 0177, 0205
MTC 0057, 0087, 0539
MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543
MAGNAFON 0543
MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281,
1481
MANESTH 0291, 0347
MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081,
0583
MARK 0064
MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235,
0398, 0514, 0543
MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677
MEDIATOR 0064
MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064
MEGATRON 0172, 0205
MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181,
0205, 0277, 0490,
1064
METZ 0474
MICROMAXX 0835
MICROSTAR 0835
MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078
MINERVA 0514
MINOKA 0439
MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135,
0177, 0181, 0205,
0207, 0263, 0277,
0539, 0863, 1277
MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543,
0636
MOTOROLA 0120
MULTITECH 0036, 0207
MYRYAD 0583
NAD 0183, 0205, 0388,
0893
NEC 0036, 0057, 0078,
0181, 0183, 0197,
0205, 0482, 0524,
1731
NEI 0064
NTC 0119
NECKERMANN 0064, 0583
NETSAT 0064
NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120,
0205
NIKKAI 0064, 0291
NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205
NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507,
0575, 0658
NORCENT 0775, 0851
NORDMENDE 0136, 0314,
0587
OCEANIC 0190, 0388
ONWA 0207, 0460
OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277,
0677
OPTONICA 0120
ORION 0064, 0263, 0347,
0490, 0543
OSAKI 0291, 0439
OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347,
0539, 0583
PALLADIUM 0397, 0445
PANAMA 0291
PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081,
0190, 0277, 0677,
1437
PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347
PAUSA 0036
PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078,
0087, 0183, 0205,
1374
PERDIO 0347
PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081,
0172, 0205, 0207,
0274, 0490, 1688
PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064,
0078, 0081, 0119,
0135, 0205, 0401,
0583, 0717, 1481
PHONOLA 0064
PILOT 0057
PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193,
0314, 0706, 0787,
0893
PORTLAND 0119
PRANDONI-PRINCE
0543
PRIMA 0788
PRISM 0078
PROFEX 0036, 0388
PROSCAN 0074
PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274,
0291, 0445, 0695
PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205
PULSAR 0044
QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677
QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
R-LINE 0064
RCA 0027, 0057, 0074,
0117, 0119, 0205,
0706, 1074, 1174,
1274, 1374, 1474,
1481, 1574
RFT 0455
RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074,
0181, 0205, 0207
RADIOLA 0064
RADIOMARELLI 0543
REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205,
0207
REDIFFUSION 0388
REOC 0741
REVOX 0064
REX 0190, 0286, 0291
ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445
RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524,
0630
SBR 0064
SEG 0291, 0695
SEI 0543
SKY 0064
SSS 0207
SABA 0136, 0190, 0314,
0362
SACCS 0265
SAGEM 0637
SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543
SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388,
0575
SAMBERS 0543
SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119,
0120, 0181, 0198,
0205, 0677, 1782
SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064,
0087, 0117, 0119,
0181, 0205, 0291,
0397, 0583, 0614,
0645, 0729, 0793,
0839, 0841
SANSEI 0478
SANSUI 0490
SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207,
0235, 0366, 0826
SCHAUB LORENZ 0388
SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398,
0695
SCOTCH 0205
SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263
iv
SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181,
0183, 0198, 0205
SELECO 0190, 0286
SEMIVOX 0207
SEMP 0183
SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677
SHEN YING 0036, 0119
SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263
SIAREM 0543
SIEMENS 0064, 0222
SINUDYNE 0543
SKANTIC 0383
SKYGIANT 0207
SKYWORTH 0064
SOLAVOX 0190
SONITRON 0235
SONOKO 0036, 0064
SONOLOR 0190, 0235
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0677, 0861,
1127, 1532, 1678
SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207
SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445
SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119,
0183, 0205
SQUAREVIEW 0198
STANDARD 0036
STARLITE 0207
STERN 0190, 0286
SUPREME 0027
SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198
SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207
SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0478
SYSLINE 0064
T + A 0474
TCM 0835
TMK 0205
TNCI 0044
TVS 0490
TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205
TAI YI 0036
TANDY 0120, 0190
TASHIKO 0119, 0677
TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078,
0081, 0087, 0181,
0183, 0543
TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291,
0439, 0445, 0482,
0695, 1064
TEC 0274
TECHNEMA 0347
TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677
TECHWOOD 0078
TECO 0036, 0078, 0119,
0120, 0205, 0291,
0680
TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119,
0177, 0207
TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289,
0362, 0652, 0729
TELEMEISTER 0347
TELETECH 0036
TENSAI 0347
TERA 0057
THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587,
0652, 1474
THORN 0064, 0131, 0388,
0539
TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183,
0535, 0645, 0677,
0859, 1283, 1383,
1683, 1731
TRIUMPH 0543
TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119
UHER 0347
UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132,
0291, 0373, 0397,
0519
VECTOR RESEARCH
0057
VESTEL 0064
VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677,
0680
VIDEOSAT 0274
VIDIKRON 0081
VIDTECH 0205
VIEWSONIC 1782
VISION 0347
VOXSON 0190
WALTHAM 0383
WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205,
0893
WATSON 0064, 0347
WAYCON 0183
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0064, 0347, 0490,
0650
YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860,
2900 (projector),
2901 (projector),
2902
YAPSHE 0277
YOKO 0064, 0291
ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205,
0490
VCR
ASA 0064, 0108
ADMIRAL 0075
ADVENTURA 0027
AIKO 0305
AIWA 0027, 0064, 0334,
0375, 0379
AKAI 0068, 0342
AKIBA 0099
ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342,
0379
AMERICA ACTION 0305
AMERICAN HIGH 0062
AMSTRAD 0027
ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267,
0305, 0507
ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589
ANITECH 0099
ASHA 0267
ASUKA 0064
AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305
BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131
BASIC LINE 0099, 0305
BEAUMARK 0267
BELL & HOWELL 0131
BLAUPUNKT 0253
BRANDT 0347
BRANDT ELECTRONIC
0068
BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506
BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379
CCE 0099, 0305
CGE 0027
CALIX 0064
CANON 0062
CARVER 0108
CIMLINE 0099
CINERAL 0305
CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305
COLT 0099
COMBITECH 0379
CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099,
0267
CROWN 0099, 0305
CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068,
0087, 1062
CYBERNEX 0267
CYRUS 0108
DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305,
0669, 1305
DANSAI 0099
DE GRAAF 0069
DECCA 0027, 0108
DENON 0069
DUAL 0068
DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131
DYNATECH 0027
ESC 0267, 0305
ELCATECH 0099
ELECTROHOME 0064
ELECTROPHONIC 0064
EMEREX 0059
EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064,
0070, 0072, 0211,
0267, 0305, 1305,
1506
FERGUSON 0068, 0347
FIDELITY 0027
FINLANDIA 0108, 0131
FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108,
0131
FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072,
0099
FISHER 0074, 0131
FUJI 0060, 0062
FUJITSU 0027, 0072
FUNAI 0027
GE 0062, 0087, 0267,
0834, 1062, 1087
GEC 0108
GARRARD 0027
GENERAL 0072
GO VIDEO 0459
GOLDHAND 0099
GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507,
1264
GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099,
0305
GRADIENTE 0027
GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267
GRANADA 0108, 0131
GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099
GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253,
0374
HCM 0099
HI-Q 0074
HANSEATIC 0064
HARLEY DAVIDSON
0027
HARMAN/KARDON 0108
HARWOOD 0099
HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379
HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068,
0069, 0267
HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS
0069
HYPSON 0099
ITT 0068, 0131, 0267
ITV 0064, 0305
IMPERIAL 0027
INTERFUNK 0108
JVC 0068, 0072, 0094
JENSEN 0068
KEC 0064, 0305
KLH 0099
KAISUI 0099
KENWOOD 0068, 0094
KODAK 0062, 0064
KOLIN 0068, 0070
KORPEL 0099
LG 0064, 0069, 0072,
0507
LXI 0064
LENCO 0305
LEYCO 0099
LLOYD’S 0027
LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589
LOGIK 0099, 0267
LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131
M ELECTRONIC 0027
MEI 0062
MGA 0070, 0267
MGN TECHNOLOGY
0267
MTC 0027, 0267
MAGNASONIC 1305
MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066,
0108, 1808
MAGNIN 0267
MANESTH 0072, 0099
MARANTZ 0062, 0108
MARTA 0064
MATSUI 0375, 0379
MATSUSHITA 0062
MEDION 0375
MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064,
0066, 0074, 0075,
0131, 0267, 0334,
0375, 1264
MEMPHIS 0099
METZ 0064, 0374, 1589
MINOLTA 0069
MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094,
0108, 0834
MOTOROLA 0062, 0075
MULTITECH 0027, 0099
MURPHY 0027
MYRYAD 0108
NAD 0131
NEC 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075, 0094, 0131
NATIONAL 0253
NECKERMANN 0108
NESCO 0099
NEWAVE 0064
NIKKO 0064
NOBLEX 0267
NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267
NORDMENDE 0068, 0347
OCEANIC 0027, 0068
OKANO 0342, 0375
OLYMPUS 0062, 0253
OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131,
0459
ORION 0211, 0375, 0379,
1506
OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099
OTTO VERSAND 0108
PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099
PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253,
0643, 1062, 1589
PATHE MARCONI 0068
PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069,
0267, 1062, 1264
PENTAX 0069
PERDIO 0027
PHILCO 0062
PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645,
1108, 1208
PHONOLA 0108
PILOT 0064
v
PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108
POLK AUDIO 0108
PROFITRONIC 0267
PROLINE 0027
PROSCAN 0087, 1087
PROTEC 0099
PULSAR 0066
PYE 0108
QUASAR 0062, 1062
QUELLE 0108
RCA 0062, 0069, 0087,
0267, 0834, 1062,
1087
RADIOSHACK 0027
RADIOLA 0108
RADIX 0064
RANDEX 0064
REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064,
0074, 0075, 0131
REOC 0375
REPLAYTV 0641, 0643
REX 0068
ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267,
0305
RUNCO 0066
SBR 0108
SEG 0267
SEI 0108
STS 0069
SABA 0068, 0347
SALORA 0070
SAMPO 0064, 0075
SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459
SANKY 0066, 0075
SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094,
1506
SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267
SAVILLE 0379
SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068,
0131
SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108
SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211
SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064,
0069, 0074, 0131,
1264
SELECO 0068
SEMP 0072
SHARP 0075, 0834
SHINTOM 0099, 0131
SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131
SILVA 0064
SINGER 0072, 0099
SINUDYNE 0108
SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643
SONTEC 0064
SONY 0027, 0059, 0060,
0062, 0663, 1259
SUNKAI 0375
SUNSTAR 0027
SUNTRONIC 0027
SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108,
0070, 1808
SYMPHONIC 0027
TMK 0267
TANDY 0027, 0131
TASHIKO 0027, 0064
TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072,
0094, 0108
TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305,
0334, 0669
TECHNICS 0062, 0253
TECO 0062, 0064, 0068,
0075
TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064
TELEAVIA 0068
TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347
TENOSAL 0099
TENSAI 0027
THOMAS 0027
THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094,
0347
THORN 0068, 0131
TIVO 0645, 0663
TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072,
0094, 0108, 0872
TOTEVISION 0064, 0267
UHER 0267
UNITECH 0267
UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108,
0267
VECTOR 0072
VICTOR 0068, 0094
VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072
VIDEOMAGIC 0064
VIDEOSONIC 0267
VILLAIN 0027
WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069,
0074, 0075, 0087,
0099, 0108, 0267
WHITE WESTINGHOUSE
0099
XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099
YAMAHA 0068
YAMIS HI 0 09 9
YOKAN 0099
YOKO 0267
ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066,
1506
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA
6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A.
YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD.
135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA
YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H.
SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY
YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A.
RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE
YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD.
YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND
YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B.
J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN
YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD.
17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA
©
2005 All rights reserved.
RX-V4600
Printed in Malaysia WF09590
RX-V4600
AV R e c e i ve r
OWNER’S MANUAL
U
RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM

Transcripción de documentos

RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM U RX-V4600 RX-V4600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF09590 IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS 10 CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK DO NOT OPEN CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL. • Explanation of Graphical Symbols The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol, within an equilateral triangle, is intended to alert you to the presence of uninsulated “dangerous voltage” within the product’s enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to constitute a risk of electric shock to persons. The exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to alert you to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions in the literature accompanying the appliance. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 i 11 Read Instructions – All the safety and operating instructions should be read before the product is operated. Retain Instructions – The safety and operating instructions should be retained for future reference. Heed Warnings – All warnings on the product and in the operating instructions should be adhered to. Follow Instructions – All operating and use instructions should be followed. Cleaning – Unplug this product from the wall outlet before cleaning. Do not use liquid cleaners or aerosol cleaners. Attachments – Do not use attachments not recommended by the product manufacturer as they may cause hazards. Water and Moisture – Do not use this product near water – for example, near a bath tub, wash bowl, kitchen sink, or laundry tub; in a wet basement; or near a swimming pool; and the like. Accessories – Do not place this product on an unstable cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table. The product may fall, causing serious injury to a child or adult, and serious damage to the product. Use only with a cart, stand, tripod, bracket, or table recommended by the manufacturer, or sold with the product. Any mounting of the product should follow the manufacturer’s instructions, and should use a mounting accessory recommended by the manufacturer. A product and cart combination should be moved with care. Quick stops, excessive force, and uneven surfaces may cause the product and cart combination to overturn. 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 Ventilation – Slots and openings in the cabinet are provided for ventilation and to ensure reliable operation of the product and to protect it from overheating, and these openings must not be blocked or covered. The openings should never be blocked by placing the product on a bed, sofa, rug, or other similar surface. This product should not be placed in a built-in installation such as a bookcase or rack unless proper ventilation is provided or the manufacturer’s instructions have been adhered to. Power Sources – This product should be operated only from the type of power source indicated on the marking label. If you are not sure of the type of power supply to your home, consult your product dealer or local power company. For products intended to operate from battery power, or other sources, refer to the operating instructions. Grounding or Polarization – This product may be equipped with a polarized alternating current line plug (a plug having one blade wider than the other). This plug will fit into the power outlet only one way. This is a safety feature. If you are unable to insert the plug fully into the outlet, try reversing the plug. If the plug should still fail to fit, contact your electrician to replace your obsolete outlet. Do not defeat the safety purpose of the polarized plug. Power-Cord Protection – Power-supply cords should be routed so that they are not likely to be walked on or pinched by items placed upon or against them, paying particular attention to cords at plugs, convenience receptacles, and the point where they exit from the product. Lightning – For added protection for this product during a lightning storm, or when it is left unattended and unused for long periods of time, unplug it from the wall outlet and disconnect the antenna or cable system. This will prevent damage to the product due to lightning and power-line surges. Power Lines – An outside antenna system should not be located in the vicinity of overhead power lines or other electric light or power circuits, or where it can fall into such power lines or circuits. When installing an outside antenna system, extreme care should be taken to keep from touching such power lines or circuits as contact with them might be fatal. Overloading – Do not overload wall outlets, extension cords, or integral convenience receptacles as this can result in a risk of fire or electric shock. Object and Liquid Entry – Never push objects of any kind into this product through openings as they may touch dangerous voltage points or short-out parts that could result in a fire or electric shock. Never spill liquid of any kind on the product. Servicing – Do not attempt to service this product yourself as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous voltage or other hazards. Refer all servicing to qualified service personnel. Damage Requiring Service – Unplug this product from the wall outlet and refer servicing to qualified service personnel under the following conditions: a) When the power-supply cord or plug is damaged, b) If liquid has been spilled, or objects have fallen into the product, c) If the product has been exposed to rain or water, IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS d) 20 21 22 23 If the product does not operate normally by following the operating instructions. Adjust only those controls that are covered by the operating instructions as an improper adjustment of other controls may result in damage and will often require extensive work by a qualified technician to restore the product to its normal operation, e) If the product has been dropped or damaged in any way, and f) When the product exhibits a distinct change in performance - this indicates a need for service. Replacement Parts – When replacement parts are required, be sure the service technician has used replacement parts specified by the manufacturer or have the same characteristics as the original part. Unauthorized substitutions may result in fire, electric shock, or other hazards. Safety Check – Upon completion of any service or repairs to this product, ask the service technician to perform safety checks to determine that the product is in proper operating condition. Wall or Ceiling Mounting – The unit should be mounted to a wall or ceiling only as recommended by the manufacturer. Heat – The product should be situated away from heat sources such as radiators, heat registers, stoves, or other products (including amplifiers) that produce heat. 24 Outdoor Antenna Grounding – If an outside antenna or cable system is connected to the product, be sure the antenna or cable system is grounded so as to provide some protection against voltage surges and built-up static charges. Article 810 of the National Electrical Code, ANSI/NFPA 70, provides information with regard to proper grounding of the mast and supporting structure, grounding of the lead-in wire to an antenna discharge unit, size of grounding conductors, location of antenna discharge unit, connection to grounding electrodes, and requirements for the grounding electrode. EXAMPLE OF ANTENNA GROUNDING MAST ANTENNA LEAD IN WIRE GROUND CLAMP ANTENNA DISCHARGE UNIT (NEC SECTION 810–20) ELECTRIC SERVICE EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS (NEC SECTION 810–21) GROUND CLAMPS Note to CATV system installer: This reminder is provided to call the CATV system installer’s attention to Article 820-40 of the NEC that provides guidelines for proper grounding and, in particular, specifies that the cable ground shall be connected to the grounding system of the building, as close to the point of cable entry as practical. POWER SERVICE GROUNDING ELECTRODE SYSTEM (NEC ART 250. PART H) NEC – NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE FCC INFORMATION (for US customers) 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2 IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3 NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Electronics Corp., U.S.A. 6660 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620. The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ii CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. CAUTION: READ THIS BEFORE OPERATING YOUR UNIT. 1 To assure the finest performance, please read this manual carefully. Keep it in a safe place for future reference. 2 Install this sound system in a well ventilated, cool, dry, clean place – away from direct sunlight, heat sources, vibration, dust, moisture, and/or cold. Allow ventilation space of at least 30 cm on the top, 20 cm on the left and right, and 20 cm on the back of this unit. 3 Locate this unit away from other electrical appliances, motors, or transformers to avoid humming sounds. 4 Do not expose this unit to sudden temperature changes from cold to hot, and do not locate this unit in an environment with high humidity (i.e. a room with a humidifier) to prevent condensation inside this unit, which may cause an electrical shock, fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 5 Avoid installing this unit where foreign objects may fall onto this unit and/or this unit may be exposed to liquid dripping or splashing. On the top of this unit, do not place: – Other components, as they may cause damage and/or discoloration on the surface of this unit. – Burning objects (i.e. candles), as they may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. – Containers with liquid in them, as they may fall and liquid may cause electrical shock to the user and/or damage to this unit. 6 Do not cover this unit with a newspaper, tablecloth, curtain, etc. in order not to obstruct heat radiation. If the temperature inside this unit rises, it may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. 7 Do not plug in this unit to a wall outlet until all connections are complete. 8 Do not operate this unit upside-down. It may overheat, possibly causing damage. 9 Do not use force on switches, knobs and/or cords. 10 When disconnecting the power cable from the wall outlet, grasp the plug; do not pull the cable. 11 Do not clean this unit with chemical solvents; this might damage the finish. Use a clean, dry cloth. 12 Only voltage specified on this unit must be used. Using this unit with a higher voltage than specified is dangerous and may cause fire, damage to this unit, and/or personal injury. YAMAHA will not be held responsible for any damage resulting from use of this unit with a voltage other than specified. 13 To prevent damage by lightning, disconnect the AC power cable and disconnect the antenna cable when there is an electrical storm. 14 Do not attempt to modify or fix this unit. Contact qualified YAMAHA service personnel when any service is needed. The cabinet should never be opened for any reasons. 15 When not planning to use this unit for long periods of time (i.e. vacation), disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 16 Be sure to read the “TROUBLESHOOTING” section on common operating errors before concluding that this unit is faulty. 17 Before moving this unit, press STANDBY/ON to set this unit in the standby mode, and disconnect the AC power plug from the wall outlet. 18 VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .............AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ................................AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz WARNING TO REDUCE THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRIC SHOCK, DO NOT EXPOSE THIS UNIT TO RAIN OR MOISTURE. This unit is not disconnected from the AC power source as long as it is connected to the wall outlet, even if this unit itself is turned off. This state is called the standby mode. In this state, this unit is designed to consume a very small quantity of power. FOR CANADIAN CUSTOMERS To prevent electric shock, match wide blade of plug to wide slot and fully insert. This Class B digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003. POUR LES CONSOMMATEURS CANADIENS Pour éviter les chocs électriques, introduire la lame la plus large de la fiche dans la borne correspondante de la prise et pousser jusqu’au fond. Cet appareil numérique de la classe B est conforme à la norme NMB-003 du Canada. IMPORTANT Please record the serial number of this unit in the space below. MODEL: Serial No.: The serial number is located on the rear of the unit. Retain this Owner’s Manual in a safe place for future reference. We Want You Listening For A Lifetime YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group want you to get the most out of your equipment by playing it at a safe level. One that lets the sound come through loud and clear without annoying blaring or distortion – and, most importantly, without affecting your sensitive hearing. Since hearing damage from loud sounds is often undetectable until it is too late, YAMAHA and the Electronic Industries Association’s Consumer Electronics Group recommend you to avoid prolonged exposure from excessive volume levels. iii CONTENTS ADVANCED OPERATION FEATURES............................................................. 2 GETTING STARTED............................................ 3 ADVANCED OPERATIONS ..............................51 Supplied accessories .................................................. 3 Installing batteries in the remote controls.................. 4 SYSTEM OPTIONS .............................................52 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS ......................... 5 PREPARATION SPEAKER SETUP ............................................... 13 Speaker placement ................................................... 13 Speaker connections ................................................ 15 Before connecting components................................ 18 Connecting video components................................. 19 Connecting audio components................................. 22 Connecting the antennas .......................................... 24 Connecting the power cable..................................... 25 Speaker impedance setting ...................................... 26 Turning on the power............................................... 26 AUTO SETUP....................................................... 27 BASIC OPERATION PLAYBACK.......................................................... 33 TUNING ................................................................ 41 RECORDING ....................................................... 47 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS .............................................. 48 For movie/video sources.......................................... 48 For music sources .................................................... 50 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ...................................................82 Zone 2/Zone 3 connections...................................... 82 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel ..... 83 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using the remote control................................................ 84 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ..................86 Advanced setup menu.............................................. 86 Front panel display system options menu................ 87 USING i.LINK.......................................................91 What is i.LINK? ...................................................... 91 Connecting i.LINK components.............................. 91 Basic i.LINK operations .......................................... 92 Changing i.LINK Select parameters........................ 92 i.LINK display messages ......................................... 94 USING HDMI........................................................95 What is HDMI? ....................................................... 95 Connecting HDMI components............................... 96 Basic HDMI operations ........................................... 97 Changing HDMI parameters.................................... 97 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS ......99 What is a sound field? ............................................. 99 Changing parameter settings ................................... 99 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS.............................................100 TROUBLESHOOTING .....................................105 GLOSSARY.........................................................110 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Automatic and manual tuning.................................. 41 Presetting stations .................................................... 42 Selecting preset stations........................................... 44 Exchanging preset stations ...................................... 44 Using HD Radio™ ................................................... 45 HD Radio™ tuning................................................... 45 Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs .................... 46 Displaying HD Radio™ information ....................... 46 Control area ............................................................. 70 Setting remote control codes ................................... 71 Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) ....................................... 73 Changing source names in the display window....... 75 Using the Macro feature .......................................... 76 Clearing function sets .............................................. 78 Clearing individual functions .................................. 79 Controlling each component.................................... 81 ADVANCED OPERATION Basic operations....................................................... 33 Selecting sound field programs ............................... 34 Additional operations............................................... 35 Selecting audio input modes.................................... 40 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ...................70 SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS Introduction.............................................................. 27 Optimizer microphone setup.................................... 27 Starting the setup ..................................................... 28 Confirming the results ............................................. 30 Changing parameter settings ................................... 54 Input Select .............................................................. 55 Manual Setup (Sound) ............................................. 58 Manual Setup (Basic) .............................................. 61 Manual Setup (Option) ............................................ 66 System Memory....................................................... 69 BASIC OPERATION CONNECTIONS .................................................. 18 Using the sleep timer ............................................... 51 PREPARATION Front panel ................................................................. 5 Remote control........................................................... 7 Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control ................................... 9 Using the remote controls.......................................... 9 Front panel display .................................................. 10 Rear panel ................................................................ 12 INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION Audio formats ........................................................ 110 Sound field programs............................................. 111 Audio information ................................................. 111 Video signal information ....................................... 113 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION .............................................114 SPECIFICATIONS.............................................115 1 FEATURES FEATURES Built-in 7-channel power amplifier Other features ◆ Minimum RMS Output Power (0.04% THD, 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω) Front: 130 W + 130 W Center: 130 W Surround: 130 W + 130 W Surround Back: 130 W + 130 W ◆ YPAO: YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer for automatic speaker setup ◆ 192-kHz/24-bit D/A converter ◆ GUI (graphical user interface) menus that allow you to optimize this unit to suit your individual audio/video system ◆ 6 or 8-channel additional input jacks for discrete multi-channel input ◆ Short message function ◆ PURE DIRECT for pure fidelity sound with analog, DSD, PCM and multi-channel PCM sources ◆ S-video signal input/output capability ◆ Component video input/output capability ◆ Video signal conversion (composite video ↔ S-video → component video) capability for monitor out ◆ i.LINK interface for direct digital transfer of digital audio signals ◆ HDMI interface for standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio ◆ Optical and coaxial digital audio signal jacks ◆ Sleep timer ◆ Cinema and music night listening mode ◆ Remote control with preset remote control codes and learning/macro capability ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 custom installation facility ◆ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control for controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 components connected to this unit Sound field features ◆ Proprietary YAMAHA technology for the creation of sound fields ◆ THX Select2 ◆ SRS CS (U.S.A. model only) ◆ Dolby Digital/Dolby Digital EX decoder ◆ DTS/DTS-ES Matrix 6.1, Discrete 6.1, DTS Neo:6 decoder, DTS 96/24 ◆ Dolby Pro Logic/Dolby Pro Logic / Dolby Pro Logic x decoder ◆ Virtual CINEMA DSP ◆ SILENT CINEMA™ Sophisticated AM/FM tuner ◆ ◆ ◆ ◆ 40-station random access preset tuning Automatic preset tuning Preset station shifting capability (preset editing) HD Radio™ digital broadcast reception capability • y indicates a tip for your operation. • Some operations can be performed by using either the buttons on the main unit or on the remote control. In cases when the button names differ between the main unit and the remote control, the button name on the remote control is given in parentheses. • This manual is printed prior to production. Design and specifications are subject to change in part as a result of improvements, etc. In case of differences between the manual and product, the product has priority. “i.LINK” and the “i.LINK” logo Corporation. Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Surround EX”, and the double-D symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories. “DTS”, “DTS-ES”, “Neo:6” and “DTS 96/24” are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc. “HDMI”, the “HDMI” logo and “High-Definition Multimedia Interface” are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC. HD Radio™ technology manufactured under license from iBiquity Digital Corporation. “iBiquity Digital” and the “HD Radio” and “HD” symbols are registered trademarks of iBiquity Digital Corporation. U.S. and Foreign Patents. 2 are trademarks of Sony “SILENT CINEMA” is a trademark of YAMAHA CORPORATION. Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity, TruBass, SRS and the symbol are trademarks of SRS Labs, Inc. Circle Surround , Dialog Clarity and TruBass technologies are incorporated under license from SRS Labs, Inc. The THX logo is a trademark of THX Ltd. which may be registered in some jurisdictions. All rights reserved. GETTING STARTED GETTING STARTED INTRODUCTION Supplied accessories Please check that you received all of the following parts. Remote control SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control POWER SELECT TUNER CD STANDBY CD-R AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT Batteries (4) (AAA, LR03) VCR 1 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 Batteries (2) (AAA, R03) DVD MUTE PRESET TOP TV DTV EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT + PURE DIRECT PRESET/CH VOLUME – NIGHT A/B/C/D/E AUDIO ENTER MUTE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN PRG SELECT DISPLAY DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Power cable AM loop antenna (U.S.A. model) Speaker terminal wrench AM loop antenna (Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea, Australia, U.K. and Europe models) Optimizer microphone Indoor FM antenna (U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models) 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Indoor FM antenna (Australia, U.K. and Europe models) 3 GETTING STARTED Installing batteries in the remote controls Notes on batteries • Change all of the batteries if you notice conditions such as the operation range of the remote control decreases, the indicator does not flash, or its light or display window become dim. • Do not use old batteries together with new ones. • Do not use different types of batteries (such as alkaline and manganese batteries) together. Read the packaging carefully as these different types of batteries may have the same shape and color. • If the batteries have leaked, dispose of them immediately. Avoid touching the leaked material or letting it come into contact with clothing, etc. Clean the battery compartment thoroughly before installing new batteries. • Do not throw away batteries with general house waste; dispose of them correctly in accordance with your local regulations. ■ Remote control ■ Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control 2 2 1 1 3 3 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert four supplied batteries (AAA, LR03) according to the polarity markings on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. When the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 1 Press the part and slide the battery compartment cover off. 2 Insert two supplied batteries (AAA, R03) according to the polarity markings (+ and –) on the inside of the battery compartment. 3 Slide the cover back until it snaps into place. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION Front panel 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 A B C D E PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 F OPTIMIZER MIC G H PHONES I 1 STANDBY/ON Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode. When you turn on the main unit, there will be a 6 to 7 second delay before the main unit can reproduce sound. Notes • In the standby mode, this unit consumes a small amount of power in order to receive infrared-signals from the remote control. • You can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode simultaneously using the remote control. For details, see page 85. 2 INPUT selector Selects the input source you want to listen to or watch. 3 AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack (AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on this unit (see page 40). 4 MULTI CH INPUT Selects the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. When selected, the MULTI CH INPUT source takes priority over the source selected with the INPUT selector (or the input selector buttons on the remote control). 5 A/B/C/D/E Selects one of the 5 preset station groups (A to E) when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 44). VIDEO/AUX J KL M N 6 PRESET/TUNING l / h Selects preset station number 1 to 8 when the unit is in the tuner mode and the colon (:) is displayed next to the band indication in the front panel display. Selects the tuning frequency when the unit is in the tuner mode and the colon (:) is not displayed. See pages 41 to 44 for details. 7 Front panel display Shows information about the operational status of this unit. 8 PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) Switches the function of PRESET/TUNING l / h between selecting preset station numbers and tuning when the unit is in the tuner mode (see pages 41 to 44). 9 FM/AM Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 41). 0 MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) Stores a station in the memory when the unit is in the tuner mode. Hold down this button for more than 3 seconds to start automatic preset tuning (see pages 42 to 43). A TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) Switches the tuning mode between automatic (“AUTO” indicator on) and manual (“AUTO” indicator off) when the unit is in the tuner mode. 5 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. C Remote control sensor Receives signals from the remote controls. D TONE CONTROL Use to adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels (see page 35). E PURE DIRECT Turns on or off the PURE DIRECT mode. Lights up when turned on (see page 38). F REC OUT/ZONE 2 Selects the source you want to direct to the audio/video recorder and ZONE 2 outputs independently of the source you are listening to or watching in the main room. When set to the SOURCE/REMOTE position, the input source is directed to all outputs. The source in Zone 2 and the source you record are always identical. L ZONE CONTROL Press to control the input or adjust the volume level for the currently selected zone (the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3) (see page 83). After you press ZONE CONTROL, the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes in the front panel display for approximately 5 seconds. While the indicator is flashing, perform the desired operation. M PROGRAM selector Use to select sound field programs or adjust bass/treble balance (in conjunction with TONE CONTROL). N VOLUME Controls the output level of all audio channels. This does not affect the REC OUT level. ■ Opening and closing the front panel door When you want to use the controls behind the front panel door, open the door by gently pressing on the lower part of the panel. Keep the door closed when not using these controls. G OPTIMIZER MIC jack Use to connect and input audio signals from the supplied microphone for use with the AUTO SETUP function (see page 27). H SPEAKERS A/B Turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel each time the corresponding button is pressed. I PHONES (SILENT CINEMA) jack Outputs audio signals for private listening with headphones. When you connect headphones, no signals are output at the PRE OUT jacks or to the speakers. All Dolby Digital and DTS audio signals are mixed down to the front left and right channels. J VIDEO AUX jacks Input audio and video signals from an external source such as a game console. To reproduce source signals at these jacks, select V-AUX as the input source. K ZONE ON/OFF MAIN Turns on the power of the main unit or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). ZONE 2 Turns on the power of Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). ZONE 3 Turns on the power of Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode (see page 83). 6 To open, press gently on the lower part of the panel. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Remote control 1 2 3 C SYSTEM POWER POWER STANDBY POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 4 SELECT AMP 5 6 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT AUDIO ENTER STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 9 0 STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 H I J 9 0 L M N O P MOVIE A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Q REC B OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 3 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to select the TUNER mode. 4 Display window Shows the name of the selected source component that you can control. 6 TOP, BAND Displays the top screen in the graphical user interface (GUI) menu on your video monitor when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Switches the reception band (FM or AM) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. 7 Cursor buttons k / n / l / h / ENTER Use to select and adjust DSP program parameters or GUI menu items when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Press l / h to select a preset station group (A to E) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. 8 RETURN Returns to the upper directory when in the front panel display menu mode. DISC SKIP A 2 Transmission indicator Flashes while the remote control is sending signals. 5 LIGHT button Press to light up remote control buttons and display window. K A/B/C/D/E 8 G TV NIGHT 7 D E F 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. R S t 9 Sound field program / numeric buttons Use to select sound field programs or input numbers when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. Use numbers 1 through 8 to select preset stations when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode. Use SELECT to play back 2-channel sources in multi-channel format (see page 37). Use EXTD SUR. to switch between 5.1 or 6.1/7.1 channel playback of multi-channel software (see page 36). 0 MEMORY 1/2 Use to recall favorite sound field programs, YPAO settings or additional preset stations (see page 69). A MACRO ON/OFF Turns the macro function on and off. 7 INTRODUCTION This section describes the function of each control on the remote control used to control this unit. To operate other components, see “REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES” on page 70. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to operate this unit. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS B MACRO Use to program a series of operations for control by a single button (see page 76). O DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. C STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. (U.S.A. model only) Toggles between HD Radio information displays when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). D SYSTEM POWER Turns on the power of this unit. E AUDIO SELECT Toggles the priority for the type of audio input jack (AUTO, i.LINK, HDMI, COAX/OPT, ANALOG) when one component is connected to two or more input jacks on this unit (see page 40). F SLEEP Sets the sleep timer. G MULTI CH IN Selects MULTI CH INPUT when using an external decoder (etc.). H SELECT k / n Selects another component that you can control independently of the input component selected with the input selector buttons. I VOL +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. J AMP/SOURCE/TV Selects the component you want to control with the remote control. AMP: Set to this position to operate this unit. SOURCE: Set to this position to operate the component selected with an input selector button. TV: Set to this position to operate the television. To set the remote control codes for components, see page 71. K MUTE Mutes the sound. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. L PURE DIRECT Turns on or off PURE DIRECT mode (see page 38). M EXIT, PRG SELECT Use to exit the graphical user interface (GUI) mode when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP. (U.S.A. model only) Selects the HD Radio audio program when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to SOURCE and the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). N NIGHT Turns on or off the night listening modes (see page 38). 8 P STRAIGHT/EFFECT Switches the sound fields off or on. When STRAIGHT is selected, input signals (2-channel or multi-channel) are output directly from their respective speakers without effect processing. Q SPEAKERS A/B Use to turn on or off the set of front speakers connected to the A and/or B terminals on the rear panel when AMP/SOURCE/TV is set to AMP, then the corresponding button is pressed each time. R RE-NAME Used to change the input source name in the display window (see page 75). S CLEAR Used to clear functions acquired when using the learn, macro and rename features, or setting remote control codes (see page 78). T LEARN Used to set up the remote control code or program functions from other remote controls (see page 73). CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control POWER TUNER CD DTV VCR 1 2 STANDBY CD-R 3 CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 4 DVD 5 + 6 VOLUME PRESET/CH 4 Input selector buttons Select the input source and change the control area. 5 PRESET/CH k / n Press k / n to select a preset station number (1 to 8) when the unit is in tuner mode. 6 VOLUME +/– Increases or decreases the volume level. 7 MUTE Mutes the sound. The MUTE indicator turns on when the MUTE function is on. Press again to restore the audio output to the previous volume level. 8 A/B/C/D/E Press repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) when the unit is in tuner mode. – A/B/C/D/E 7 8 9 0 A B MUTE PRG SELECT DISPLAY ZONE 2 ZONE 3 ID1 ID2 1 Infrared window Outputs infrared control signals. Aim this window at the component you want to operate. 2 POWER Turns on the power of this unit. 9 DISPLAY Use to enter into the front panel display menu mode. (U.S.A. model only) Toggles between HD Radio information displays when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). 0 PRG SELECT (U.S.A. model only) Selects the HD Radio audio program when the unit is in the tuner mode (see page 46). A ID1/ID2 Slide to set the remote control AMP/tuner ID for this unit (see page 72). B ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Slide to set the operation of this unit to Zone 2 or Zone 3 (see page 82). 3 STANDBY Sets this unit in the standby mode. Using the remote controls The remote controls transmit a directional infrared ray. Be sure to aim the remote controls directly at the remote control sensor on the main unit during operation. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 TUNER ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC Approximately 6 m (20 ft) PHONES VIDEO/AUX 30 30 SYSTEM POWER TV POWER STANDBY ■ Handling the remote controls • Do not spill water or other liquids on the remote controls. • Do not drop the remote controls. • Do not leave or store the remote controls in the following types of conditions: – places of high humidity, such as near a bath – places of high temperatures, such as near a heater or stove – extremely low temperatures – dusty places POWER POWER AV TUNER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP CD MULTI CH IN MD/TAPE CD-R DTV PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD VCR 1 CD CD-R STANDBY CBL/SAT MD/TAPE DVR/VCR2 DVD + PRESET/CH VOLUME – SELECT A/B/C/D/E MUTE PRG SELECT DISPLAY ID1 ID2 ZONE 2 ZONE 3 AMP + + + SOURCE TV VOL – CH VOL – – TV MUTE TV INPUT TV MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO 1 ENTERTAIN 0 4 SELECT 6 EXTD SUR. 7 MEMORY 2 9 MOVIE 3 STANDARD 5 1 MUSIC 2 THX 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME 9 INTRODUCTION This section describes the controls and functions of the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control. Use the Zone 2/Zone 3 remote control to control components connected to this unit in Zone 2 (the second room) or Zone 3 (the third room). 1 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Front panel display 1 2 3 MULTI CH 4 V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VIRTUAL 96 DISCRETE NIGHT 24 MATRIX STANDARD DIGITAL PL EX C CS PL PL x 5 6 VCR 1 SP AB CBL/SAT 7 DTV DVD MD/TAPE YPAO HiFi DSP SILENT CINEMA 90 CD-R CD TUNER B PHONO dB MUTE VOLUME ft mS dB D E F G HI J K L 2 HDMI indicator Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI connections. Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this unit is playing back audio signals input via connections other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via HDMI connections. Turns off when no HDMI component is connected. See page 96 for details. 3 NIGHT indicator Lights up when you select night listening mode. 4 VIRTUAL indicator Lights up when Virtual CINEMA DSP is active (see page 39). 5 Sound field indicators Light to indicate the active DSP sound fields. Presence DSP sound field Listening position Left surround DSP sound field A AUTO STEREO HD MEMORY TUNED THX PCM ZONE2 ZONE3 DSD SLEEP 1 i.LINK indicator Lights up when an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK connections. Flashes when an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections. Turns off when no i.LINK component is connected. See page 94 for details. Right surround DSP sound field Surround/surround back DSP sound field 6 Input source indicators A cursor lights to show the current input source. 7 CINEMA DSP indicator Lights up when you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. 10 8 M N O P 96/24 L C R LFE SL SB SR QRS t U 8 YPAO indicator Lights up during the auto setup procedure and when the auto setup speaker settings are used without any modifications. 9 AUTO indicator Lights up when this unit is in the automatic tuning mode. 0 STEREO indicator Lights up when this unit is receiving a stereo signal for an FM stereo broadcast while the AUTO indicator is lit. A HD Radio indicator (U.S.A. model only) Lights up when this unit is tuned into the HD Radio reception band. B VOLUME level indicator Indicates the volume level. C Decoder indicators When any of this unit’s decoders function, the respective indicator lights up. D DSD indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing DSD (direct stream digital) digital audio signals. E PCM indicator Lights up when this unit is reproducing PCM (pulse code modulation) digital audio signals. F SLEEP indicator Lights up while the sleep timer is on. G ZONE 2/ZONE 3 indicators Light up when Zone 2 or Zone 3 power is on. H THX indicator Lights up when a THX program is selected. I STANDARD indicator Lights up when a decoder is selected (see page 37). J Headphones indicator Lights up when headphones are connected. CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS INTRODUCTION K SP A B indicators Light up according to the set of front speakers selected. Both indicators light up when both sets of speakers are selected, or when bi-wiring. L SILENT CINEMA indicator Lights up when headphones are connected and a sound field program is selected (see page 36). M Multi-information display Shows the current sound field program name and other information when adjusting or changing settings. N HiFi DSP indicator Lights up when you select a HiFi DSP sound field program. O MEMORY indicator Flashes to show a station can be stored. P TUNED indicator Lights up when this unit is tuned into a station. Q MUTE indicator Flashes while the MUTE function is on. R 96/24 indicator Lights up when a DTS 96/24 signal is input to this unit. S LFE indicator Lights up when the input signal contains an LFE signal. T Input channel indicators Indicate the channel components of current digital input signal. U Presence and surround back speaker indicators Indicate the connection of presence and/or surround back speakers when using the Auto Setup setting (page 27) or Speaker Level setting (page 65). 11 CONTROLS AND FUNCTIONS Rear panel 1 2 3 4 5 VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL S VIDEO MD/TAPE AUDIO VIDEO 8 AUDIO L R 67 REMOTE L R 1 (PLAY) 0 A CONTROL OUT 2 1 2 AC IN IN (AUDIO) DVD TUNER IN OUT IN OUT +12V 15mA MAX. MD/TAPE CD-R FM ANT R DTV + – A – + – B – + – + L OUT S400 (REC) CD GND 75Ω UNBAL. RS-232C (PLAY) IN CBL/ SAT CENTER GND DVD 9 FRONT CD-R HDMI AM ANT IN + – + OUT (REC) VCR 1 DTV IN 1 CD OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT + – SURROUND L SURROUND DVR/VCR 2 L FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) DTV L R OUT SUBWOOFER CBL/ SAT – – + ZONE 3 OUTPUT SUBWOOFER L – L R MONITOR OUT + SINGLE (SB) MONITOR OUT DVR/VCR 2 + R ZONE 2 COAXIAL CENTER SURROUND OUT DVD R R IN 2 AC OUTLETS SWITCHED CLASS 2 WIRING L R IN CD SPEAKER IMPEDANCE FRONT PHONO DVD SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 CENTER MULTI CH INPUT DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) B C D E 1 DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks See page 22 for details. 2 i.LINK connectors See page 91 for connection information. 3 Antenna terminals See page 24 for connection information. 4 Video component jacks See pages 19 and 21 for connection information. 5 Audio component jacks See page 22 for connection information. 6 Speaker terminal wrench hook Use to store the speaker terminal wrench when not in use. 7 RS-232C terminal This is a control expansion terminal for factory use only. Consult you dealer for details. 8 REMOTE 1/2 IN/OUT jacks See page 82 for details. 9 CONTROL OUT jacks These are control expansion terminals for factory use only. 12 F G H 0 AC OUTLETS Use to supply power to your other A/V components (see page 25). A AC INLET Use this inlet to plug in the supplied power cable (see page 25). B DIGITAL INPUT jacks See pages 19, 21 and 22 for details. C HDMI IN/OUT connectors See page 95 for connection information. D ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks See page 82 for details. E MULTI CH INPUT jacks See page 20 for connection information. F PRE OUT jacks See page 23 for connection information. G Speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. H PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals See page 15 for connection information. SPEAKER SETUP + SPEAKER SETUP Surround speakers (SR and SL) Speaker placement ITU-R* The speaker layout below shows the standard speaker setting. You can use it to enjoy CINEMA DSP, multi-channel audio sources and THX. The surround speakers are used for effect and surround sounds. Place these speakers behind your listening position, facing slightly inwards, about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Surround back speakers (SBR and SBL) * ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). PR C FR FL 30˚ Subwoofer SL SR 60˚ SL 80˚ SBL SR SBR More than 30 cm (12 in) The use of a subwoofer, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, is effective not only for reinforcing bass frequencies from any or all channels, but also for high fidelity reproduction of the LFE (lowfrequency effect) channel included in Dolby Digital and DTS software. The position of the subwoofer is not so critical, because low bass sounds are not highly directional. But it is better to place the subwoofer near the front speakers. Turn it slightly toward the center of the room to reduce wall reflections. Presence speakers (PR and PL) 1.8 m (6 ft) 1.8 m (6 ft) Presence speakers supplement the sound from the front speakers with extra ambient effects produced by CINEMA DSP (see page 48). These effects include sounds that filmmakers intend to locate a little farther back behind the screen in order to create more theater-like ambience. Place these speakers at the front of the room about 0.5 – 1 m (1 – 3 ft) outside the front speakers, facing slightly inwards, and about 1.8 m (6 ft) above the floor. Note Front speakers (FR and FL) The front speakers are used for the main source sound plus effect sounds. Place these speakers an equal distance from the ideal listening position. The distance of each speaker from each side of the video monitor should be the same. Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61). Center speaker (C) The center speaker is for the center channel sounds (dialog, vocals, etc.). If for some reason it is not practical to use a center speaker, you can do without it. Best results, however, are obtained with the full system. Align the front face of the center speaker with the front face of your video monitor. Place the speaker centrally between the front speakers and as close to the monitor as possible, such as directly over or under it. 13 PREPARATION PL The surround back speakers supplement the surround speakers and provide for more realistic front-to-back transitions. Place these speakers directly behind the listening position and at the same height as the surround speakers. They should be positioned at least 30 cm (12 in) apart. Ideally, they should be positioned at the same width as the front speakers. SPEAKER SETUP ■ Di-pole speaker layout Either di-pole or direct radiating speaker types can be used for THX surround. If you choose di-pole speakers, please place the surround and surround back speakers according to the speaker layout below. FL FR C SL SR 30˚ 30˚ SBL SBR : Di-pole speaker : Direction of di-pole speaker 14 SPEAKER SETUP Speaker connections 5 Be sure to connect the left channel (L), right channel (R), “+” (red) and “–” (black) properly. If the connections are faulty, no sound will be heard from the speakers, and if the polarity of the speaker connections is incorrect, the sound will be unnatural and lack bass. Tighten the knob to secure the wire. Speaker terminal wrench 5 4 3 CAUTION • If you will use 6 ohm speakers, be sure to set this unit’s speaker impedance setting to 6 ohms before using (see page 26). If you will use 8 ohm speakers, use this unit’s initial setting for speaker impedance. • Before connecting the speakers, make sure that this unit is disconnected from the power source. • Do not let the bare speaker wires touch each other or do not let them touch any metal part of this unit. This could damage this unit and/or speakers. • Use magnetically shielded speakers. If this type of speaker still creates interference with the monitor, place the speakers away from the monitor. ■ Connecting to PRESENCE/ZONE 2 or PRESENCE speaker terminals A speaker cord is actually a pair of insulated cables running side by side. One cable is colored or shaped differently, perhaps with a stripe, groove or ridges. Connect the striped (grooved, etc.) cable to the “+” (red) terminals on this unit and your speaker. Connect the plain cable to the “–” (black) terminals. 1 Open the tab. 2 Insert one bare wire into the hole of each terminal. 3 Return the tab to secure the wire. 1 2 1 Remove approximately 10 mm (3/8 in) of insulation from each of the speaker cables. 2 Twist the exposed wires of the cable together to prevent short circuits. 3 Loosen the knob. The supplied speaker terminal wrench is useful for loosening or tightening knobs. 4 1 PREPARATION 10 mm (3/8 in) Red: positive (+) Black: negative (–) 3 2 ■ Banana plug connections (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) First, tighten the knob and then insert the banana plug connector into the end of the corresponding terminal. Banana plug Insert one bare wire into the hole in the side of each terminal. (With the exception of U.K., Europe and Asia models) y You can also use banana plugs with the PRESENCE/ZONE 2 and PRESENCE speaker terminals. Open the tab, then insert one banana plug connector into the hole of each terminal. Do not attempt to close the tabs after connecting the banana plugs. 15 SPEAKER SETUP 9 10 4 2 1 7 3 8 6 5 Front speakers (A) Right Left Speaker layout Subwoofer with built-in amplifier Center speaker 1 2 R 3 + – A – + – B – + – + Front speakers (B) 4 L CENTER FRONT + – + SPEAKER IMPEDANCE FRONT CLASS 2 WIRING L R R + – SURROUND L SURROUND L R L R SUBWOOFER CENTER + R + – – + L SINGLE (SB) – L R SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE SURROUND BACK PRE OUT SPEAKERS SINGLE PRESENCE/ZONE 2 (U.S.A. model) 7 8 Right Left Surround speakers 5 6 Right Left Surround back speakers 9 10 Right Left Presence speakers • You can connect both surround back and presence speakers to this unit, but they do not output sound simultaneously.You can set to prioritize either set of speakers in the Sound menu (see page 61). • The surround back speakers output the surround back channel included in Dolby Digital EX and DTS-ES software and only operate when the Dolby Digital EX, DTS-ES or Dolby Pro Logic x decoder is turned on. • The presence speakers output ambient effects created by the DSP sound fields. They do not output sound when other sound fields are selected. 16 SPEAKER SETUP ■ FRONT terminals Connect one or two speaker systems to these terminals. If you use only one speaker system, connect it to either of the FRONT A or B terminals. Note The Canada model cannot output to two separate speaker systems simultaneously. PREPARATION Bi-wired connection The unit also allows you to make bi-wired connections to one speaker system. Use two pairs of speaker cables for each speaker (one pair for the woofer and one pair for the tweeter/mid-range). To use the bi-wired connections, press SPEAKERS A and SPEAKERS B on the front panel so that both SP A and B light up on the front panel display. Bi-wired connection + – A – + FRONT + – B – + R L This unit ■ CENTER terminals Connect a center speaker to these terminals. ■ SURROUND terminals Connect surround speakers to these terminals. ■ SUBWOOFER jack Connect a subwoofer with a built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. ■ SURROUND BACK terminals Connect surround back speakers to these terminals. If you only connect one surround back speaker, connect it to the left (L) terminals. ■ PRESENCE terminals Connect presence speakers to these terminals. Note You can also use these terminals to connect Zone 2 speakers (see page 83). 17 CONNECTIONS CONNECTIONS Before connecting components CAUTION Do not connect this unit or other components to the mains power until all connections between components are complete. ■ Cable indications ■ Video jacks This unit has three types of video jacks. Connection depends on the availability of input jacks on your monitor. The signals input at the S VIDEO jacks on this unit are automatically converted for output at the VIDEO jacks. When “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 66), signals input at the VIDEO jacks can be output at the S VIDEO and COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. Likewise, signals input at the S VIDEO jacks can also be output at the COMPONENT VIDEO jacks. For analog signals left analog cables L right analog cables R For digital signals optical cables O coaxial cables C For video signals video cables V S-video cables S V V ■ Analog jacks V You can input analog signals from audio components by connecting audio pin cables to the analog jacks on this unit. Connect red plugs to the right jacks and white plugs to the left jacks. ■ Digital jacks This unit has digital jacks for direct transmission of digital signals through either coaxial or fiber optic cables. You can use the digital jacks to input PCM, Dolby Digital and DTS bitstreams. When you connect components to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. All digital input jacks are compatible with 96-kHz sampling digital signals. S VIDEO VIDEO COMPONENT VIDEO PR PB Y VIDEO jack For conventional composite video signals. S VIDEO jack For S-video signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color (C) video signals to achieve high-quality color reproduction. COMPONENT VIDEO jacks For component signals, separated into luminance (Y) and color difference (PB, PR) to provide the best quality in picture reproduction. Signal flow inside this unit Input Output (MONITOR OUT) COMPONENT VIDEO S VIDEO VIDEO Only when “Video Conv.” is set to “On” (see page 66) Note Note This unit handles digital and analog signals independently. Thus audio signals input at the analog jacks are only output at the analog OUT (REC) jacks. Likewise audio signals input at the digital (OPTICAL or COAXIAL) jacks are only output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jacks. 18 When signals are input at both the S VIDEO and VIDEO jacks, signals input at the S VIDEO jack have priority. CONNECTIONS Connecting video components ■ Connections for DVD playback Coaxial out Audio out Optical out Video out R O VIDEO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL S VIDEO PREPARATION C DVD player L AUDIO VIDEO R L DVD Video monitor DVD Video in COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR DVD DVD MONITOR OUT MONITOR OUT COAXIAL OUTPUT DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) 19 CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks This unit is equipped with 6 additional input jacks (left and right FRONT, CENTER, left and right SURROUND and SUBWOOFER) for discrete multi-channel input from a multi-format player, external decoder, sound processor or pre-amplifier. If you set Multi CH Assign: Input Channels to 8ch (see page 57), you can use input jacks assigned as Multi CH Assign: Front Input (page 57) together with the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to input 8 channels. Connect the output jacks on your multi-format player or external decoder to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. Be sure to match the left and right outputs to the left and right input jacks for the front and surround channels. For 6-channel input For 8-channel input FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) FRONT(6CH)/SB(8CH) AUDIO R AUDIO L R L (PLAY) IN DVD SURROUND SURROUND MD/TAPE DTV OUT (REC) (PLAY) SUBWOOFER CENTER SUBWOOFER CENTER MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH INPUT CBL/ SAT IN CD-R IN OUT (REC) R L Subwoofer out R L R L VCR 1 R L OUT Center out Center out Multi-format player/ Front External decoder Surround out out Subwoofer out CD IN DVR/VCR 2 Surround back out Multi-format player/ Surround out R External decoder L Front out Notes • When you select MULTI CH INPUT as the input source, this unit automatically turns off the digital sound field processor, and you cannot select sound field programs. • This unit does not redirect signals input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks to accommodate for missing speakers. We recommend that you connect at least a 5.1-channel speaker system before using this feature. • When headphones are used, only front L/R channels are output. 20 CONNECTIONS ■ Connections for other video components Optical out Audio out Cable TV or satellite tuner Video out O VIDEO S VIDEO L R L AUDIO VIDEO R L PREPARATION DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R CBL/ SAT IN VCR 1 OUT COMPONENT VIDEO Y PB PR CBL/SAT DTV CBL/ SAT DVR/VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R C Audio in Video in Video out L DVD recorder or VCR Audio out Coaxial out ■ VIDEO AUX jacks (on the front panel) Use these jacks to connect any video source, such as a game console or video camera, to this unit. S VIDEO VIDEO S V L AUDIO R OPTICAL R O VIDEO/AUX L Optical out Audio out R Audio out L Video out Game console or video camera S-video out 21 CONNECTIONS Connecting audio components ■ Connections for audio components O Optical in Optical in MD recorder or tape deck CD recorder Audio in O Audio out R L R Audio out L Audio in R L R L AUDIO DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL R MD/TAPE L (PLAY) IN MD/TAPE CD-R OUT (REC) GND CD (PLAY) IN CD-R OUT (REC) CD PHONO CD COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT (U.S.A. model) R L R L Audio out Optical out Audio out O Coaxial out CD player GND C Turntable ■ Connecting a turntable PHONO jacks are for connecting a turntable with an MM or high-output MC cartridge. If you have a turntable with a low-output MC cartridge, use an in-line boosting transformer or MC-head amplifier when connecting to these jacks. 22 y Connect your turntable to the GND terminal to reduce noise in the signal. However you may hear less noise without the connection to the GND terminal for some record players. CONNECTIONS ■ Connecting to an external amplifier If you want to increase the power output to the speakers, or want to use another amplifier, connect an external amplifier to the PRE OUT jacks as follows. Notes If you have a component with an i.LINK connector, you can enjoy digital audio from CD, DVD, Super Audio CD and DVD-A discs. For details on i.LINK, see “USING i.LINK” on page 91. DIGITAL OUTPUT OPTICAL i.LINK component (AUDIO) S400 Note An i.LINK cable shorter than 3.5 m is recommended. 1 2 ■ Connecting HDMI components FRONT L R SURROUND L R SUBWOOFER CENTER 5 3 4 SINGLE (SB) L R SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT 1 FRONT PRE OUT jacks Front channel line output jacks. 2 SURROUND PRE OUT jacks Surround channel line output jacks. 3 SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack Connect a subwoofer with built-in amplifier, such as the YAMAHA Active Servo Processing Subwoofer System, to this jack. This unit has the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks for signal input as well as the HDMI OUT jack for signal output. Connect the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit to the HDMI OUT jack of other HDMI-compatible components (such as a DVD player). Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN jack of other HDMI-compatible components (such as TV and a projector). For details on HDMI, see “USING HDMI” on page 95. HDMI DVD Player IN 1 HDMI OUT DVD Player IN 2 D HDMI OUT Video monitor Notes • Each PRE OUT jack outputs the same channel signal as the corresponding speaker terminals. However, when both surround back and presence speakers are setup in this unit, the signals output at SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks may not correspond to the correct speakers. • Adjust the volume level of the subwoofer with the control on the subwoofer. • Some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER PRE OUT jack depending on the Speaker Set settings (see page 62). C S OUT 4 SURROUND BACK/PRESENCE PRE OUT jacks Surround back or presence channel line output jacks. If you only connect one external amplifier for the surround back channel, connect it to the left (L) jack. 5 CENTER PRE OUT jack Center channel line output jack. CBL/SAT HDMI IN DVR/VCR 2 COAXIAL DIGITAL INPUT Note An HDMI cable shorter than 5 m with the HDMI logo printed on it is recommended. 23 PREPARATION • When audio pin plugs are connected to the PRE OUT jacks for output to an external amplifier, it is not necessary to use the corresponding SPEAKERS terminals. Set the volume of the external amplifier connected to this unit to the maximum. • The signal output at the FRONT PRE OUT and CENTER PRE OUT jacks are affected by the TONE CONTROL settings. • If SPEAKERS A is turned off and Multi Zone: Speaker B is set to “Zone B” (see page 67), signals will only be output at the FRONT PRE OUT jacks. ■ Connecting i.LINK components CONNECTIONS Connecting the antennas Both AM and FM indoor antennas are included with this unit. In general, these antennas should provide sufficient signal strength. Connect each antenna correctly to the designated terminals. Indoor FM antenna (included) 3 Orient the AM loop antenna for the best reception. AM loop antenna (included) Notes TUNER FM ANT 75Ω UNBAL. GND AM ANT (U.S.A. model) • The AM loop antenna should be placed away from this unit. • The AM loop antenna should always be connected, even if an outdoor AM antenna is connected to this unit. • A property installed outdoor antenna provides clearer reception than an indoor one. If you experience poor reception quality, an outdoor antenna may improve the quality. Consult the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center about outdoor antennas. ■ 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter (U.K. model only) Ground (GND terminal) For maximum safety and minimum interference, connect the antenna GND terminal to a good earth ground. A good earth ground is a metal stake driven into moist earth. ■ Connecting the AM loop antenna 1 1 Open the cover of the included 75-ohm/300-ohm antenna adapter. 2 Cut the external sleeve of the 75-ohm coaxial cable and prepare it for connection. Set up the AM loop antenna. 3 4 2 24 11 (7/16) 8 (5/16) 6 (1/14) Cut the lead wire and remove it. Insert the cable wire into the slot, and clamp it with pliers. Lead wire Clamp Insert the wire into the slot Press and hold the tab to insert the AM loop antenna lead wires into the AM ANT and GND terminals. 5 Unit: mm (in) Snap the cover into place. Clamp CONNECTIONS Connecting the power cable ■ Connecting the AC power cable AC IN Plug the power cable into the AC inlet after all other connections are complete, then plug the power cable to an AC wall outlet. CAUTION AC OUTLETS Do not use other AC power cables. Use the provided cable. Use of other power cables may result in fire hazard or electrical shock. SWITCHED (U.S.A. model) VOLTAGE SELECTOR U.K. and Australia models ..................................... 1 outlet Korea model ............................................................... None Other models ......................................................... 2 outlets Use these outlets to connect the power cables from your other components to this unit. Power to the AC OUTLET(S) is controlled by this unit’s STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY). These outlets will supply power to any connected component whenever this unit is turned on. The maximum power (total power consumption of components) that can be connected to the AC OUTLET(S) is: Asia and General models .......................................... 50 W Other models ...........................................................100 W ■ VOLTAGE SELECTOR (Asia and General models only) VOLTAGE SELECTOR The VOLTAGE SELECTOR on the rear panel of this unit must be set for your local main voltage BEFORE plugging into the AC main supply. Voltages are: General model .......AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz Asia model ...........................AC 220/230–240V, 50/60 Hz ■ Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is in the standby mode. However if the power cable is disconnected from the AC wall outlet, or the power supply is cut for more than one week, the stored data will be lost. (Asia and General models) 25 PREPARATION ■ AC OUTLET(S) (SWITCHED) CONNECTIONS Speaker impedance setting Follow the procedure below to change the impedance setting for all speakers. Turning on the power When all connections are complete, turn on the power of this unit. 1 CAUTION If you are using 6 ohm speakers, set the impedance to 6 ohms before using this unit. PURE DIRECT Be sure this unit is in the standby mode. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT 1 MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. “SP IMP.–8ΩMIN” appears on the front panel display. DVD DTV CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX SYSTEM STRAIGHT POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY /ON EFFECT STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 1 SELECT SP IMP.-8 MIN 2 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to select the impedance of your speakers. If you are using 6 ohm speakers, select 6 ohms; if you are using 8 ohm speakers, select 8 ohms. AMP + 1 + + Press STANDBY/ON (or SYSTEM POWER on the remote controls) to turn on the power of this unit. SYSTEM POWER 3 STANDBY /ON Press STANDBY/ON to exit the setting. This unit will be set to the standby mode. Front panel or Remote control Note Speaker impedance setting function is located in the Advanced menu (see page 86). 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. Note Press STANDBY/ON again (or STANDBY on the remote control) to enter the standby mode. 26 AUTO SETUP AUTO SETUP Introduction 1 Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E FM/AM Notes CBL/SAT VCR 1 TUNER MEMORY ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL PREPARATION This receiver employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology which lets you avoid troublesome listening-based speaker setup and achieves highly accurate sound adjustments. The supplied optimizer microphone collects and analyzes the sound your speakers produce in your actual listening environment. Optimizer microphone setup EFFECT ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 • Please be advised that it is normal for loud test tones to be output during the auto setup procedure. • If auto setup stops and error messages appear on the screen, follow the troubleshooting on page 31. YPAO performs the following checks and makes appropriate adjustments to give you the best possible sound from your system. Wiring Checks which speakers are connected and the polarity of each speaker. Distance Checks the distance of each speaker from the listening position and adjusts the timing of each channel. Size Checks the speaker’s frequency response and sets the appropriate low frequency crossover for each channel. Equalizing Adjusts frequency and levels of each channel’s parametric equalizer to reduce coloration across the channels and create a cohesive sound field. This is particularly important if you use different brands or sizes of speakers for some channels or have a room with unique sonic characteristics. YPAO equalizing calibration incorporates three parameters (frequency, level and Q factor) for each of the seven bands in its parametric equalizer to provide highly precise automatic adjustment of frequency characteristics. REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX Notes • After you have completed the auto setup procedure, be sure to disconnect the optimizer microphone. • The optimizer microphone is sensitive to heat. – Keep it away from direct sunlight. – Do not place it on top of this unit. 2 Place the optimizer microphone on a flat level surface with the omni-directional microphone head upward, at your normal listening position. If possible, use a tripod (etc.) to affix the optimizer mic at the same height as your ears would be when you are seated in your listening position. Optimizer microphone position Level Checks and adjusts the sound level (volume) of each speaker. 27 AUTO SETUP Starting the setup 4 For best results, make sure the room is as quiet as possible during the auto setup procedure (YPAO). If there is too much ambient noise, the results may not be satisfactory. Press k / n repeatedly to select Setup Menu, then press h. y Information If your subwoofer has adjustable volume and crossover/high cut frequency controls, set the volume between 9 and 11 o’clock (as viewed on a conventional clockface) and set the crossover/high cut frequency to the maximum. Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size CROSSOVER/ HIGH CUT VOLUME 5 MIN MAX MIN MAX Press k / n repeatedly to select Wiring, Distance, Size, Equalizing or Level, then press h. Subwoofer 1 2 Wiring Switch on this unit and video monitor. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. Skip Wiring Skip Check Distance Check Distance Size Size Equalizing Wiring Distance Distance Skip Size Skip Size Check Equalizing Check: Natural Level Check: Flat Equalizing Check: Front Level AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Size TV Equalizing Skip Level Check y Stereo/Surround Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option Equalizing is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). 6 For Wiring, Distance, Size or Level, select: System Memory Check Skip 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select Auto Setup, then press h. PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E A/B/C/D/E Input Select 28 Manual Setup Information Auto Setup Setup Menu System Memory Setup Type Audio Info. Start y When using THX speakers, select “Skip” for Size and make sure that “Small” or “Small x2” is selected in Speaker Set (page 62) and that “80Hz” is selected in Bass Cross Over (page 63). PRESET ENTER To automatically check and adjust the selected item. To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. AUTO SETUP For Equalizing, press k / n to select: Skip 9 Press n to select Start, then press ENTER. Loud test tones are output from each speaker and “Measuring” appears during the auto setup procedure. Setup Menu Setup Type Start Start:ENTER y 7 Once you have selected the desired setting, press l to move back to Setup Menu. Information 8 Setup Menu Wiring Setup Type Distance Start Size • To stop the auto setup procedure, press one of the cursor buttons (k / n / l / h) or ENTER. In the pause mode, press k to retry the procedure, l to cancel auto setup. • If an error message appears during testing, refer to “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31, and after carrying out the remedy, retry the auto setup procedure. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). Press n to select Setup Type, then select: Auto To automatically perform the entire auto setup procedure. To pause for confirmation between each check in the auto setup procedure. Step Information Setup Menu Setup Type Auto Start Step y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 87). 29 PREPARATION To skip the selected item and perform no adjustments. Check: Natural To average out the frequency response of all speakers with higher frequencies being less emphasized. Recommended if the “Flat” setting sounds a little harsh. Check: Flat To average the frequency response of all speakers. Recommended if all of your speakers are of similar quality. Check: Front To adjust the frequency response of each speaker in accordance with the sound of your front speakers. Recommended if your front speakers are of much higher quality than your other speakers. AUTO SETUP Confirming the results If you set Setup Type to “Step” The results are displayed individually after each analysis. You can confirm the results of each analysis. Distance If you set Setup Type to “Auto” Size The results are displayed after all items have been analyzed. Equalizing Exit Retry Detail Next Level Result Setup Menu Setup Type Start Retry Exit Detail Setup • Press n and select Next to start measurement of the next menu item. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. Measurement Over Successfully • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. After all menu items have been measured, “Measurement Over” appears on the screen and the results for each item are displayed. • Press n and select Setup to set the measured values. • Press k and select Retry to retry the auto setup procedure. • Press h and select Detail to view information about measurement results and warning messages. For more details about warning messages, see “Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure” on page 31. • Press l and select Exit to exit from the auto setup procedure. If you select Exit, “Don’t Setup?” appears on the screen. To set the measured values and exit, select Yes. To cancel the settings and exit, select No. y If you want to make more detailed settings, change the system parameters using the Manual Setup menu. If you want to return to the Auto Setup settings after making settings in the Manual Setup menu, navigate to the Information screen in the Auto Setup menu, press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust, then press ENTER. Notes • If you change speakers, speaker positions, or the layout of your listening environment, perform auto setup again to re-calibrate your system. • Depending on your listening environment, SubWfr:REV may appear in the Wiring results. In this case, SWFR Phase in the Manual Setup menu (see page 64) is automatically set to Reverse. To select the desired setting, change the SWFR Phase parameter in the Manual Setup menu. • In the Distance results, the distance displayed may be longer than the actual distance depending on the characteristics of your subwoofer. This may also be the case when using an external amplifier. • In the Equalizing results, different values may be set for the same band to provide finer adjustments. 30 AUTO SETUP ■ Troubleshooting for the auto setup procedure Before auto setup Error message Cause Remedy Connect MIC! Optimizer microphone is not connected. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. Unplug Phones! Headphones are connected. • Unplug the headphones. No Setup Menu! No setup menu items have been selected. • Select at least one setup menu item. Memory Guard! This setting is protected. • Remove the protection setting for auto setup (see page 68). Error message Cause Remedy E01:No Front SP Front L/R channel signal(s) is (are) not detected. • Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). • Check the front L/R speaker connections. E02:No Sur. SP Only one surround channel signal is detected. • Check the surround speaker connections. E03:No Pres. SP Only one presence channel signal is detected. • Check the presence speaker connections. E04:SBR ->SBL Only the surround back right channel signal is detected. • Connect the surround back speaker to the LEFT SURROUND BACK SPEAKERS terminal if you only have one surround back speaker. E05:Noisy Background noise is too loud. • Try auto setup in a quiet environment. • Turn off noisy electric equipment like air conditioners, or move them away from this unit. E06:Check Sur. Surround back speaker(s) is (are) connected, though surround L/R speakers are not. • Connect surround speakers when using (a) surround back speaker(s). E07:No MIC The optimizer microphone was unplugged during the auto setup procedure. • Connect the supplied optimizer microphone to the OPTIMIZER MIC jack on the front panel. E08:No Signal The optimizer microphone does not detect test tones. • Check the microphone setting. • Check the speaker connections and placement. E09:User Cancel The auto setup procedure was cancelled because a setting that affects auto setup (such as changing speaker settings, etc.) was changed during the procedure. • Perform the auto setup procedure again. E10:Internal Err An internal error occurred. • Restart this unit, then try the auto setup procedure again. 31 PREPARATION During auto setup Press l / h to display detailed information for individual errors. Select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. AUTO SETUP After auto setup The following warning messages are displayed after analysis is complete to inform you of possible problems. We recommend that you check the contents of each message, then select Retry to try the auto setup procedure again. Warning message Cause Remedy W1:Out of Phase Speaker polarity is incorrect. This message may appear depending on the speakers even when they are connected correctly. • Check the speaker connections. W2:Over Distance The distance between the speaker and the listening position is over 24 m (80 ft). • Bring the speaker closer to the listening position. W3:Level Error The difference in volume level between the speakers is excessive. (No level correction is made.) • • • • W4:SP Mismatch The speaker settings differ from the measurement results of wiring (only occurs when the wiring measurement procedure is skipped). • Check the speaker connections. 32 Readjust the speaker installation. Check the speaker connections. Use speakers of similar quality. Adjust the output volume of the subwoofer. PLAYBACK PLAYBACK Basic operations 3 Press SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or press SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). Each press turns the respective speakers on or off. PURE DIRECT SPEAKERS MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT A TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE A SPEAKERS B +10 or VOLUME AUDIO SELECT ENT. B EFFECT INPUT VCR 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM TUNER CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV A B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R VIDEO AUDIO Front panel OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES Remote control VIDEO/AUX When bi-wiring, select both A and B. 1 4 7 3 1 SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER U U TOP PRESET 4 6 U EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT Select the input source. Use the INPUT selector (or press one of the input selector buttons on the remote control) to select the input you desire. B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R AUDIO ENTER PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX DTV CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD BASIC OPERATION NIGHT A PHONO INPUT A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN 4 or EFFECT DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 DVD THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 SELECT 6 DISPLAY STEREO AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP PRESET EXIT 1 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. 7 3 Front panel REC Remote control DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO TV LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME The current input source name appears in the front panel display and video monitor for a few seconds. PURE DIRECT V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A 1 dB VOLUME DVD Press STANDBY/ON (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press SYSTEM POWER on the remote control) to turn on the power. L R Selected input source 5 Start playback or select a broadcast station on the source component. Refer to the operation instructions for the component. See page 41 for details about tuning instructions. 6 Adjust the volume to the desired output level. STANDBY /ON Front panel or AMP SYSTEM POWER SOURCE VOLUME + TV or Remote control 2 Turn on the video monitor connected to this unit. VOL – Front panel Remote control 33 PLAYBACK 7 Select a sound field program if desired. Use PROGRAM (or press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly) to select a sound field program. See page 48 for details about sound field programs. Selecting sound field programs ■ Front panel operation PURE DIRECT PROGRAM STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 VOLUME or AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD REC OUT/ZONE 2 Front panel ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX Remote control PROGRAM Note When this unit detects Dolby Digital signals, the following display appears for a few seconds. This shows how the signal level is being corrected to become –27 dB (THX recommendation).3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. PROGRAM DialNorm;;+4dB V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER Hall in Munich Program name 34 PHONO HiFi DSP dB VOLUME L R PLAYBACK ■ Remote control operation Additional operations AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE ■ To adjust the tone AMP/SOURCE/TV SOURCE TV PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MOVIE Sound field program buttons PROGRAM A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press one of the sound field program buttons repeatedly to select the desired program. The name of the selected program appears in the front panel display and video monitor. AMP SOURCE V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 DVD MD/TAPE MOVIE Notes A SPEAKERS B +10 CD-R ENT. CD TUNER PHONO HiFi DSP Hall in Munich dB VOLUME L R Program name y Choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not on the name of the program. Notes • When you select an input source, this unit automatically selects the last sound field program used with that source. • Sound field programs cannot be selected when the MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If you increase or decrease the high-frequency or the low-frequency sound to an extreme level, the tonal quality of the surround speakers may not match that of the front left/right and center speakers. • TONE CONTROL is not effective when THX (page 48) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected, or when MULTI CH INPUT is selected. • If headphones are connected to this unit, the Tone Control setting adjusts the bass/treble balance of your headphones (see page 60). ■ To mute the sound Press MUTE on the remote control. The MUTE indicator flashes on the front panel display. To resume the audio output, press MUTE again (or press VOL –/+). The MUTE indicator disappears from the display. MUTE y You can adjust the muting level (see page 60). 35 BASIC OPERATION TV You can adjust the bass/treble balance for the front left/right and center channels. Press TONE CONTROL repeatedly on the front panel to select TREBLE or BASS. Select TREBLE, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the highfrequency response. Select BASS, then rotate PROGRAM to the right or left to increase or decrease the low-frequency response. To cancel the tone control, press TONE CONTROL repeatedly to select BYPASS. TONE CONTROL PURE DIRECT MENU PLAYBACK ■ To listen with headphones (“SILENT CINEMA”) ■ Enjoying multi-channel software in 6.1/7.1 channel surround “SILENT CINEMA” allows you to enjoy multi-channel music or movie sound, including Dolby Digital and DTS surround, through ordinary headphones. “SILENT CINEMA” activates automatically whenever you connect headphones to the PHONES jack while listening to CINEMA DSP or HiFi DSP sound field programs. When activated, the “SILENT CINEMA” indicator lights up in the front panel display. If you connected one or two surround back speakers, use this feature to enjoy 6.1/7.1-channel playback for multi-channel sources using the Dolby Pro Logic x, Dolby Digital EX or DTS-ES decoders. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press EXTD SUR. on the remote control to switch between 5.1 and 6.1/7.1 channel playback. EXTD SUR. Notes 8 • This unit will not be set to “SILENT CINEMA” when MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. • “SILENT CINEMA” is not effective when PURE DIRECT or a 2ch Stereo program is selected, or in STRAIGHT mode. ■ Selecting the MULTI CH INPUT Press MULTI CH INPUT so that “MULTI CH INPUT” appears in the front panel display and video monitor. MULTI CH INPUT MULTI CH IN or Front panel Remote control Note When “MULTI CH INPUT” is shown on the front panel display and/or the video monitor, no other source can be played. To select another input source with the INPUT selector on the front panel (or one of the input selector buttons on the remote control), press MULTI CH INPUT to turn off “MULTI CH INPUT” from the front panel display and the video monitor. To select a decoder, press l / h repeatedly when PL xMovie (etc.) is displayed. Auto (AUTO) When a signal (flag) that can be recognized by the unit is input, the unit selects the optimum decoder for playing back the signal in 6.1/7.1 channels. If the unit cannot recognize the flag or no flag is present in the input signal, it cannot automatically be played in 6.1/7.1 channels. Decoders (select with l / h) You can select from the following modes depending on the format of the software you are playing. PLIIxMovie For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x movie decoder. PLIIxMusic For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Pro Logic x music decoder. EX/ES For playing back Dolby Digital signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. DTS signals are played back in 6.1/7.1 channels using the DTS-ES decoder. EX For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 6.1/7.1 channels using the Dolby Digital EX decoder. Off (OFF) For playing back Dolby Digital or DTS signals in 5.1 channels. y When Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63), the surround back channel will output from the left SURROUND BACK speaker terminals. 36 PLAYBACK When you select the SUR. STANDARD program Notes • Some 6.1-channel compatible discs do not have a signal (flag) which this unit can automatically detect. When playing these kinds of discs with 6.1-channel, select decoders (PL xMovie, PL xMusic, EX/ES or EX) manually. • 6.1/7.1-channel playback is not possible even if EXTD SUR. is pressed in the following cases: – When Surround or Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). – When the source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jack is being played. – When the source being played does not contain surround L/R channel signals. – When a Dolby Digital KARAOKE source is being played. – When 2ch Stereo, 7ch Stereo or PURE DIRECT is selected. • When the power of this unit is turned off, the input mode will be reset to AUTO. • The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). • “PL xMovie” cannot be selected when Surround Back is set to “Large x1” or “Small x1” (see page 63). Signals input from 2-channel sources can also be played back on multiple channels. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STANDARD on the remote control to switch between the SUR. STANDARD and SUR. ENHANCED programs. 6 Or press MOVIE or THX on the remote control to select the MOVIE THEATER or THX programs. THX 4 or <PLIIx Music> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. <PLIIx Game> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. <Neo:6 Music> DTS processing for music software. <CS II Cinema>* SRS Circle Surround processing for movie software. <CS II Music>* SRS Circle Surround processing for music software. * (U.S.A. model only) When you select the SUR. ENHANCED, MOVIE THEATER or THX programs <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. STANDARD MOVIE <PLIIx Movie> Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. 5 Press SELECT on the remote control to select the decoder. SELECT 7 <Neo:6 Cinema> DTS processing for movie software. y • You can also select a decoder with the Decode Type parameter in the Stereo/Surround menu (see page 99). • You can also select a decoder by pressing l / h on the remote control when the decoder type is displayed in the short message display. Note The Pro Logic x decoder is not available when Surround Back is set to “None” (see page 63). You can select from the following modes depending on the type of software you are playing and your personal preference. 37 BASIC OPERATION ■ Enjoying 2-channel software in surround <PRO LOGIC> Dolby Pro Logic processing for any sources. PLAYBACK ■ Listening to high fidelity stereo sound (PURE DIRECT) PURE DIRECT bypasses this unit’s decoders and DSP processors as well as shuts down the video circuitry, allowing you to enjoy the highest possible sound fidelity from analog and PCM sources. Press PURE DIRECT to activate pure direct. The button lights up and the front panel display automatically goes out. PURE DIRECT ■ Night listening modes The night listening modes are designed to improve listenability at lower volumes or at night. Choose either NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC depending on the type of material you are playing. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press NIGHT on the remote control repeatedly to select cinema or music. When night listening is selected, the NIGHT indicator in the front panel display lights up. PURE DIRECT NIGHT or Front panel AUDIO Remote control y The front panel display switches on momentarily when an operation is performed. To cancel, press PURE DIRECT again. The indicator around the front panel button goes out and the previous settings are restored. Notes • To avoid unexpected noise, do not play DTS-encoded CDs in this mode. • When a multi-channel signal (Dolby Digital or DTS) is input, this unit automatically switches to the corresponding analog input. (When DTS is selected as an input mode, no sound will be heard.) • No sound will be output from the subwoofer. • Tone Control (page 35) and GUI menu (page 52) settings are not effective. • The following operations are not possible during PURE DIRECT operation: – switching the sound field program – displaying the short message – adjusting GUI menu parameters – all video functions (video conversion etc.) • PURE DIRECT is automatically cancelled whenever this unit is set to the standby mode. Remote control • Select NIGHT:CINEMA when watching films to reduce the dynamic range of film soundtracks and make dialog easier to hear at lower volumes. • Select NIGHT:MUSIC when listening to music sources to preserve ease-of-listening for all sounds. • Select NIGHT:OFF if you do not want to use this function. Press l / h to adjust the effect level while NIGHT:CINEMA or NIGHT:MUSIC is displayed. This adjusts the level of compression. PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E Remote control Effect.Lvl:MID • Select “MIN” for minimum compression. • Select “MID” for standard compression. • Select “MAX” for maximum compression. y NIGHT:CINEMA and NIGHT:MUSIC adjustments are stored independently. Notes • You cannot use the night listening modes with PURE DIRECT, MULTI CH INPUT, or when headphones are connected (even though the NIGHT indicator lights up when PURE DIRECT is selected). • The night listening modes may vary in effectiveness depending on the input source and surround sound settings you use. 38 PLAYBACK ■ Downmixing to 2 channels You can enjoy 2-channel stereo playback from multichannel sources. Rotate PROGRAM (or set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press STEREO on the remote control) to select 2ch Stereo. PROGRAM STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX or Front panel STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 ■ Playing video sources in the background You can combine images from a video source with sound from an audio source. For example, you can enjoy listening to classical music while having beautiful scenery from the video source on the video monitor. Use the input selector buttons to select a video source, then select an audio source. Audio sources A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Remote control PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Video sources 2ch Stereo Note Note You can use a subwoofer with this program when SWFR or BOTH is selected in LFE/BASS OUT. In STRAIGHT mode, two channel stereo sources are output from only the front left and right speakers. Multichannel sources are decoded straight into the appropriate channels without any additional effect processing. Press STRAIGHT (EFFECT) to select STRAIGHT. STRAIGHT STRAIGHT or EFFECT EFFECT Front panel Remote control Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT again so that “STRAIGHT” disappears from the display when you want to turn the sound effect back on. ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP Virtual CINEMA DSP allows you to enjoy the CINEMA DSP programs without surround speakers. It creates virtual speakers to reproduce a natural sound field. If you set Surround to None, Virtual CINEMA DSP activates automatically whenever you select a CINEMA DSP sound field program. Note Virtual CINEMA DSP will not activate, even when Surround is set to “None” (see page 62) in the following cases: – When MULTI CH INPUT is selected as the input source. – When headphones are connected to the PHONES jack. 39 BASIC OPERATION ■ Listening to unprocessed input signals If you want to enjoy an audio source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks together with a video source, first select the video source and then press MULTI CH INPUT. PLAYBACK ■ Displaying information about the input source Selecting audio input modes This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use as follows. Press AUDIO SELECT to select an input mode. In most cases, use AUTO. You can display the type, format and sampling frequency of the current input signal. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. SYSTEM AUDIO SELECT or POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN TV Front panel Remote control Stereo/Surround V–AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SP A A.SEL: AUTO CD–R CD TUNER PHONO dB VOLUME L R Input mode Automatically selects input signals in the following order: 1) i.LINK 2) HDMI 3) Digital signals* 4) Analog signals i.LINK Selects only i.LINK signals. If no i.LINK signals are input, no sound is output. HDMI Selects only HDMI signals. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. COAX/OPT Selects digital signals input at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input. ANALOG Selects only analog signals. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option System Memory AUTO 2 Auto Setup System Memory Audio Info. Format y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 56). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note 40 Format Sampling Channel Bitrate Dialogue Flag1 Flag2 Analog --2/0/----------- Signal format display. When the unit cannot detect a digital signal it automatically switches to analog input. Sampling Sampling frequency. When the unit is unable to detect the sampling frequency “?” appears. Channel Number of source channels in the input signal. For example, a multi-channel soundtrack with 3 front channels, 2 surround channels and LFE, is displayed as “3/2/0.1”. Bitrate Bit rate. When the unit is unable to detect the bit rate “– – –” appears. Dialogue Dialogue normalization information for Dolby Digital signals. Flag1/Flag2 Flag data encoded with DTS or Dolby Digital signals that cue this unit to automatically switch decoders. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. Press n repeatedly to select Audio Info. The following information appears in the display. 3 Press EXIT. TUNING TUNING Automatic and manual tuning 4 There are 2 tuning methods: automatic and manual. Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ Automatic tuning Press PRESET/TUNING l / h once to begin automatic tuning. Press h to tune into a higher frequency, or press l to tune into a lower frequency. PRESET/ TUNING 2 VCR 1 A VOLUME MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A B SILENT CINEMA S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO 1 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 43 2 3 AM 1530 kHz Select TUNER and the reception band following steps 1 and 2 as described in “Automatic tuning”. 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator disappears from the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Disappears AUTO/MAN'L If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. FM/AM or PRESET/ TUNING Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. EDIT 3 AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L SP A EDIT A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD 2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R A CD TU AUTO SP A AM 630 kHz Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to tune into the desired station manually. Hold down the button to continue searching. PRESET/ TUNING If a colon (:) appears in the front panel display, this unit is in PRESET mode and tuning is not possible. Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn it off. VCR 1 TU TUNED 1 Press FM/AM to select the reception band. “FM” or “AM” appears on the front panel display. 2 CD AUTO BASIC OPERATION Rotate the INPUT selector to select TUNER as the input source. PRESET/ TUNING CD-R If the signal from the station you want to select is weak, you must tune into it manually. Manually tuning into an FM station will automatically change the reception mode to monaural reception to increase the signal quality. Front panel 3 MD/TAPE HiFi DSP ■ Manual tuning VIDEO/AUX INPUT 2 DVD OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS CD DTV When tuned into a station, the TUNED indicator lights up and the frequency of the received station is shown on the front panel display. PURE DIRECT AUDIO SELECT CBL/SAT SP A TU AUTO AM 630 kHz 41 TUNING Notes Presetting stations ■ Automatically presetting FM stations You can use the automatic preset tuning feature to store FM stations. This function enables this unit to automatically tune into FM stations with strong signals, and to store up to 40 (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) of those stations in order. You can then recall any preset station easily by selecting the preset station number. Automatic preset tuning options PURE DIRECT You can select the preset number from which this unit will store FM stations and/or begin tuning toward lower frequencies. After pressing MEMORY in step 3: 1 Press A/B/C/D/E, then PRESET/TUNING l / h to select the preset number under which the first station will be stored. Automatic preset tuning will stop when stations have all been stored up to E8. 2 Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) to turn off the colon (:) and then press PRESET/TUNING l to begin tuning toward lower frequencies. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX 1 32 1 Press FM/AM to select the FM band. FM/AM 2 Press TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L) so that the AUTO indicator lights up on the front panel display. AUTO TUNING MODE Lights up AUTO/MAN'L 3 Press and hold MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) for more than 3 seconds. The preset number, the MEMORY and AUTO indicators flash. After about 5 seconds, automatic presetting starts from the frequency currently displayed and proceeds toward the higher frequencies. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO MEMORY A1:FM 87.5 MHz dB VOLUME L R When automatic preset tuning is completed, the front panel display shows the frequency of the last preset station. 42 • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • If the number of the received stations does not reach 40 (E8), automatic preset tuning has automatically stopped after searching all stations. • Only FM stations with sufficient signal strength are stored automatically by automatic preset tuning. If the station you want to store is weak in signal strength, tune into it manually and store it by following the procedure in “Manually presetting stations”. Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the preset stations may be cleared. If so, store the stations again by using the presetting station methods. TUNING ■ Manually presetting stations You can also store up to 40 FM or AM stations (8 stations in 5 groups, A1 through E8) manually. 4 PURE DIRECT Press PRESET/TUNING l / h to select a preset station number (1 to 8) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. Press h to select a higher preset station number. Press l to select a lower preset station number. VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY PRESET/ TUNING TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT EFFECT INPUT VCR 1 B MAIN SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO VIDEO ZONE 2 ZONE 3 L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES 3 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VIDEO/AUX 4 2,5 V-AUX DVR/VCR2 CBL/SAT VCR 1 DTV DVD MD/TAPE 5 CD-R CD TUNER PHONO TUNED dB VOLUME 630 kHz L R When tuned into a station, the front panel display shows the frequency of the station received. CD-R CD TUNER PHONO MEMORY TUNED dB VOLUME 630 kHz L R Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM) on the front panel while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The station band and frequency appear in the front panel display with the preset group and number you have selected. MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM Press MEMORY (MAN’L/AUTO FM). The MEMORY indicator flashes for about 5 seconds. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C3:AM MEMORY MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R Shows the displayed station has been stored as C3. Flashes 6 3 MD/TAPE DVD Press A/B/C/D/E repeatedly to select a preset station group (A to E) while the MEMORY indicator is flashing. The group letter appears. Check that the colon (:) appears on the front panel display. Repeat steps 1 to 5 to store other stations. Notes • Any stored station data existing under a preset number is cleared when you store a new station under that preset number. • The reception mode (stereo or monaural) is stored along with the station frequency. A/B/C/D/E V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV SP A C :AM DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO MEMORY TUNED 630 kHz dB VOLUME L R Preset group 43 BASIC OPERATION 2 DTV C3:AM SP A A :AM CBL/SAT VCR 1 SP A Tune into a station. See page 41 for tuning instructions. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 TUNING Selecting preset stations Exchanging preset stations You can tune any desired station simply by selecting the preset station number under which it was stored. You can exchange the assignment of two preset stations with each other. The example below describes the procedure for exchanging preset station “E1” with “A5”. PURE DIRECT PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT VOLUME EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM A TUNER VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX VCR 1 2 TOP TUNER CD TV INPUT PRESET TITLE MULTI CH IN CBL/SAT MD/TAPE 1 CD-R PURE DIRECT MENU AUDIO 3 STRAIGHT DVD DISPLAY Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE, then press TUNER to set the remote to tuner mode. A/B/C/D/E or ENTER Front panel PRESET/ TUNING 3 Press PRESET/TUNING l / h (or PRESET k / n on the remote control) to select a preset station number (1 through 8). The preset group and number appear on the front panel display along with the station band, frequency and the TUNED indicator lights up. Remote control Front panel DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER TUNED E1:FM 87.5 MHz DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER MEMORY TUNED DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SP A CD-R CD TUNER 4 PHONO MEMORY TUNED dB VOLUME A5:FM 90.6 MHz L R Press PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) again. The stations stored at the two preset assignments are exchanged. ENTER A/B/C/D/E DTV E1:FM 87.5 MHz V-AUX PRESET/ TUNING PRESET/ TUNING CBL/SAT VCR 1 Select preset station “A5” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. “A5” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. Remote control or /VCR2 SP A PRESET 44 OPTICAL Press and hold PRESET/TUNING (EDIT) for more than 3 seconds. “E1” and the MEMORY indicator flash in the front panel display. EDIT A/B/C/D/E CBL/SAT R AUDIO 2 PRESET SP A ZONE 3 L VIDEO/AUX Select preset station “E1” by using A/B/C/D/E and PRESET/TUNING l / h. See “Selecting preset stations”. Press A/B/C/D/E (or l / h on the remote control) to select the preset station group. The preset group letter appears on the front panel display and changes each time you press the button. VCR 1 ZONE 2 VIDEO 1 EFFECT /VCR2 MAIN S VIDEO PHONES NIGHT ENTER RETURN 3 B SILENT CINEMA OPTIMIZER MIC 1,3 1,3 2,4 2 MUTE EXIT 21 A/B/C/D/E DVR/VCR2 A CD PRG SELECT BAND 2 EFFECT 3 TV MUTE 1 TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL TUNING MODE ZONE CONTROL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 VCR 1 MEMORY MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L ZONE ON/OFF PROGRAM TUNER CBL/SAT DTV FM/AM EDIT SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE DVD MD/TAPE CD-R DTV STANDBY /ON V-AUX PRESET/ TUNING INPUT REC OUT/ZONE 2 PHONO PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 EDIT V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R SP A EDIT E1-A5 TUNING Using HD Radio™ HD Radio is a new technology that enables AM and FM radio stations to broadcast programs digitally. Digital broadcasting provides listeners with radically improved audio quality and reception as well as new data services. Furthermore, supplemental program services allow listeners to select from up to 8 HD Radio programs multicast on a single FM HD Radio channel. For further information on HD Radio, visit “www.ibiquity.com”. This unit is equipped with an HD Radio reception feature, facilitating CD quality FM broadcasts as well as analog FM stereo quality AM broadcasts. In addition, this unit can receive both audio and data (such as song titles, artist names, album names, and genres) from supplemental program services (HD1 to HD8). HD Radio™ tuning Just as for tuning into an analog FM or AM station, 2 tuning methods are available: automatic and manual. CAUTION This unit is capable of receiving both hybrid and all-digital HD Radio station signals. However, this unit may not automatically receive all-digital FM station signals and the automatic tuning operation may stop. In this case, select one of the preset stations, or manually tune into the FM station you want to select, then set the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L). ■ HD Radio automatic tuning Automatic tuning is effective when station signals are strong and there is no interference. ■ HD Radio manual tuning Manual tuning is recommended when station signals are weak. Follow steps 1 through 3 as described in “Manual tuning” on page 41, then set the tuning mode back to AUTO by pressing TUNING MODE (AUTO/MAN’L). Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD indicators light up and the frequency of the received station is displayed in the front panel. Note If station signals are weak, analog broadcasts will be played back instead even in the automatic tuning mode, and the HD indicator does not light up. 45 BASIC OPERATION Follow steps 1 through 4 as described in “Automatic tuning” on page 41. Both analog and digital broadcasts are received, but when tuned into an HD Radio station, the TUNED and HD indicators light up and the frequency of the received station is displayed in the front panel. If the HD indicator lights up, the broadcast being received contains an HD Radio digital signal. TUNING Selecting HD Radio™ audio programs Use this feature to select one of the 8 HD Radio audio programs (HD1 to HD8) when the unit is in the tuner mode. Each audio program contains data programs. Press PRG SELECT on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between HD Radio audio programs. Press PRG SELECT again within 2 seconds to select another data program. The HD indicator may disappear from the front panel display while toggling between data programs. Notes • Only 1 HD Radio audio program (HD1) is available for AM broadcasts, while up to 8 audio programs (HD1 to HD8) are available for FM broadcasts. • When reception for an audio program ceases, the HD indicator disappears from the front panel display and HD1 is automatically selected after approximately 20 seconds. • Some audio programs may not contain data programs depending on the broadcasting station and the time period. • The audio programs from HD2 to HD8 can be selected only when they contain data programs. Displaying HD Radio™ information There are 3 types of front panel displays that show HD Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode: frequency, station and music information. Press DISPLAY on the remote control repeatedly to toggle between the following 3 front panel displays. ■ Frequency information (Preset group / FM or AM / Frequency) V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD SP A A MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER AUTO HiFi DSP PHONO HD TUNED dB VOLUME FM 87.5 MHz L R ■ Station information (Station name / FM or AM / Audio program) Station information is available when a station name is received as data in 4 alphabetical codes. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD SP A MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO AUTO STEREO HD TUNED HiFi DSP dB VOLUME WXYZ-FM : HD1 L R Audio program Station name ■ Music information (Song title / Artist name / Album name / Genre) Music information is available only when data programs are received. If the music information is long, it automatically scrolls to the left in the front panel display. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 SP A CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE HiFi DSP CD-R CD TUNER AUTO FM Radio - CD y HD Radio information is also available in the GUI menu (see page 55). 46 PHONO HD TUNED dB VOLUME L R RECORDING RECORDING You can use the REC OUT/ZONE 2 control to record one source while watching and/or listening to another source. Recording adjustments and other operations are performed from the recording components. Refer to the operation instructions for those components. PURE DIRECT VOLUME AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH INPUT PRESET/ TUNING A/B/C/D/E PRESET/ TUNING FM/AM MEMORY TUNING MODE MAN'L/AUTO FM AUTO/MAN'L EDIT TONE STRAIGHT CONTROL EFFECT INPUT DVD DTV A B SILENT CINEMA CD S VIDEO MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 VIDEO L R AUDIO OPTICAL DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 1 ZONE CONTROL PROGRAM TUNER VCR 1 ZONE ON/OFF SPEAKERS SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R CBL/SAT STANDBY /ON OPTIMIZER MIC PHONES VIDEO/AUX 2 Turn on the power of this unit and all connected components. 2 Select the source component you want to record from by using REC OUT/ZONE 2. • To record the current input source that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 • To record a source other than the one that you are watching or listening to, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to the source you want to record. DVD DTV CBL/SAT VCR 1 SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER • To record audio and video from different sources, set REC OUT/ZONE 2 to SOURCE/REMOTE, select a video source first then select an audio source (see page 39). • Do a test recording before you start an actual recording. Notes • The source you record and the source sent to Zone 2 are always the same. • When this unit is set in the standby mode, you cannot record between other components connected to this unit. • The setting of TONE CONTROL, (see page 60) VOLUME, Speaker Level (page 65) and programs does not affect recorded material. • A source connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks of this unit cannot be recorded. • S-video and composite video signals pass independently through this unit’s video circuits. Therefore, when recording or dubbing video signals, if your video source component is connected to provide only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal, you can record only an S-video (or only a composite video) signal to your VCR. • Digital signals input at the DIGITAL INPUT jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT (L/R) jacks for recording. Likewise, analog signals input at the AUDIO IN (L/R) jacks are not output at the DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. Therefore, if your source component is connected to provide only digital (or analog) signals, you can only record digital (or analog) signals. • A given input source is not output on the same REC OUT channel. (For example, the signal input from VCR 1 IN is not output on VCR 1 OUT.) • Check the copyright laws in your country to record from records, CDs, radio, etc. Recording of copyrighted material may infringe copyright laws. • Audio signals input from the selected i.LINK or HDMI components are output to REC OUT when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE or to the source you want to record. However, multi-channel DVD audio signals, DSD signals of Super Audio CD and 2-channel PCM signals over 48 kHz of sampling frequency cannot be output to REC OUT. CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 After this setting, you can change the source you are listening to and/or watching without effecting the recording by rotating the INPUT selector (or pressing one of the input selector buttons on the remote control). 3 Start playback (or select a broadcast station) on the source component. 4 Start recording on the recording component. If you play back a video source that uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent it from being dubbed, the picture itself may be disturbed due to those signals. ■ Special considerations when recording DTS software The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. Attempting to digitally record the DTS bitstream will result in noise being recorded. Therefore, if you want to use this unit to record sources that have DTS signals recorded on them, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made. For DVDs and CDs encoded with DTS, when your player is compatible with the DTS format, follow its operation instruction to make a setting so that the analog signal will be output from the player. 47 BASIC OPERATION 1 y SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS This unit is equipped with a variety of precise digital decoders that allow you to enjoy multi-channel playback from almost any sound source (stereo or multi-channel). This unit is also equipped with a YAMAHA digital sound field processing (DSP) chip containing several sound field programs which you can use to enhance your playback experience. Most of these sound field programs are precise digital recreations of actual acoustic environments found in famous concert halls, music venues, and movie theaters. y The YAMAHA CINEMA DSP modes are compatible with all Dolby Digital, DTS, and Dolby Surround sources. Set the input mode to AUTO (see page 40) to enable this unit to automatically switch to the appropriate digital decoder according to the input signal. Notes • This unit’s DSP sound field programs are recreations of real-world acoustic environments made from precise measurements taken in actual halls, etc. Thus you may notice variations in the strength of the reflections coming from the front, back, left and right. • Feel free to choose a sound field program based on your listening preference, and not purely on the name of the program itself. For movie/video sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing movie or video sources. The sound fields marked “MULTI” can be used with multi-channel sources, like DVD, digital TV, etc. Those marked “2-CH” can be used with 2-channel (stereo) sources like TV programs, video tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35. Sources Remote control button 1 3 Program STEREO 2ch Stereo Downmixes multi-channel sources to 2 (left and right) channels or plays back 2-channel sources as is. ENTERTAINMENT TV Sports CINEMA DSP processing. Though the presence sound field is relatively narrow, the surround sound field employs the sound environment of a large concert hall. This effect enhances the experience of watching various TV programs such as news, variety shows, music programs or sports programs. ENTERTAINMENT Mono Movie CINEMA DSP processing. This program is provided for reproducing monaural video sources (such as old movies). The program produces the optimum reverberation to create sound depth using only the presence sound field. ENTERTAINMENT Game CINEMA DSP processing. This program adds a deep and spatial feeling to video game sounds. MOVIE THEATER Spectacle CINEMA DSP processing. This program creates the extremely wide sound field of a 70-mm movie theater. It precisely reproduces the source sound in detail, making both the video and the sound field incredibly real. This is ideal for any kind of video source encoded with Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital or DTS (especially large-scale movie productions). MOVIE THEATER Sci-Fi CINEMA DSP processing. This program clearly reproduces dialog and sound effects in the latest sound form for science fiction films, thus creating a broad and expansive cinematic space amid silence. You can enjoy science fiction films in a virtual-space sound field that includes Dolby Surround, Dolby Digital and DTS-encoded software employing the most advanced techniques. MOVIE THEATER Adventure CINEMA DSP processing. This program is ideal for precisely reproducing the sound design of the newest 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films. The sound field is made to be similar to that of the newest movie theaters, so the reverberations of the sound field itself are restrained as much as possible. MOVIE THEATER General CINEMA DSP processing. This program is for reproducing sounds from 70-mm and multichannel soundtrack films, and is characterized by soft and extensive sound field. The presence sound field is relatively narrow. It spatially spreads all around and toward the screen, restraining the echo effect of conversations without losing clarity. MULTI 2-CH 4 48 Features SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS Sources MULTI 2-CH Remote control button 5 MULTI 2-CH Features THX THX Cinema THX processing for movie software. THX THX Game THX processing for game software. THX THX Select2 Cinema THX Select2 processing for movie software. THX THX Surr. EX THX processing for any 5.1 channel source. SUR. STANDARD DOLBY DIGITAL Standard 5.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD DOLBY D EX Standard 6.1 channel processing for Dolby Digital sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS Standard 5.1 channel processing for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS 96/24 Standard 5.1 channel processing for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Movie Standard 7.1 channel processing (Dolby Pro Logic x) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+DOLBY EX Standard 6.1 channel processing (Dolby Digital EX) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for DTS sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS 96/24 ES Standard 6.1 channel processing (DTS-ES Matrix and DTS-ES Discrete) for 96kHz/24-bit DTS sources. SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SUR. STANDARD PRO LOGIC Standard processing for Dolby Surround sources. SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Movie Dolby Pro Logic x processing for movie software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Movie Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Game Dolby Pro Logic x processing for game software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Game Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Cinema DTS processing for movie software. SUR. STANDARD CS II Cinema SRS Circle Surround (U.S.A. model only) SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SOUND FIELD PROGRAMS 6 Program processing for movie software. processing for game software. processing for movie software. 49 SOUND FIELD PROGRAM DESCRIPTIONS For music sources You can select from the following sound fields when playing music sources, like CD, FM/AM broadcasting, tapes, etc. Program selection methods vary depending on sound field program types. For details on how to select sound field programs, see “Selecting sound field programs” on pages 34 and 35. Sources Remote control button 2 channel (left and right) playback. STEREO 7ch Stereo HiFi DSP processing. Use to increase the output stereo sources (in stereo) from all speakers. This provides a larger sound field and is ideal for background music at parties, etc. MUSIC Hall in Munich HiFi DSP processing. This is a large fan-shaped concert hall which has approximately 2500 seats. Almost the whole interior is made of wood. There is relatively little reflection from the walls, and sound spreads finely and beautifully. MUSIC Hall in Vienna HiFi DSP processing. A classic shoe-box type concert hall with approximately 1700 seats. Pillars and ornate carvings create extremely complex reflections which produce a very full, rich sound. MUSIC Freiburg HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a big church with a high dome and columns along each side. The reverberation delay is very long while the early reflections are smaller than with other sound field programs. MUSIC The Bttm Line HiFi DSP processing. This is the sound field at stage front in “The Bottom Line”, a famous New York jazz club. The floor can seat 300 people to the left and right in a sound field offering real and vibrant sound. MUSIC The Roxy Thtr HiFi DSP processing. The ideal program for lively, dynamic rock music. The data for this program was recorded at LA’s “hottest” rock club. The listener’s virtual seat is at the center-left of the hall. MUSIC Pop/Rock CINEMA DSP processing. This program produces a vibrant atmosphere and lets you feel as if you are at an actual jazz or rock concert. MUSIC Classic/Opera CINEMA DSP processing. This program provides excellent vocal depth and overall clarity by restraining excessive reverberation. The surround sound field is relatively moderate but it reproduces beautiful sound using data collected from a concert hall. 3 ENTERTAINMENT Disco HiFi DSP processing. This program recreates the acoustic environment of a lively disco in the heart of a big city. The sound is dense and highly concentrated. It is also characterized by high-energy, “immediate” sound. 5 THX THX Music THX processing for all 5.1 encoded music sources. SUR. STANDARD q D+PLIIx Music Standard Dolby Digital and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. SUR. STANDARD DTS+PLIIx Music Standard DTS and Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music sources. SUR. ENHANCED CINEMA DSP enhanced processing for the selected decoder. SUR. STANDARD PLIIx Music Dolby Pro Logic x processing for music software. SUR. STANDARD PLII Music Dolby Pro Logic SUR. STANDARD Neo:6 Music DTS processing for music software. SUR. STANDARD CS II Music SRS Circle Surround (U.S.A. model only) 2 MULTI 6 2-CH 50 Features STEREO 2ch Stereo 1 MULTI 2-CH Program processing for music software. processing for music software. ADVANCED OPERATIONS ADVANCED OPERATIONS ■ Canceling the sleep timer Using the sleep timer Use this feature to automatically set this unit in the standby mode after a certain amount of time. The sleep timer is useful when you are going to sleep while this unit is playing or recording a source. The sleep timer also automatically turns off any external components connected to the AC OUTLET(S). ■ Setting the sleep timer Press SLEEP repeatedly until “SLEEP OFF” appears on the front panel display. After a few seconds, “SLEEP OFF” disappears, and the SLEEP indicator goes off. SLEEP y The sleep timer setting can also be canceled by pressing STANDBY on the remote control (or STANDBY/ON on the front panel) to set this unit to the standby mode. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B AUDIO SELECT STANDBY POWER SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 SELECT 1 Select a source and start playback on the source component. 2 Press SLEEP repeatedly to set the amount of time. Each time you press SLEEP, the front panel display changes as shown below. The SLEEP indicator flashes while switching the amount of time for the sleep timer. SLEEP 120 min V-AUX DVR/VCR2 SLEEP 90 min SLEEP 30 min VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE SLEEP 60 min CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A SLEEP ADVANCED OPERATION SLEEP OFF SLEEP dB SLEEP VOLUME 120min L R The SLEEP indicator lights up in the front panel display, and the display returns to the selected sound field program. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A SLEEP Hall in Munich dB VOLUME L R 51 SYSTEM OPTIONS SYSTEM OPTIONS You can use the following parameters to adjust a variety of system settings and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ HDMI (HDMI menu) Use to edit HDMI parameters (see page 95). ■ i.LINK Select (i.LINK select menu) Use to edit i.LINK parameters (see page 91). ■ Stereo/Surround (Stereo/Surround menu) Use to edit sound field parameters (see page 99). ■ Input Select (Input select menu) Use to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the output volume of each jack (see page 55). Item Features Page I/O Assignment Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. 55 Audio Select Selects the type of input signal to be used. 56 Decoder Mode Selects the input mode for sources connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 56 Volume Trim Adjusts the output volume of each jack. 56 Rename Changes the name of the input. 57 ■ Manual Setup (Manual setup menu) Use to manually adjust speaker and system settings (see page 58). Sound (Sound menu) Use to manually adjust the sound parameters. Item Features Page LFE Level Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Dynamic Range Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. 58 Parametric EQ Adjusts the tonal quality of each speaker. 59 Tone Control Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. 60 Audio Option Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. 60 Basic (Basic menu) Use to quickly setup basic system parameters. Item Features Page Test Tone Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. 62 Speaker Set Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. 62 Speaker Distance Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. 64 Speaker Level Adjusts the output level of each speaker. 65 THX Set Adjusts the THX settings. 65 52 SYSTEM OPTIONS Option (Options menu) Use to adjust the optional system settings. Item Features Page Display Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. 66 Multi Zone Customizes the Zone 2, Zone 3 and Zone B settings. 67 Sur.Initialize Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. 67 Audio Select Selects the initial input mode of the source. 68 Decoder Mode Selects the decoder used by this unit. 68 Memory Guard Locks the menu parameter settings. 68 ■ Auto Setup (Auto setup menu) Use to specify which speaker parameters auto setup will adjust, and to activate the auto setup procedure (see page 27). ■ System Memory (System memory menu) Use to save and recall various settings (see page 69). ■ Audio Info. (Audio signal information menu) Use to check audio signal information (see page 40). ADVANCED OPERATION 53 SYSTEM OPTIONS Changing parameter settings 3 Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. (Speaker set is used in the following example to change parameter settings.) Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE 1 TOP PRESET EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT TV AUDIO A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 1 100Hz 5 2-4 4 DISPLAY EFFECT 1 40Hz PURE DIRECT NIGHT ENTER Presence Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP TOP Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz TITLE SOURCE 100Hz TV 5 Stereo/Surround y Input Select Sound Manual Setup Basic Auto Setup Option System Memory 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select a menu, then press h to enter the selected menu. Test Tone Speaker Set Front Speaker Distance Center Speaker Level Surround Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Presence 54 Press EXIT. If you want to continue adjusting parameter settings, press ENTER to return to the previously selected menu item. Notes • The available parameters may be displayed on more than one page of the GUI display. To scroll through pages, press k / n. • You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68). Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. SYSTEM OPTIONS Input Select Use this feature to reassign digital input/outputs, select the input signal, rename the inputs, or adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV Music information Page 1: the summary of music information (Song title / Artist name / Album name) Page 2: the details of the song title Page 3: the details of the artist Page 4: the details of the album Page 5: the details of the genre Press l / h repeatedly to toggle between pages. Press ENTER on the remote control to hold the display temporarily. “Hold:ENTER” changes to “Release:ENTER”. Press ENTER again to release it. Music information is available only when data programs are received. Hold:ENTER 2 Select Input Select, then press h. [1] 2 Station Music CD-R Stereo/Surround Input Select Manual Setup Auto Setup 3 MD/TAPE DVD DTV y HD Radio information is also available in the front panel display menu (see page 46). CBL/SAT Select the desired input (CD, DVD, etc.), then press h to access and adjust. ■ Information (Information) There are 2 types of GUI displays that show HD Radio information when the unit is in the tuner mode: station and music information. Input Select > TUNER > Information > Current Station Volume Trim Music Rename Station information (Band / Frequency / Station name / Program / Program type) Station information is available when a station name is received as data in 4 alphabetical codes. Current Band Freq. Name You can assign the digital audio input/output and component video jacks to other components if this unit’s initial settings do not correspond to your needs. Change the following parameters to reassign the jacks and effectively connect more components. Once the jacks are reassigned, you can select the corresponding component using the INPUT selector on the front panel or the input selector buttons on the remote control. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > I/O Assignment > Example 1: To assign the COAXIAL 7 (CD) jack to the DVD input. 1) Select Input Select, then select DVD. 2) Select I/O Assignment > Coaxial Input, then select 7 CD. FM 87.50MHz Station Music Program Program Type 55 ADVANCED OPERATION Information ■ I/O Assignment (Input/output assignment) SYSTEM OPTIONS Example 2: To clear a jack assignment. 1) Select Input Select, then select the input source (DVD, etc.). 2) Select I/O Assignment, then select the jack assignment (Optical Output, Optical Input, Coaxial Input or Component Video). 3) Select NONE, then press ENTER to clear the assignment. y • You can adjust the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on (see page 68). • DTS mode is recommended for playback of a CD or LD encoded in DTS. Note If the digital output data of the player has been processed in any way, you may not be able to perform DTS decoding even if you make a digital connection between this unit and the player. ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) I/O Assignment Optical Output Audio Select Optical Input Decoder Mode Coaxial Input Use this feature to switch the input mode. You can designate the reassigned digital input jacks (see page 55) for specific audio signals (DTS, etc.). Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Decoder Mode > Choices: Auto, DTS y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). I/O Assignment Audio Select Notes • You cannot select a specific item more than once for the same type of jack. • When you connect a component to both the COAXIAL and OPTICAL jacks, priority is given to signals input at the COAXIAL jack. ■ Audio Select (Audio selection) This unit comes with a variety of input jacks. You can select the type of input signal you want to use. Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Audio Select > Choices: Auto, i.LINK, HDMI, Coax/Opt, Analog Decoder Mode Auto Volume Trim DTS Rename • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “DTS” if you want this unit to select DTS as the input mode. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). ■ Volume Trim (Volume trimming) I/O Assignment Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode i.LINK Volume Trim HDMI • Select “Auto” if you want signals to be input to this unit in the following order: i.LINK signals, HDMI signals, digital signals* and analog signals. • Select “i.LINK” if you only want i.LINK signals to be input to this unit. If no i.LINK signals are input, no sound is output. • Select “HDMI” if you only want HDMI signals to be input to this unit. If no HDMI signals are input, no sound is output. • Select “Coax/Opt” if you want digital signals to be input to this unit at the OPTICAL or COAXIAL jacks. Use if i.LINK or HDMI signals are also being input. • Select “Analog” if you only want analog signals to be input to this unit. If no analog signals are input, no sound is output. * If this unit detects a Dolby Digital or DTS signal, the decoder automatically switches to the appropriate sound field program. 56 You can adjust the level of the signal input at each jack. This is useful if you want to balance the level of each input source to avoid sudden changes in volume when switching between input sources. Manual Setup > Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Volume Trim > Control range: –6.0 dB to +6.0 dB Audio Select Decoder Mode Volume Trim 0.0dB Rename y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note You can only adjust the volume for the current input source using this setting. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Rename (Rename) Use this feature to change the name of the inputs in the GUI or the front panel display menu. (DVD is used as the source component in the following example.) Input Select > input source (DVD, etc.) > Rename 1 Press an input selector button to select the input you want to change the name of. 2 Press l / h to place the _ (under-bar) under the space or character you want to edit. ■ Multi CH Assign (Multi channel assignment) Use this feature to set the direction of the signals input into the center, subwoofer and surround channels when a source component is connected to the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. If you are inputting 8-channel signals from an external decoder, use this feature to select jacks for the additional front signals. Input Select > MULTI CH > Multi CH Assign > Volume Trim Multi CH Assign Decoder Mode Rename DVD OK 3 4 RESET Press ENTER to select a character type (CAPITAL/SMALL/FIGURE/MARK). Press k / n to select the character you want to use and l / h to move to the next one. • You can use up to 8 characters for each input. • Press n to change the character in the following order, or press k to go in the reverse order. Press ENTER to switch between character types: CAPITAL A to Z, space SMALL a to z, space FIGURE 0 to 9, space MARK !, #, %, &, etc. • Repeat steps 1 to 3 to rename each input. Press l / h to select OK and press ENTER when complete. Input Channels This setting is used to select the number of channels input from an external decoder. Choices: 6ch, 8ch Note If Zone2 Amplifier (page 67) is set to “Internal”, no sound is output from the surround back speakers even if you select “8ch”. In this case, select “6ch” and set the output setting of the external component to 6 channels. Front Input If you selected “8ch” in Input Channels, you can select analog jacks at which front signals from an external decoder will be input. Choices: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). y • To change source names in the display window on the remote control, see page 75. • This menu item is also available in the changing source names in the display window feature (see page 75), and in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note You can only change the name of the current input source (except for multi channel input sources) using this setting. 57 ADVANCED OPERATION 5 Front Input CAPITAL Volume Trim Input Channels SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual Setup (Sound) y Use this menu to adjust the sound parameters. This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. ■ Dynamic Range (Dynamic range) AMP TOP SOURCE Depending on the settings of LFE Level, some signals may not be output at the SUBWOOFER jack. TITLE TV 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Sound, then press h. Use to select the amount of dynamic range compression to be applied to your speakers and headphones. This setting is effective only when the unit is decoding Dolby Digital and DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > Dynamic Range > Choices: MAX (maximum), STD (standard), MIN (minimum) LFE Level Dynamic Range Sound Parametric EQ Basic Tone Control Speaker MAX Audio Option Headphone STD Option MIN 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. ■ LFE Level (Low-frequency effect level) Use to adjust the output level of the LFE (low-frequency effect) channel according to the capacity of your subwoofer or headphones. The LFE channel carries low-frequency special effects which are only added to certain scenes. This setting is effective only when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. To access these parameters, select: Manual Setup > Sound > LFE Level > Choices: –20.0 to 0.0 (dB) Speaker 0.0dB Headphone Speaker (Speaker low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the speaker LFE level. Headphone (Headphone low-frequency effect level) Select to adjust the headphone LFE level. 58 Speaker (Speaker dynamic range) Select to adjust the speaker compression. Headphone (Headphone dynamic range) Select to adjust the headphone compression. • Select “MAX” to preserve the greatest amount of dynamic range. • Select “STD” for general use. • Select “MIN” for listening to sources at low volume levels. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Parametric EQ (Parametric equalizer) Use this feature to adjust the parametric equalizer for any speaker. Manual Setup > Sound > Parametric EQ > 4 Press n to select EDIT and press ENTER to access the edit window. Test Tone LFE Level 1 Front L Parametric EQ Test Tone Front R Tone Control Front L Center Audio Option Front R Press k / n to select Test Tone or the speaker you want to adjust. • Test Tone turns on or off the test tone output when adjusting the tonal quality of each speaker. • Front L adjusts the tonal quality of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the tonal quality of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the tonal quality of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the tonal quality of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the tonal quality of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the tonal quality of the presence right speaker. #1 0.0dB 125.0Hz 1.000 The parameter selected in PARAM is highlighted. • Press l / h to adjust the parameter. • Press k / n to adjust the Gain. • Press ENTER to exit the edit window. 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until you are satisfied with the results. y If you want to reset all PEQ parameter settings for the selected speaker, select RESET and press ENTER. 6 Select EXIT and press ENTER to exit the settings window. y • If you select “Band” in step 3, you can use this menu as a graphic equalizer. • For more information on the parametric equalizer, see “PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION” on page 114. Press h to access the settings window. PARAM Test Tone ADVANCED OPERATION 2 Dynamic Range Band Gain Freq. Q RESET EDIT EXIT Band / Gain Front L Front R Center 3 Press l / h to select PARAM, then press ENTER to select a parameter from Band (band), Freq. (frequency) or Q (Q factor). 59 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Tone Control (Tone control) Use to adjust the amount of bass and treble output to your speakers and headphones. Manual Setup > Sound > Tone Control > Choices: Control, Bass, Treble Control (Tone control) Choices: Defeat, Speakers, Headphones Note Tone Control is not effective when: – THX (pages 49 to to 50) or PURE DIRECT (page 38) is selected. – MULTI CH INPUT is selected. ■ Audio Option (Audio options) Use to customize this unit’s overall audio settings. Manual Setup > Sound > Audio Option > Choices: Muting Type, Audio Delay, PR/SB Select Control Defeat Bass Speakers Treble Headphones Muting Type (Muting type) Use to adjust how much the mute function reduces the output volume. Choices: Full, –20dB • Select “Defeat” if you do not want to make any adjustments. • Select “Speakers” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your speakers. • Select “Headphones” to adjust the bass/treble balance of your headphones. Bass (Bass control) Use this feature to adjust low-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 125Hz, 350Hz, 500Hz (frequency) –6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB Speaker Freq : 125Hz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 Muting Type Full Audio Delay -20dB PR/SB Select • Select “Full” to completely halt all output of sound. • Select “–20dB” to reduce the current volume by 20 dB. Audio Delay (Audio delay) Use to delay the sound output and synchronize it with the video image. This may be necessary when using certain LCD monitors or projectors. Choices: 0 to 240 (ms) +0 -6 Muting Type Audio Delay Treble (Treble control) Use this feature to adjust high-frequencies output to your speakers or headphones. Choices: 2.5kHz, 3.5kHz, 8.0kHz (frequency) –6.0dB to +6.0dB (gain), initial setting: 0.0dB Speaker Freq : 3.5kHz Gain : 0.0dB Control Bass Treble +6 +0 -6 y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). 60 0ms PR/PB Select y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). SYSTEM OPTIONS PR/SB Select (Presence/surround back speaker selection) Surround back and presence speakers do not output sound simultaneously. You can select to prioritize either speaker set when playing sources that contain surround back channel signals using CINEMA DSP sound field programs. Choices: Presence, Surround Back Manual Setup (Basic) Use this menu to set up basic system parameters. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP SOURCE Muting Type TITLE TV Audio Delay Presence PR/SB Select Surround Back • Select “Presence” to use presence speakers even when surround back channel signals are input. The signals for the surround back channel will be output from surround speakers. • Select “Surround Back” to use surround back speakers when a surround back channel signal is detected in a CINEMA DSP program. Presence channel signals will be output from front speakers. 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Basic, then press h. Sound Test Tone Basic Speaker Set Option Speaker Distance Speaker Level 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. y • Most of the parameters described in the basic menu are set automatically when you run auto setup. You can use the basic menu to make further adjustments, but we recommend running auto setup first. • You can reset these parameters by performing the auto setup procedure (see page 27). ADVANCED OPERATION 61 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Test Tone (Test tone) Turns the test tone output on or off for Speaker Set, Speaker Distance and Speaker Level settings. Manual Setup > Basic > Test Tone > Choices: Off, On Center (Center speaker) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Large Center Small Surround None Surround Back Test Tone Off Speaker Set On Speaker Distance y • If you use a handheld SPL meter, hold at arms length and point upwards so that the meter is in the listening position. With the meter set to the 70 dB scale and to C SLOW, calibrate each speaker to 75 dB. • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). Note Loud test tones will be output when “On” is selected. In this case, make sure no children are present in the listening room. ■ Speaker Set (Speaker set) Use to manually adjust any speaker setting. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Set > Choices: Front, Center, Surround, Surround Back, Presence, Bass Out, Bass Cross Over, SWFR Phase y If you are not satisfied with the bass sounds from your speakers, you can change these settings according to your preference. Note Set any THX speakers to Small. Front (Front speakers) Choices: Large, Small Large Front Small Center Surround • Select “Large” if you have large front speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the front left and right channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small front speakers. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the front channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. 62 • Select “Large” if you have a large center speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the center channel signal to the center speaker. • Select “Small” if you have a small center speaker. The unit directs the low-frequency signals of the center channel to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have a center speaker. The unit directs all of the center channel signal to the front left and right speakers. Surround (Surround left/right speakers) Choices: Large, Small, None Front Center Large Surround Small Surround Back None Presence • Select “Large” if you have large surround left and right speakers or if a rear subwoofer is connected to the surround speakers. The entire range of the surround channel signal is directed to the surround left and right speakers. • Select “Small” if you have small surround left and right speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “None” if you do not have surround speakers. This sets the unit to the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode (see page 39) and automatically sets the surround back speaker setting (Surround Back) to “None”. SYSTEM OPTIONS Surround Back (Surround back left/right speakers) Choices: Large x1, Small x1, Small x2, Large x2, None Center Large x1 Surround Small x1 Surround Back Small x2 Presence Large x2 Bass Out None • Select “Large x1” if you have a large surround back speaker. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x1” if you have a small surround back speaker. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channel are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out, and the rest of the frequency signals are directed to the surround back left speaker. • Select “Small x2” if you have two small surround back speakers. The low-frequency signals of the surround back channels are directed to the speakers selected with Bass Out. • Select “Large x2” if you have two large surround back speakers. The unit directs the entire range of the surround back channel signal to the surround back speakers. • Select “None” if you do not have a surround back speaker. The unit directs all of the surround back channel signal to the surround left and right speakers. Note If you select “Large x1” or “Small x1”, connect a speaker to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) speaker terminals. Surround Surround Back Presence None Bass Out Yes Bass Cross Over Surround Back Presence Both Bass Out SWFR Bass Cross Over Front SWFR Phase Notes • Select “Both” to direct LFE signals to the subwoofer. Front L/R low-frequency signals are directed to both the subwoofer and front channels, and all other low-frequency signals are directed in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “SWFR” if you connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all LFE and low-frequency signals in accordance with other speaker settings. • Select “Front” if you have not connected a subwoofer. The unit directs all low-frequency and LFE signals to the front speakers (even if you have previously set Front to Small in Speaker Set). Bass Cross Over (Bass cross over) Use this feature to select a cross-over (cut-off) frequency for all low-frequency signals. All frequencies below the selected frequency are sent to the subwoofer. Choices: 40Hz, 60Hz, 80Hz (THX), 90Hz, 100Hz, 110Hz, 120Hz, 160Hz, 200Hz THX recommendation: 80Hz (THX) Presence 40Hz Bass Out 60Hz Bass Cross Over 80Hz (THX) SWFR Phase 90Hz 100Hz • Select “None” if you do not have presence speakers. This unit directs all presence channel signals to the front left and right speakers. • Select “Yes” if you have presence speakers. Note When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal” (see page 67), Presence is automatically set to “None”. 63 ADVANCED OPERATION Presence (Presence speakers) Choices: None, Yes Bass Out (Bass out) LFE signals carry low-frequency effects when this unit decodes Dolby Digital or DTS signals. These low-frequency signals can be directed to both front left and right speakers, and to the subwoofer (which can be used for both stereo reproduction and sound field programs). Choices: Both, SWFR, Front THX recommendation: SWFR SYSTEM OPTIONS SWFR Phase (Subwoofer Phase) If bass sounds are lacking or unclear, use this feature to adjust the frequency phase characteristics of your subwoofer. Choices: Normal, Reverse Bass Out Bass Cross Over SWFR Phase Normal Reverse • Select “Normal” not to reverse the phase for your subwoofer(s). • Select “Reverse” to reverse the phase for your subwoofer(s). y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). ■ Speaker Distance (Speaker distance) Use this feature to manually input the distance of each speaker and adjust the delay applied to the respective channel. Ideally, each speaker should be the same distance from the main listening position. However, this is not possible in most home situations. Thus, a certain amount of delay must be applied to the sound from each speaker so that all sound will arrive at the listening position at the same time. Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Distance > Test Tone Subwoofer Speaker Set Unit Speaker Distance Front L Speaker Level Front R THX Set Center Unit (Unit) Choices: Meter (m), Feet (ft) Initial setting:U.S.A. and Canada models: Feet (ft) Other models: Meter (m) • Select “Meter” to input speaker distances in meters. • Select “Feet” to input speaker distances in feet. Presence R Subwoofer Unit Meter Front L Feet Front R 64 Speaker distances Choices: 0.30 to 24.00 m (1.0 to 80.0 ft) Initial setting: 3.00 m (10.0 ft) • Front L adjusts the distance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the distance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the distance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the distance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the distance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the distance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the distance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the distance of the presence left speaker. • Presence R adjusts the distance of the presence right speaker. • Subwoofer adjusts the distance of the subwoofer. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). Notes • You cannot adjust the distance of speakers set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the distance in Surround Back L. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Speaker Level (Speaker level) Use these settings to manually balance the speaker levels between the front left speakers and each speaker selected in Speaker Set (see page 62). Manual Setup > Basic > Speaker Level ■ THX Set (THX settings) Use to manually adjust the THX settings. Manual Setup > Basic > THX Set > Speaker Distance Dimmer Speaker Level Speaker B Speaker Set Presence R THX Set SB Speaker Dist. Speaker Distance Subwoofer Information Output Speaker Level Front L Input Mode Zone 3 Volume THX Set Front R Center Choices: –10.0 dB to +10.0 dB Initial setting: 0.0 dB • Front L adjusts the balance of the front left speaker. • Front R adjusts the balance of the front right speaker. • Center adjusts the balance of the center speaker. • Surround L adjusts the balance of the surround left speaker. • Surround R adjusts the balance of the surround right speaker. • Surround Back L adjusts the balance of the surround back left speaker. • Surround Back R adjusts the balance of the surround back right speaker. • Presence L adjusts the balance of the front left and presence left speakers. • Presence R adjusts the balance of the front left and presence right speakers. • Subwoofer adjusts the balance of the subwoofer. SB Speaker Dist. (Surround back speaker distance) Use this feature to optimize the surround sound field when you have to place the surround back speakers apart. Choices: U.S.A. and Canada models: under 1ft, 1 – 4ft, over 4ft Other models: under 0.3m, 0.3 – 1.2m, over 1.2m Input Assign Dimmer Support Audio under 0.3m SB Speaker Dist. 0.3-1.2m Information over 1.2m Input Mode Zone 3 Volume Notes y y • You cannot adjust the level of channels set to “None” in Speaker Set. • If you are only using one surround back speaker, connect it to the SURROUND BACK (SINGLE) jack, and adjust the balance in Surround Back L. This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). 65 ADVANCED OPERATION • To calibrate correctly to THX reference levels, use Test Tone (see page 62). • This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 88). • Select “under 0.3m” or “under 1ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is less than 0.3 m (1 ft). • Select “0.3 – 1.2m” or “1 – 4ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is between 0.3 and 1.2 m (1 and 4 ft). • Select “over 1.2m” or “over 4ft” if the distance between the two surround back speakers is more than 1.2 m (4 ft). SYSTEM OPTIONS Manual Setup (Option) This menu adjusts the optional system settings. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP SOURCE TITLE TV 2 Select Manual Setup, then press h. 3 Select Option then press h. Video Conv. (Video conversion) Use this feature to turn on/off conversion of composite (VIDEO) signals to both S-video and component signals. This allows you to output converted video signals at the S VIDEO or COMPONENT VIDEO jacks when no S-video or component signals are input. This feature also converts S-video signals to component signals when no component signals are input. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” not to convert any signals. • Select “On” to convert composite signals to S-video and component signals, and to convert S-video signals to component signals. y When using the THX system, we recommend setting Video Conv. to “Off”. Notes Sound Display Basic Multi Zone Option Sur.Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode 4 Select the desired parameters, then press h to access and adjust. 5 When finished adjusting parameters, press ENTER. ■ Display (Display) Use this feature to adjust the GUI and front panel displays. Manual Setup > Option > Display > Choices: Dimmer, Video Conv., Short Message, Position, Wall Paper Dimmer Video Conv. Display Short Message Multi Zone Position Sur.Initialize Wall Paper Dimmer (Dimmer) Use to adjust the brightness of the front panel display. Choices: –4 to 0 • Converted video signals are only output at the MONITOR OUT jacks. When recording you must make the same type of video connections (composite or S-video) between each component. • When converting composite video or S-video signals from a VCR to component video signals, the picture quality may suffer depending on your VCR. Short Message (Short message) Use this feature to turn on/off the short message display. Choices: Off, On • Select “Off” to turn off the short message display. • Select “On” to turn on the short message display. Notes • The short message display may not display properly depending on the type of input signal and video monitor used. • If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, the short message display is not displayed even if “On” is selected. Position (Position) Use to adjust the vertical and horizontal position of the GUI display. Choices: –5 (downward/left) to +5 (upward/right) • Press k to raise the position of the GUI display. • Press n to lower the position of the GUI display. • Press h to shift the position of the GUI display to the right. • Press l to shift the position of the GUI display to the left. Wall Paper (Wallpaper) Use this feature to select the background when no image is input from an external source. If you do not want to display the background, select None. Choices: None, Yes, Gray Note If Video Conv. is set to “Off”, no background is displayed even if “Yes” is selected. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). 66 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Multi Zone (Multi zone) Use this feature to customize the Zone 2 and Zone B settings. Manual Setup > Option > Multi Zone > Choices: Speaker B, Zone2 Amplifier, Zone2 Volume, Zone3 Volume Display Speaker B Multi Zone Zone2 Amplifier Sur.Initialize Zone2 Volume Audio Select Zone3 Volume Speaker B (Speaker B) Use this feature to select the location of the front speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals. Choices: Main, Zone B • Select “Main” to turn on/off SPEAKERS A and B when the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in the main room. • Select “Zone B” if the speakers connected to the SPEAKERS B terminals are set in another room. If SPEAKERS A is turned off and SPEAKERS B is turned on, all the speakers including the subwoofer in the main room are muted and the unit outputs sound from SPEAKERS B only. Notes • If you select “Zone B” and connect headphones to the PHONES jack on this unit, the sound is output from both the headphones and SPEAKERS B. • When a DSP program is selected, the unit automatically enters the Virtual CINEMA DSP mode. Notes • When “Internal” is selected, the presence speaker setting automatically switches to “None”. • When “Internal” is selected, the Zone2 volume setting automatically switches to “Variable”. Zone3 Volume (Zone 3 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 3 OUTPUT jacks. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 3 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). ■ Sur.Initialize (Surround initialize) Use this feature to initialize the parameters for each sound field program within sound field program groups. When you initialize a sound field program group, all of the parameter values within that group revert to their initial settings. Adjusted sound field parameter settings are displayed in blue. Manual Setup > Option > Sur.Initialize Choices: STEREO, MUSIC, ENTERTAINMENT, MOVIE THEATER, SURROUND, All Display STEREO Multi Zone MUSIC Sur.Initialize ADVANCED OPERATION Zone2 Amplifier (Zone 2 amplifier) Use to select how the ZONE 2 speakers are amplified. Choices: Internal, External • Select “External” if you connect your Zone 2 speakers through an external amplifier connected to this unit’s ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. • Select “Internal” to use this unit’s internal amplifier if you connect your Zone 2 speakers directly to this unit’s PRESENCE/ZONE 2 speaker terminals. • Select “None” if you do not want to use the Zone2 feature. Zone2 Volume (Zone 2 volume) Use to select how the volume control will operate with regard to the ZONE 2 OUTPUT jacks. When Zone2 Amplifier is set to “Internal”, this feature is automatically set to “Variable”. Choices: Fixed, Variable • Select “Fixed” to fix the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume level to a standard line level. • Select “Variable” to adjust the ZONE 2 OUTPUT volume simultaneously using VOL +/– on the remote control. ENTERTAINMENT MOVIE THEATER Audio Select SURROUND Decoder Mode All • Press k / n to select the sound field program you want to initialize, then press ENTER. • Select “All” to initialize settings for all sound field program parameters. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). Note Sound field program groups cannot be initialized when Memory Guard is set to “On” (see page 68). 67 SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ Audio Select (Audio selection) Use this feature to designate the default input mode this unit selects when the power is turned on and the input source (such as a DVD player) is connected to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks on this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Audio Select Choices: Auto, Last ■ Memory Guard (Memory Guard) Use this feature to prevent accidental changes to DSP program parameter values and other system settings. Manual Setup > Option > Memory Guard Choices: Off, On Audio Select Decoder Mode Multi Zone Memory Guard Sur.Initialize Off On Audio Select Auto Decoder Mode Last Memory Guard • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate input mode. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last input mode used for the connected source. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). Note y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 89). Note Selecting “Last” does not recall the last setting for the EXTD SUR. button. ■ Decoder Mode (Decoder mode) You can select the decoder used by this unit. Manual Setup > Option > Decoder Mode Choices: Auto, Last Sur. Initialize Audio Select Decoder Mode Auto Memory Guard Last • Select “Auto” if you want this unit to automatically detect input signal types and select the appropriate decoder. • Select “Last” if you want this unit to automatically select the last decoder used for the connected source. 68 Select “On” to protect: • DSP program parameters • All menu items except Memory Guard and System Memory – Load. In general, front panel and remote control operations are not affected when Memory Guard is set to “On”. However, you cannot adjust the tone control using Tone Control. SYSTEM OPTIONS ■ To recall settings System Memory This feature allows you to save up to six of your favorite settings that can be easily recalled when needed. You can save settings such as the following: • Sound field program parameters • Speaker settings • Speaker channel settings • LFE level • Dynamic range settings • Parametric equalizer settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV 2 Select System Memory, then press h. 3 Select Load, then press ENTER. ■ To save settings 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. Sci-Fi Speaker SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ Current AMP TOP SOURCE Memory 1 TITLE Memory 2 TV A:ON B:OFF 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX Reset Memory 3 2 Select System Memory, then press h. 3 Select Save, then press ENTER. Current Memory 1 Sci-Fi Speaker SpeakerCH LFE Level D-Range PEQ A:ON B:OFF 3/4/0.1 0dB MAX Reset Memory 2 Current displays the current settings of this unit. Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number under which you want to save the settings, then press h. “Save: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. Press k / n repeatedly to select the memory number you want to recall, then press h. “Load: ENTER” appears in the bottom right corner of the window. 5 Press ENTER to recall the settings. y Memory 1 and Memory 2 settings can be recalled simply by pressing MEMORY 1/2 on the remote control. When you press MEMORY 1, the message “Load Memory 1? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 1 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 When you press MEMORY 2, the message “Load Memory 2? Yes:Press Again” appears in the front panel display. Press MEMORY 2 once more to recall the settings. 1 MEMORY 2 5 Press ENTER to save the settings. 9 0 69 ADVANCED OPERATION 4 4 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES In addition to controlling this unit, the remote control can also operate other audio and video components made by YAMAHA and other manufacturers. To control these other components, you must set up the remote control with the appropriate remote control codes. This remote control also has a learn feature which allows the remote to acquire functions from other remote controls equipped with an infrared remote control transmitter. Control area ■ Controlling this unit The shaded areas below can be used to control this unit after setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP to activate the AMP mode. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Display window AMP/SOURCE/ TV Set to AMP to operate this unit. SELECT AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – SOURCE TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE PRESET TOP TV EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT PURE DIRECT The buttons inside the dotted lines control this unit in any mode (SYSTEM POWER, STANDBY, SLEEP, AUDIO SELECT, the input selector buttons, VOL +/–, MUTE, PURE DIRECT and STRAIGHT/ EFFECT). ■ Controlling other components The shaded areas below can be used to control other components. Each button has a different function depending on the selected components. Select the component you want to control by pressing an input selector button or SELECT k / n. The name of the selected component appears in the display window. The A/B and input selector buttons switch the function of the component control area below. * Use the A/B buttons to control other components regardless of whether they are connected to this unit. Factory setting: A...LD player B...Tape deck POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP POWER POWER MULTI AV CH IN PHONO TUNER V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE TVCD CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD SELECT AMP NIGHT AUDIO ENTER SELECT k / n switches control to another component without changing the input source on this unit. SYSTEM POWER + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT SOURCE A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 1 6 7 MEMORY 2 9 0 FREQ/RDS EON 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. TV + EFFECT STEREO PRESET TOP + MUTE TV VOL EXIT MENU BAND PRG SELECT Display window CH PURE DIRECT – TITLE – TV MUTE ENTER TVNIGHT INPUT AUDIO PRESET TOP MENU STRAIGHT PRG SELECT BAND RETURN DISPLAY NIGHT EFFECT ENTER REC STEREO DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME Component control area You can control up to 14 different components by setting appropriate remote control codes (see page 81). 1 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 2 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 0 FREQ/RDS EON REC EXTD. SUR DISPLAY 7 8 STEREO 9 A/B/C/D/E 4 STANDARD RETURN SELECT THX AUDIO MOVIE 3 MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 A SPEAKERS2 B ENT. +10 MOVIE 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 7 8 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 MODE PTY SEEK START A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. DISC SKIP FREQ/RDS OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR REC DISC SKIP 70 EXIT A/B/C/D/E TITLE MODE PTY SEEK START EON RE–NAME MODE PTY SEEK START AMP/ SOURCE/ TV Set to SOURCE to operate the component selected with an input selector button. Set to TV to operate the television (you must set the remote control code in DTV or PHONO). REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Controlling optional components (OPTN area) OPTN is an additional component control area that can be programmed with remote control functions independently from any input source. This area is useful for programming commands that are to be used only as a part of a macro function or for components that do not have a valid remote control code. To select the OPTN control area, press n repeatedly until OPTN appears in the display window. Notes • You cannot set a remote control code for this area. See page 73 to program buttons operated within this component control area. • The OPTN area cannot be used when “2001” or “2003” is selected in the amplifier library (see page 72). Setting remote control codes You can control other components by setting the appropriate remote control codes. Codes can be set up for each input area. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. The following table shows the default component (Library: component category) and the remote control code for each input area. Remote Control Code Default Settings Library (component category) Default YAMAHA code A LD 2200 B TAPE 2700 Input area PHONO TV – TUNER TUNER 2602 CD CD 2300 MULTI CH INPUT DVD 2102 V-AUX VCR – CBL/SAT CABLE – MD/TAPE MD 2500 CD-R CD-R 2400 DTV TV – VCR 1 VCR – DVR/VCR2 DVR 2807 DVD DVD 2102 Note 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to set up. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 71 ADVANCED OPERATION You may not be able to operate your YAMAHA component even if a YAMAHA remote control code is preset as listed above. In this case, try setting another YAMAHA remote control code. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 3 Press and hold LEARN for about 3 seconds using a ballpoint pen or similar object. The library name (ex. “L:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. Setting remote control tuner codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control tuner code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE and the unit to the tuner mode by pressing TUNER on the remote control, then change the remote control code settings. Tuner library code LEARN Function (remote control setting) y 2602 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. If you want to setup for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component. To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2603 Notes • Be sure to press and hold LEARN for at least 3 seconds, otherwise the learning process will start. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the setting mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. If you want to change a library (component category), press l / h. You can set a different type of component. Library choices: L:DVD, L:DVR, L:LD, L;CD, L:CDR, L:MD, L:TAP (tape), L:TUN (tuner), L;AMP*, L:TV, L:CAB (cable), L:SAT (satellite), L:VCR * The amplifier library (L;AMP) code is preset to “2000” in order to operate this unit. However, you can switch by entering one of the following 4 codes if necessary. Setting remote control AMP codes Select one of the following codes to set the remote control AMP code for the component you want to use. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE, then change the remote control code settings. AMP library code (remote control setting) Function 72 2001 To operate this unit using the default code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features (see page 82). 2002 To operate this unit using an alternative code. 2003 To operate this unit using an alternative code. To operate Zone 2 or Zone 3 features of other YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers (see page 82). ID1 (initial setting) ID2 When using multiple YAMAHA receivers/amplifiers, you may be able to operate the other components simultaneously with the default code setting. In this case, set one of the alternative codes to operate this unit separately. 4 Press ENTER. The four-digit code set for the selected component appears in the display window. Note “0000” appears in the display window if no code has been set. 5 Press the numeric buttons to enter the four-digit remote control code for the component you want to use. For a complete list of available remote control codes, refer to “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. (this unit’s setting: see page 86) 6 ID1 (initial setting) (this unit’s setting: see page 86) Note Remote control AMP ID 2000 To operate this unit using (initial setting) the default code. Remote control tuner ID STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN 1 2 3 4 THX STANDARD SELECT EXTD SUR. 5 6 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 7 MOVIE 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if the setting was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. y ID2 If you continuously want to set up another code for another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 7 Press LEARN again to exit from the setup mode. LEARN 8 Press one of the buttons shaded below to see if you can control your component. If you can, the remote control code is correct. POWER TV AV STANDBY A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Use the learn feature if you want to program functions not included in the basic operations covered by remote control codes, or an appropriate remote control code is not available. You can program any of the buttons available in the component control area (see page 70). The buttons can be programmed independently for each component. Note SYSTEM POWER Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn) POWER FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME This remote control transmits infrared rays. If the other remote control also uses infrared rays, this remote control can learn most of its functions. However, you may not be able to program some special signals or extremely long transmissions. (Refer to the operating instructions for the other remote control.) 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. y AMP If the manufacturer of your component has more than one code, try each of them until you find the correct one. SOURCE TV Notes • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • The supplied remote control does not contain all possible codes for commercially available audio and video components (including YAMAHA components). If operation is not possible with any of the remote control codes, program the new remote control function using the Learn feature (see “Programming codes from other remote controls (Learn)”) or use the remote control supplied with the component. • Function programmed using the learn feature take priority over remote control code functions. 2 3 Press an input selector button to select a source component. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD AV CD AUDIO SELECT MULTI CH IN SLEEP SYSTEM B DVD CD-R POWER TV TUNER MD/TAPE STANDBY A DVR/VCR2 POWER PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) 73 ADVANCED OPERATION Place this remote control about 5 to 10 cm (2 to 4 in) apart from the other remote control on a flat surface so that their infrared transmitters are aimed at each other. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. 7 Press LEARN again to exit the learning mode. LEARN Notes LEARN Notes • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 5 Press the button for which you want to program the new function. “LEARN” appears in the display window. STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER SYSTEM CD AUDIO SELECT AV B POWER TUNER TV A DVD CD-R POWER PHONO MD/TAPE AMP SELECT TV SOURCE DVR/VCR2 + VCR 1 – VOL CBL/SAT + DTV – CH PURE DIRECT AUDIO NIGHT STRAIGHT V-AUX – + MUTE EXIT DISPLAY A/B/C/D/E TV VOL TV INPUT ENTER PRESET MENU TOP PRG SELECT TV MUTE BAND TITLE RETURN 6 Press and hold the button you want to program on the other remote control until “OK” appears in the display window. “NG” appears in the display window if learning was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 5. CD AUDIO SELECT STANDBY MULTI CH IN SLEEP POWER SYSTEM B DVD CD-R AV TUNER MD/TAPE POWER A DVR/VCR2 TV PHONO VCR 1 CBL/SAT POWER DTV V-AUX SELECT y • If you want to program another function, repeat steps 5 and 6. • If you continuously want to program another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 5 and 6. 74 • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. • This remote control can learn approximately 200 functions. However, depending on the signals learned, “FULL” may appear in the display before you program 200 functions. In this case, clear unnecessary programmed functions to make room for further learning. • Learning may not be possible in the following cases: – When the batteries in the remote control for this unit or other components are weak. – When the distance between the two remote controls is too great or too small. – When the remote control infrared windows are not facing each other at the appropriate angle. – When the remote control is exposed to direct sunlight. – When the function to be programmed is continuous or uncommon. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Changing source names in the display window 5 Press l / h to move the cursor to the next position. PRESET You can change the name that appears in the display window on the remote control if you want to use a different name than the factory preset. This is useful when you have set the input selector to control a different component. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. ENTER A/B/C/D/E 6 AMP SOURCE TV Press ENTER to set the new name. “OK” appears in the display window if renaming was successful. “NG” appears in the display window if renaming was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. y 2 Press an input selector button to select the source component you want to rename. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD If you continuously want to rename another component, press the input selector button or SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat steps 4 through 6. 7 Press RE-NAME again to exit the renaming mode. RE-NAME Note 3 Press RE-NAME using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or when you press more than one button simultaneously. RE-NAME Note 4 ADVANCED OPERATION If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the renaming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press RE-NAME again. Press k / n to select and enter a character. Pressing n changes the character as follows: A to Z, 1 to 9, 0, + (plus), – (hyphen), ; (semicolon), / (slash), and space. (Pressing k changes the characters in reverse order.) PRESET ENTER A/B/C/D/E 75 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Using the Macro feature The Macro feature makes it possible to perform a series of operations with the press of a single button. For example, when you want to play a CD, normally you would turn on the components, select the CD input, and press the play button to start playback. The Macro feature lets you perform all of these operations simply by pressing the CD macro button. The buttons listed as macro buttons below are factory set with macro programs. You can also program your own macros (see page 77). Press a macro button CD To automatically transmit these signals in order SYSTEM POWER CD Macro buttons First Second Third STANDBY STANDBY — — SYSTEM SYSTEM POWER POWER (*1) POWER (CD area) (*2) TV — A — — — B — — — PHONO PHONO — TUNER TUNER CD CD MULTI CH IN MULTI CH IN — V-AUX V-AUX — CBL/SAT — CBL/SAT (*3) — (CD area) (*4) SYSTEM POWER MD/TAPE MD/TAPE (*1) CD-R CD-R DTV DTV — VCR 1 (VCR 1 area) (*4) VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD *1 (MD/TAPE area) (*4) DVR/VCR2 DVD (CD-R area) (*4) (DVR/VCR 2 area) (*4) (DVD area) (*4) You can turn on some components (including YAMAHA components) connected to this unit by connecting them to the AC OUTLET(S) on the rear panel of this unit. (Power control may not be synchronized with this unit depending on the component. For details, refer to the operating instructions for the connected component.) *2 When the remote control code for your TV is set up for either DTV or PHONO (see page 71), you can turn on the power of your TV without selecting an input source. The remote control code set up for DTV takes priority over the one for PHONO. *3 When TUNER is selected as the input source, this unit plays the last station received before the unit was set in the standby mode. *4 Playback can be started for any YAMAHA remote control-compatible MD recorder, CD player, CD recorder, DVD player, or DVD recorder. When using macros to operate other components, you will need to program the play button on the control area of that component (see page 73) or set a remote control code (see page 71). 76 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES ■ Macro operations ■ Programming macro operations Macro buttons SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP FREQ/RDS EON MODE PTY SEEK START REC PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME You can program your own macros and use the macro feature to transmit several remote control commands in sequence at the press of a button. Be sure to set up remote control codes or perform learning operations before programming the macro. We do not recommend programming continuous operations such as volume control in a macro. Notes MACRO ON/OFF 1 Set MACRO ON/OFF to ON. 2 Press a macro button. MACRO • The default macro is not cleared when a new macro is programmed for a button. The default macro can be used again when the programmed macro is cleared. • It is not possible to add a new signal (macro step) to the default macro. Programming a macro changes all macro contents. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. Notes • When you have finished using the Macro feature, set MACRO ON/OFF to OFF. • While the remote is carrying out a Macro program, it will not accept any other button’s function until the macro operation is complete (the transmission indicator stops flashing). • Continue to aim the remote control at the component the macro is operating until the macro operation is complete. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 3 A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Note “AGAIN” appears in the display window if you press a button other than a macro button. 77 ADVANCED OPERATION Press the macro button you want to use to operate the macro. The macro button name (ex. “M:DVD”) and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press the buttons for the functions you want to include in the macro operation in sequence. You can set up to 10 steps (10 functions). After you have set 10 steps, “FULL” appears and the remote control automatically exits the macro mode. Clearing function sets You can clear all changes made in each function set, such as learned functions, macros, renamed source names and setup remote control codes. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER MCR 2: AV POWER 2 AUDIO SELECT SLEEP SOURCE MCR 3: AUDIO SELECT TV 3 MULTI CH IN PHONO TUNER CD V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD 2 MCR 1: DVD 1 Press CLEAR by using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “CLEAR” appears in the display window. CLEAR Indicates the number of macro steps entered Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the clearing mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press CLEAR again. Flashes alternately so you can set the next step 3 Press k / n to select the clear mode. L;CD (L: name of a component) Clears all learned functions in the respective component control area. Press an input selector button to select the component. L;AMP Clears all learned functions for this unit’s control area. L;ALL Clears all learned functions. M;ALL Clears all programmed macros RNAME Clears all renamed source names. FCTRY Clears all remote functions and returns the remote to the factory settings. Note To change the selected source component, press SELECT k / n. Pressing the input selector buttons will program a macro step, whereas SELECT k / n only changes the selected component and corresponding component control area. 5 Press MACRO again when the operation sequence you want to program is complete. Note “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Memory back-up If the remote control is without batteries for more than 2 minutes, or if exhausted batteries remain in the remote control, the contents of the memory may be cleared. If the memory is cleared, insert new batteries, set up the remote control code(s) and program any acquired functions that may have been cleared. 4 Press and hold CLEAR again for about 3 seconds. “WAIT” appears in the display window. If clearing was successful, “C;OK” appears in the display window. CLEAR y Once you have cleared a learned function for a button, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting, if you have set remote control codes). Note “L;ALL” and “FCTRY” may take about 30 seconds to complete. 78 REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 5 Press CLEAR to exit from the clear mode. CLEAR Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. Clearing individual functions ■ Clearing a learned function You can clear the function learned for a certain button in each control area. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 3 Press an input selector button to select the source component containing the function you want to clear. The selected component name appears in the display window. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press LEARN using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “LEARN” and the selected component name (ex. “DVD”) appear alternately in the display window. LEARN • Do not press and hold LEARN. If you hold it down for more than 3 seconds, the remote control enters the remote control code setting mode. • If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the learning mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press LEARN again. 79 ADVANCED OPERATION Notes REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES 4 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. FREQ/RDS EON 3 Press and hold CLEAR using a ballpoint pen or similar object, then press the macro button you want to clear for about 3 seconds. “C;OK” appears in the display window if clearing was successful. DTV MODE PTY SEEK START VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD REC REC DISC SKIP OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR DISC SKIP RE–NAME OFF y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 4. • If you continuously want to clear another function for another component, press SELECT k / n to select the component, then repeat step 4. • Once you clear a learned function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 5 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the learning mode. 6 Press LEARN again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 4. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. ■ Clearing a macro function You can clear the function programmed for a certain macro button. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP or SOURCE. AMP SOURCE TV 2 Press MACRO using a ballpoint pen or similar object. “MCR ?” appears in the display window. MACRO Note If you do not complete each of the following steps within 30 seconds, the macro programming mode will be automatically canceled. In this case, press MACRO again. 80 ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME y • If you continuously want to clear another function, repeat step 3. • Once you clear a programmed function, the button reverts to the factory setting (or to the manufacturer setting if you have set remote control codes). 4 Press CLEAR to exit the clearing mode. The remote control returns to the macro programming mode. 5 Press MACRO again to exit. Notes • “C;NG” appears in the display window if clearing was unsuccessful. In this case, start over from step 3. • “ERROR” appears in the display window if you press a button not indicated in the respective step, or if you press more than one button simultaneously. REMOTE CONTROL FEATURES Controlling each component Once you set the appropriate remote control codes, you can use this remote to control your other components. Note that some buttons may not correctly operate the selected component. Use the input selector buttons to select the component you want to operate. The remote control automatically switches to the appropriate control mode for that component. 1 2 + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV A B STANDBY POWER AUDIO SELECT SLEEP TV MUTE PRESET TOP EXIT TITLE PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R TV PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND 6 NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 7 DVD 8 SELECT AMP 3 + + RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT STEREO MUSIC ENTERTAIN MOVIE 1 2 3 4 EXTD SUR. THX STANDARD SELECT 5 6 7 1 MEMORY 2 9 0 TV VOL CH VOL – – – TOP TV INPUT 9 TV FREQ/RDS EON MUTE PRESET EXIT TITLE MENU BAND PRG SELECT 0 A 8 A SPEAKERS B +10 ENT. SOURCE TV MUTE 4 + STRAIGHT B MODE PTY SEEK START REC DISC SKIP PURE DIRECT 5 OFF ON MACRO LEARN CLEAR RE–NAME NIGHT AUDIO ENTER A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT Cable TV/ TV Satellite tuner DVD player/ VCR DVD recorder 1 2 3 AV POWER Power *1 Power *1 *2 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 Power *1 TV power *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 CH + TV channel + *2 Channel + Channel + Channel + TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 TV channel + *2 CH – TV channel – *2 Channel – Channel – Channel – TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV channel – *2 TV INPUT TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 Input TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV input *2 TV MUTE TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 Mute TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 TV mute *2 4 5 TITLE Title Title Title Title Band MENU Menu Menu Menu Program select*5 6 ENTER Menu enter Menu select Menu select k Menu up Menu up Menu up Preset up (1 to 8) n Menu down Menu down Menu down Preset down (1 to 8) Menu left Menu left Menu left Preset down (A to E) h Menu right Menu right Menu right RETURN Return Return Return Return 1-9, 0, +10 Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons Numeric buttons ll Search backward Search backward VCR search backward *3 VCR search backward *3 Search backward Search backward Search backward hh Search forward Search forward VCR search forward *3 VCR search forward *3 Search forward Search forward Search forward Search forward EON *4 b Skip backward Chapter/Skip backward a Skip forward Chapter/Skip forward REC/ DISC SKIP Disc skip (player) Rec (recorder) Rec *4 *5 Direction A/B VCR rec *3 Skip backward Preset stations (1-8) Search backward Direction back PTY MODE *4 Skip forward Skip forward Direction forward PTY START *4 Disc skip Rec Rec Stop s Stop Stop VCR stop Stop Stop Stop Pause Pause VCR pause *3 VCR pause *3 Pause Pause Pause Pause h Play Play VCR play *3 VCR play *3 Play Play Play Play AUDIO Audio DISPLAY Display Display Display Display Display Enter/recall Enter/ numeric button ENTER VCR stop *3 FREQ *4 Skip backward e *3 Preset up (A to E) Audio Enter Display Display*5 This button functions only when the original remote control of the component has a POWER button. These buttons can operate your TV without switching the input if the remote control code is set in DTV or PHONO. When the remote control code for your TV is set up in both the DTV and PHONO areas, priority is given to the signal in the DTV area. These buttons can operate your VCR without switching the input to VCR 1 if the remote control code is set in VCR 1. These buttons function for U.K. and Europe models only. These buttons function for the U.S.A. model only. 81 ADVANCED OPERATION *3 TV power *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 TV volume – *2 Volume – *2 TV power *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 TV volume + *2 Volume + *1 TV power *2 Tuner TV VOL – 0 A B TV power Power *1 *2 Tape deck TV VOL + VCR rec *3 Power *1 MD recorder/ CD recorder TV power 7 8 9 TV power VCR power *3 *2 CD player TV POWER l TV power Power *1 *2 LD player ZONE 2/ZONE 3 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 This unit allows you to configure a multi-room audio system. The Zone 2 and Zone 3 features enable you to set this unit to reproduce separate input sources in the main room, second room (Zone 2) and third room (Zone 3). You can control this unit from the second or third room using the supplied remote control. Only analog signals are sent to the second and third rooms. Any source you want to listen to in the second or third room must be connected using the analog (AUDIO L/R) input jacks on this unit. Zone 2/Zone 3 connections You need the following additional equipment to use the multi-room functions of this unit: • An infrared signal receiver in the second and/or third room. • An infrared emitter in the main room. This emitter transmits the infrared signals from the remote control in the second and/or third room to the main room (to a CD player or DVD player, for example). • An amplifier and speakers for the second and/or third room. • A video monitor for the second room. y OUT IN IN OUT CONTROL OUT This unit • Since there are many possible ways to connect and use this unit in a multi-room configuration, we recommend that you consult with your nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center for the Zone 2/Zone 3 connections that best meet your requirements. • Some YAMAHA models are able to connect directly to the CONTROL OUT jack on this unit. If you own these products, you may not need to use an infrared emitter. Up to six YAMAHA components can be connected as shown. ■ System configuration and connections example Using external amplifiers To use an external amplifier in Zone 2, select “External” in Zone2 Amplifier (page 67). ZONE 3 AUDIO OUT ZONE 2 VIDEO OUT ZONE 2 AUDIO OUT SP OUT Amplifier Amplifier MONITOR OUT DVD player (or other component) VIDEO IN AUDIO IN This unit MAIN SYSTEM Remote control Remote control Infrared signal receiver Infrared signal receiver ZONE 2 ZONE 3 Infrared emitter Main room Second room REMOTE OUT REMOTE 1 IN Third room REMOTE 2 IN Notes • When not using the main room, turn down the volume of this unit in the main room. Adjust the Zone 2/Zone 3 volume by using the amplifier in the second/third room. • To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. 82 ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Using this unit’s internal amplifier To use this unit’s internal amplifier, select “Internal” in Zone2 Amplifier 2 (page 67). R L + – PRESENCE/ ZONE 2 Second room This unit Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 from the front panel 3 You can control the input or adjust the volume level for Zone 2 and Zone 3 components using ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. 1 ZONE CONTROL Each time you press ZONE CONTROL, the front panel display changes as shown below, and the indicator for the currently selected zone flashes for approximately 5 seconds. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV Press ZONE CONTROL on the front panel repeatedly to choose the zone you selected in step 2. SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 ZONE 2 CD DVR/ VCR 2 ZONE 3 MAIN REC OUT/ZONE 2 y 2 • You must complete this step within 5 seconds of pressing ZONE CONTROL on the front panel. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is automatically canceled. In this case, press ZONE CONTROL again. • The initial setting is “ZONE 2” when both the Zone 2 and Zone 3 components connected to this unit are turned on. • If you selected MAIN in step 2, no indicator flashes on the front panel display when ZONE CONTROL is pressed. Press MAIN, ZONE 2 or ZONE 3 to select the zone you want to change the input for or adjust the volume level. ZONE ON/OFF MAIN ZONE 2 ZONE 3 You can choose from the following modes: ZONE2 ZONE3 MAIN Controls the Zone 2 component connected to the ZONE 2 AUDIO L/R jacks on this unit. Controls the Zone 3 component connected to the ZONE 3 AUDIO L/R jacks on this unit. Controls the main component (this unit). 4 Use the INPUT or VOLUME selector on the front panel to switch the input or adjust the volume level for the selected zone component. VOLUME INPUT or y You must complete this step within 5 seconds of performing step 2. Otherwise, the zone mode selection process is automatically canceled. In this case, repeat steps 2 and 3 again. 83 ADVANCED OPERATION Press each button repeatedly to turn the respective zone on or off. ZONE 2/ZONE 3 Controlling Zone 2/Zone 3 using the remote control ■ To control Zone 2/Zone 3 1 The supplied remote control can be used to control Zone 2/Zone 3. You can even select the input source and control components located in the main room directly from the second/third room regardless of the listening condition in the main room. Press SELECT k repeatedly to display “ZONE 2” or “ZONE 3” in the display window. SELECT ■ To enable Zone mode on the remote control You will be able to switch the remote control mode from one room to another, and use the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– to control the selected room. 1 or 2 Press SYSTEM POWER to turn Zone 2 or Zone 3 power on. 3 Press an input selector button to select the input source you want to listen to in the second/third room. The display window shows “2: name of selected input” or “3: name of selected input” if the remote control is in the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Set REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel to SOURCE/REMOTE. DVD DTV SOURCE/ REMOTE MD/TAPE CD-R TUNER CBL/SAT VCR 1 CD DVR/ VCR 2 REC OUT/ZONE 2 2 3 Repeat steps 1 through 3 of the procedure in “Setting remote control codes” on page 71. A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD Press l / h to select “L;AMP”. ENTER Note Signals input at V-AUX and PHONO jacks cannot be sent to Zone 2/Zone 3. 4 Press ENTER. “2000” appears in the display window. 5 Enter the code number “2001” or “2003”. For details, see page 72. 6 Press ENTER to set the number. “OK” appears in the display window if setting was successful. 4 You can control the unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3 by using the input selector, STANDBY, SYSTEM POWER, MUTE and VOLUME +/– buttons. SYSTEM POWER POWER TV AV STANDBY POWER A B AUDIO SELECT SLEEP PHONO TUNER CD MULTI CH IN SELECT AMP V-AUX CBL/SAT MD/TAPE CD-R DTV VCR 1 DVR/VCR2 DVD + + + TV VOL CH VOL SOURCE – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE TOP 7 Press LEARN to complete the Zone setup. The remote control will be able to operate this unit from Zone 2 or Zone 3. LEARN 84 TITLE PRESET EXIT TV * PURE DIRECT MENU * VOLUME +/– can be used only when Zone2 Volume or Zone3 Volume is set to “Variable” in the GUI menu (see page 67). ZONE 2/ZONE 3 5 ■ Special considerations for DTS software Press SELECT k / n to exit from the Zone 2/Zone 3 mode. Notes • The source in Zone 2 and the source available for recording are always the same. • “ZONE2” or “ZONE3” will appear in the display window only when k is pressed, and “SYSTM” only when n is pressed. ■ Turning on this unit or setting it to the standby mode SYSTEM POWER and STANDBY work differently depending on the selected mode that appears on the display window. • When normal, Zone 2 or Zone 3 mode is selected, you can turn on the main unit, Zone 2 or Zone 3 or set them to the standby mode individually. • When System mode is selected, or when “2000” or “2002” (see page 72) is selected as the amplifier library (L;AMP) code, pressing SYSTEM POWER turns on the main unit only. However, pressing STANDBY sets everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the standby mode simultaneously. LCD display Normal mode* Name of component For DVDs encoded with DTS Only 2 channel analog audio signals may be sent to the second/third room. Use the disc menu to set the DVD player’s mixed 2-channel left and right audio outputs to the PCM or Dolby Digital soundtrack. For CDs encoded in DTS To avoid unexpected noise, DO NOT USE the Zone 2/Zone 3 feature with CDs encoded in DTS. SYSTEM POWER/ STANDBY Turns on the main unit only or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 2 mode “Zone2” or “2:name of component” Turns on Zone 2 or sets it to the standby mode. Zone 3 mode “Zone3” or “3:name of component” Turns on Zone 3 or sets it to the standby mode. SYSTEM POWER: turns on the main unit only. STANDBY: sets everything (the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3) to the standby mode simultaneously. ADVANCED OPERATION System mode “SYSTM” The DTS signal is a digital bitstream. If you attempt to send the DTS signal to the second/third room you will only hear digital noise (that may damage your speakers). Thus, the following considerations and adjustments need to be made when playing DTS encoded discs. * “MAIN” appears for a few seconds when SYSTEM POWER or STANDBY is pressed. Note To control Zone 2 or Zone 3 again when System mode is selected and the main unit, Zone 2 and Zone 3 are in the standby mode, press SYSTEM POWER to turn on the main unit, then repeat steps 1 through 5 of the procedure in “To control Zone 2/Zone 3” on pages 84 and 85. 85 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS This unit has additional menus that are displayed in the front panel display. Advanced setup menu This menu offers additional operations to adjust and customize the way this unit operates. Change the initial settings (indicated in bold under each parameter) to reflect the needs of your listening environment. ■ PRESET (User preset) Use to reset all of this unit’s parameters to the initial factory settings with the exception of System Memory and Auto Setup settings. Choices: CANCEL, RESET • Select “CANCEL” if you do not want to reset this unit’s parameters. • Select “RESET” to reset this unit’s parameters. Note 1 Make sure this unit is in the standby mode. This setting does not affect advanced setup menu item parameters. 2 On the front panel, while holding down STRAIGHT/EFFECT, press STANDBY/ON. ■ REMOTE AMP (Remote control AMP ID) STRAIGHT STANDBY /ON EFFECT 3 Rotate PROGRAM to select the desired menu item. The name of the selected item appears in the front panel display. PROGRAM 4 5 Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to change the setting. Press STANDBY/ON to save the new setting This unit enters the standby mode. y The new setting is activated next time you turn on the power of this unit. Note The remote controls and VOLUME control on the front panel of this unit are ineffective while you are using the advanced setup menu. ■ SP IMP. (Speaker impedance) Use to set the impedance of this unit so that it matches that of your speakers. Choices: 6ΩMIN, 8ΩMIN • Select “6ΩMIN” for speakers 6 ohms or higher. • Select “8ΩMIN” for speakers 8 ohms or higher. 86 Use to set this unit’s ID for remote control recognition (see page 72). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2000” or “2001”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control amplifier library code is set to “2002” or “2003”. ■ REMOTE TUN (Remote control tuner ID) Use to set this unit’s tuner ID for remote control recognition (see page 72). Choices: ID1, ID2 • Select “ID1” when the remote control tuner library code is set to “2602”. • Select “ID2” when the remote control tuner library code is set to “2603”. ■ FAN MODE (Fan operation mode) Use to set the operation of this unit’s cooling fan. Choices: AUTO, CONT. • Select “AUTO” to set the fan to operate automatically according to the temperature of this unit. • Select “CONT.” to set the fan to operate continuously regardless of the temperature of this unit. < Asia and General models only > ■ TU (Tuner frequency step) Use to set the tuner frequency step according to the frequency spacing in your area. Choices: AM10/FM100, AM9/FM50 • Select “AM10/FM100” for North, Central and South America. • Select “AM9/FM50” for all other areas. ■ LANG. (GUI language) Use to set the language that appears in this unit’s GUI (graphical user interface) display. Choices: ENGLISH, JAPANESE, FRENCH, GERMAN You can select the language of your choice. FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS Front panel display system options menu This is a complimentary menu that allows you to access most GUI menu system option parameters without using a video monitor. Use the remote control to access and adjust each parameter. 3 Press k / n repeatedly to select an item, then press ENTER to enter the selected item. 4 Press k / n repeatedly to select the parameter you want to adjust. 5 Press ENTER, then press l / h repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 6 Press DISPLAY to exit. AMP + + + TV VOL CH VOL – – – TV MUTE TV INPUT MUTE SOURCE TOP PRESET TITLE EXIT TV PURE DIRECT MENU PRG SELECT BAND NIGHT AUDIO ENTER 1 3-5 A/B/C/D/E STRAIGHT RETURN DISPLAY EFFECT 2,6 y If you want to adjust another parameter, press RETURN to return to the previously selected menu item. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP. 2 Press DISPLAY on the remote control to enter the menu. ■ AUTO SETUP Item Sub-items Features SETUP AUTO • Use to specify the speaker parameters auto setup adjusts. • Corresponds to Setup Type in the GUI menu (see page 29). EQ NATURAL FRONT FLAT • Use to specify the equalizer characteristics auto setup uses. • Corresponds to Setup Menu – Equalizing in the GUI menu (see page 28). START [ENTER] 87 ADVANCED OPERATION • Use to activate the auto setup procedure. • Corresponds to Start in the GUI menu (see page 29). FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS ■ MANUAL SETUP 1 BASIC MENU Item Sub-items Features A)SPEAKER SET FRONT;;;;SMALL CENTER;;;;;SML SURR LR;;;;SML SURR B;;;SMLx2 PRESENCE;;NONE BASS OUT;;SWFR CrossOver;80Hz SWFR PHASE;NRM • Selects the output mode suitable for each speaker, the speakers for low-frequency signal output, and the cross over frequency. • Corresponds to Speaker Set in the GUI menu (see page 62). B)SP DISTANCE UNIT;;;;meters FRONT L;;3.00m FRONT R;;3.00m CENTER;;;3.00m SURR L;;;3.00m SURR R;;;3.00m SB L;;;;;3.00m SB R;;;;;3.00m SWFR;;;;;3.00m PRES L;;;3.00m PRES R;;;3.00m • Adjusts the delay time of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Distance in the GUI menu (see page 64). • Set the unit to “meters” or “feet” to input speaker distances in meters or in feet. UNIT;;;;;;feet FRONT L;;10.00ft FRONT R;;10.00ft CENTER;;;10.00ft SURR L;;;10.00ft SURR R;;;10.00ft SB L;;;;;10.00ft SB R;;;;;10.00ft SWFR;;;;;10.00ft PRES L;;;10.00ft PRES R;;;10.00ft C)SP LEVEL FL-----||----C-----||----FR-----||----SL-----||----SB.L----||----SB.R----||----SR-----||----SWFR-----||----PR.R----||----PR.L----||----- • Adjusts the output level of each speaker. • Corresponds to Speaker Level in the GUI menu (see page 65). D)TEST TONE TEST TONE;;OFF TEST TONE;;;ON • Outputs a test tone to calibrate your speaker levels. • Corresponds to Test Tone in the GUI menu (see page 62). E)THX SET SB Dis: <0.3m SB Dis: 0.3-1.2m SB Dis: >1.2m • Adjusts the THX settings. • Corresponds to THX Set in the GUI menu (see page 65). 88 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 2 SOUND MENU Item Sub-items Features A)LFE LEVEL SP LFE;;;;;;;0 HP LFE;;;;;;;0 • Adjusts the output level of the LFE channel for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to LFE Level in the GUI menu (see page 58). B)D.RANGE SP D.R;;;;MAX HP D.R;;;;MAX • Adjusts the dynamic range for Dolby Digital or DTS signals. • Corresponds to Dynamic Range in the GUI menu (see page 58). C)TONE CON FRQ BASS SP 350Hz TRBL SP 3.5kHz • Adjusts the tonal balance of the speakers and headphones. • Corresponds to Tone Control in the GUI menu (see page 60). • “BASS SP” and “TRBL SP” appear when no headphones are connected to this unit, and “BASS HP” and “TRBL HP” appear when headphones are connected to this unit. BASS HP 350Hz TRBL HP 3.5kHz D)AUDIO OPTION A.MUTE;;;;MUTE A.DELAY;;;;0ms PRch >SBch • Customizes overall audio settings for this unit. • Corresponds to Audio Option in the GUI menu (see page 60). 3 INPUT MENU Item A)I/O ASSIGN Sub-items • Assigns jacks according to the component to be used. • Corresponds to I/O assignment in the GUI menu (see page 55). B)INPUT TRIM DVD;;;;;0.0 • Adjusts the output volume of each jack. • Corresponds to Volume Trim in the GUI menu (see page 56). C)AUDIO SELECT >AUTO LAST • Selects the initial input mode of the source. • Corresponds to Audio Select in the GUI menu (see page 68). D)DECODER MODE >AUTO LAST • Selects the decoder used by this unit. • Corresponds to Decoder Mode in the GUI menu (see page 56). E)INPUT RENAME DVD ._ DVD • Changes the name of the input. • Corresponds to Rename in the GUI menu (see page 57). F)MULTI CH IN >6CH 8CH • Selects the number of audio channels input at the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • Corresponds to Multi CH Assign in the GUI menu (see page 57). ADVANCED OPERATION C.V[A] DVD C.V[B] DTV C.V[C]CBL/SAT OUT(1)MD/TAPE OUT(2) CD-R IN (3) CD IN (4) DVD IN (5) DTV IN (6) CBL/SAT IN (7) CD IN (8) DVD IN (9)DVR/VCR2 Features 89 FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MENUS 4 HDMI MENU Item Sub-items A)INPUT ASSIGN IN 1 IN 2 B)SUPPORT AUD. >4600 DVD CBL/SAT OTHER Features • Assigns input sources (such as a DVD player) to the HDMI IN jacks. • Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98). • Selects the HDMI audio signal playback source. • Corresponds to Support Audio in the GUI menu (see page 98). 5 i.LINK MENU Item Sub-items Features A)INPUT ASSIGN ----> ------> DVD • Selects the input assignment for registered i.LINK components. • Corresponds to Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 93). • “---” appears if no i.LINK component is registered. B)AUTO PLAY <---> ----> <-----X-- • Selects automatic playback for signals input from i.LINK components connected to this unit. • Corresponds to Auto Play in the GUI menu (see page 93). PLAYER PLAYER PLAYER PLAYER 6 OPTION MENU Item Sub-items Features A)DISPLAY SET DIMMER;;;;;;;0 WALL PAPER;;ON SHORT MSG. ON V CONV.;;;;;ON • Adjusts the GUI and front panel displays. • Corresponds to Display in the GUI menu (see page 66). B)MEMORY GUARD MEM.GUARD;;OFF • Locks the menu parameter settings. • Corresponds to Memory Guard in the GUI menu (see page 68). C)SURR. INI PRESS DSP Key • Initializes the parameters of all or a group of sound field programs. • Corresponds to Sur.Initialize in the GUI menu (see page 67). D)ZONE SET SP B;;;;MAIN • Customizes the Zone B parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). E)ZONE2 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. ZONE2 AMP;;EXT • Customizes the Zone 2 parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). F)ZONE3 SET OUT VOL;;;VAR. • Customizes the Zone 3 parameters. • Corresponds to Multi Zone in the GUI menu (see page 67). 90 USING I.LINK USING i.LINK What is i.LINK? Connecting i.LINK components i.LINK is a high-speed and bi-directional digital interface in compliance with a global standard approved by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE). i.LINK enables i.LINK-compatible components to send and receive digital audio signals (bitstreams such as Dolby Digital, and DTS; 2-channel linear PCM signals; DSD signals of Super Audio CD) over a single i.LINK cable. You can process audio signals by selecting between the DSD Direct mode where DSD signals are directly output to DSD-compatible audio DAC and the DSD mode where DSD signals are changed to PCM signals to ensure rich sound fields. i.LINK currently supports three different data transfer rates: 100 Mbps, 200 Mbps and 400 Mbps. ■ Daisy chain connections Use to link components together in a single chain. You can link up to 17 different components (including this unit) with this method. Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft) i.LINK component ■ i.LINK compatibility with this unit Use to link components in a branched configuration when 3 or more i.LINK connectors are available. You can link up to 63 different components (including this unit) with this method. Audio signal formats Compatible i.LINK components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio Multi-ch Linear PCM 5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz DVD-Audio Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video DSD 2ch/5ch/6ch 2.8224 MHz Super Audio CD i.LINK component i.LINK component i.LINK component Maximum single cable length: 4.5 m (14.75 ft) i.LINK component Notes • When making connections, use a 4-pin IEEE1394 cable that supports the S400 transmission speed. We also recommend using a cable less than 3.5 m (10 ft) in length. • The system will not work if components are connected in a loop (where the output signal is returned to the original component). • This unit does not output signals not input at the i.LINK jacks. • Because the data transfer rates may vary depending on the arrangement order of i.LINK components, it is advised that you link i.LINK components with the same data transfer rates. • Do not disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable from this unit or other i.LINK components while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. • When connecting the IEEE1394 cable to this unit’s i.LINK connectors, be sure to confirm the orientation of the connector before connecting the cable. Using excessive force to connect the cable to the connector in the wrong orientation will damage the connector. • Do not turn the power of i.LINK components on or off while data is transferred. Doing so may stop playback. If this happens, turn this unit to standby mode, and then turn it back on. • Other i.LINK components connected to this unit need to support DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection). • This unit supports i.LINK (AUDIO) components only. Because this unit does not support i.LINK (VIDEO), video signals, such as MPEG2-TS (BS digital, etc.) or DV (DV camera, DVD recorder, etc.), are not compatible with this unit. • If this unit is in the standby mode or turned off, signals cannot be output to the next i.LINK component. 91 ADVANCED OPERATION Audio signal types i.LINK component ■ Tree connections This unit supports hot plugging, a function that allows you to disconnect or connect the IEEE1394 cable while the power is turned on. This unit’s i.LINK interface was based on the following design standards: • IEEE1394 Std 1394a-2000 (Standard for a High Performance Serial Bus) • A&M Protocol (Audio and Music Data Transmission Protocol 2.1) • DTCP (Digital Transmission Content Protection) i.LINK component USING i.LINK Basic i.LINK operations Notes ■ Assigning i.LINK components When an i.LINK component is connected, this unit automatically recognizes the connection and registers up to 16 i.LINK components. Assigning an i.LINK component to a specific input allows you to select video and audio input signals from that component received via the i.LINK connection for simultaneous playback. Turn on the power of this unit and the connected i.LINK component. The i.LINK component is automatically recognized and registered in the following order: DVD → DTV → CBL/SAT → VCR1 → DVR/VCR2 → V-AUX → PHONO → CD → CD-R → MD/TAPE “LINK CHECK” flashes on the front panel display during this procedure. Notes • If you want to change the input assignment of a registered i.LINK component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 93) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). • Only one i.LINK component is assigned to each input and inputs that are already assigned are skipped. • If i.LINK components are assigned to all the inputs available, no more i.LINK components can be assigned, and audio signals input from these i.LINK components cannot be played back on this unit. • You can turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select whether you want the input to switch automatically when an input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected (see page 93). • Audio signals input at the i.LINK jacks are digitally output only when AUDIO SELECT is set to either AUTO or i.LINK as the input mode and REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Changing i.LINK Select parameters Use this menu to display information about registered i.LINK components, delete any unused registered components, or customize the operation and playback settings to be used when this unit is connected to an i.LINK component. 1 Switch on this unit and video monitor. 2 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. The top display appears. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE TV ■ Listening to playback from i.LINK components If an i.LINK component has been assigned to a specific input, perform the following steps to listen to playback from the registered i.LINK component. 1 2 Stereo/Surround Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input assigned to the i.LINK component. Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set “AUTO” or “i.LINK” as the input mode. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER A.SEL:i.LINK 92 Option Press k / n repeatedly to select i.LINK Select. dB L R PHONO SP A 3 Auto Setup PHONO or VCR 1 Basic VOLUME A.SEL:AUTO DVR/VCR2 Sound Manual Setup System Memory 3 SP A V-AUX Input Select Start playback on the connected i.LINK component. HDMI Information i.LINK Select Information Stereo/Surround Select Input Select Auto Play dB VOLUME L R 4 Press ENTER or h, then press k / n repeatedly to change the setting of the item you want to adjust. 5 Press EXIT. USING i.LINK ■ Information (Information) Use this feature to display the following information: operation status of registered i.LINK components, registered i.LINK components that have been deleted, and i.LINK signals that are currently being received. i.LINK Select > Information > Choices: Details, Delete, Protect, i.LINK Status • Select Details to display the following information about the selected i.LINK component. – Vendor: Displays the name of the manufacturer for your i.LINK component. – Model: Displays the model name of your i.LINK component. – Active (connected) or Non Active (not connected): Displays depending on whether your i.LINK component is connected. – Audio (for audio signals) or Non Audio (for nonaudio signals): Displays depending on whether your i.LINK component supports audio signal playback. – Assign: Displays the name of the input assigned to the selected i.LINK component. • Select Delete to delete the selected i.LINK component from the registered components list. To delete, press ENTER. You can only delete non-active and unprotected i.LINK components. • Select Protect to protect the selected i.LINK component from being accidentally deleted. • Select i.LINK Status to display operation status of i.LINK signals that are currently being received. You can also use this feature to delete all non-active and unprotected i.LINK components together at once. Note ■ Select (Input select) Use this feature to select which registered i.LINK component’s audio signal will be selected for playback. i.LINK Select > Select > Select the name of the desired component and press ENTER to switch the input. When you select the desired component, its manufacturer and model information appear along with its input assignment. Input Assign (Input assign) Use this feature if you want to change the input assignment of a registered i.LINK component. You can select to assign the i.LINK component to any of the various inputs (PHONO to V-AUX). i.LINK Select > Input Assign > Choices: PHONO, CD, CD-R, MD/TAPE, DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR 1, DVR/VCR 2, V-AUX, No Assignment 1 Press k / n repeatedly to select the i.LINK component you want to assign, then press h. 2 Press k / n repeatedly to select the input for the i.LINK component, then press ENTER. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). ■ Auto Play (Auto Play) Use this feature to turn on/off automatic playback when an i.LINK component is selected using the INPUT selector or to select whether you want the input to switch automatically when an input stream from a connected i.LINK component is detected. i.LINK Select > Auto Play > Choices: ← – → Player, → → → Player, ← ← ← Player, – X – Player • Select ← – → Player if you want both playback to start automatically on the i.LINK component selected using the INPUT selector, and you want this unit to automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component which has started playing back. • Select → → → Player if you want playback to start automatically on the i.LINK component selected using the INPUT selector. • Select ← ← ← Player if you want this unit to automatically switch its input to the i.LINK component which has started playing back. • Select – X – Player to disable automatic playback for the i.LINK components. This setting also prevents this unit from automatically switching its input to the i.LINK component. y This menu item is also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). 93 ADVANCED OPERATION Information about unregistered i.LINK components is not available in the GUI menu. These i.LINK components cannot be used on this unit although they can be output to other i.LINK components. ■ USING i.LINK i.LINK display messages ■ Status display messages The following messages may appear on the front panel display depending on the status of this unit. Message Contents Flashes while the i.LINK component connection is being checked.* LINK CHECK * Playback may stop while this message is displayed. ■ Error messages The following messages appear on the front panel display if a connection or registration error is detected. Message Cause The 1394 bus transmission band is full, and no more data can be transmitted. BUS FULL Remedy This problem may be resolved by disconnecting any unused i.LINK components. If an i.LINK component with a slow transmission speed (S100 or S200) is connected between this unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component which you want to play back, the bus may become full. Changing the connection order of the i.LINK components so that this unit and the i.LINK (AUDIO) component are directly connected may resolve this problem. CANNOT LINK The connected i.LINK component is not recognized because the connection is incomplete. Check that all i.LINK components are connected properly using an IEEE1394 cable. LOOP CONNECT This unit and the i.LINK component are connected in a loop (where the output signal is returned to the original component). Disconnect the IEEE1394 cable, then reconnect it in either a daisy chain or tree configuration. NODE OVER More than 63 i.LINK components (including this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of connected components. HOP OVER More than 15 i.LINK components are connected in a daisy chain configuration. Reduce the number of i.LINK components connected between the two end components to 15 or less. Reconnect the i.LINK components using tree-type connections. A new i.LINK component is connected to this unit while 16 i.LINK components are already registered. This unit can register up to 16 i.LINK components. REGIST. OVER Delete any unused registered i.LINK components from the registered components list and reconnect the i.LINK component you want to register. See “Changing i.LINK Select parameters” on page 92. ■ i.LINK indicator Lights up When an i.LINK component is connected, and this unit is playing back signals input via i.LINK connections. Flashes When an i.LINK component is connected, but this unit is playing back signals input via connections other than i.LINK or no signals are being input via i.LINK connections. Off When no i.LINK component is connected. 94 USING HDMI USING HDMI What is HDMI? HDMI (High-Definition Multimedia Interface) is the first industry-supported, uncompressed, all-digital A/V (audio/ video) interface. Providing an interface between any A/V source (such as a set-top box or A/V receiver) and an audio/video monitor (such as a digital television – DTV), HDMI supports standard, enhanced or high-definition video as well as multi-channel digital audio using a single cable. HDMI transmits all ATSC HDTV standards and supports 8-channel digital audio, with bandwidth to spare to accommodate future enhancements and requirements. When used in combination with HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection), HDMI provides a secure audio/video interface that meets the security requirements of content providers and system operators. For further information on HDMI, visit the HDMI website at “http://www.hdmi.org/”. This unit’s HDMI interface is based on the following standards: • HDMI 1.1 (High-Definition Multimedia Interface Specification Version 1.1) licensed by HDMI Licensing, LLC. • HDCP 1.1 (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection System Revision 1.1) licensed by Digital Content Protection, LLC. Notes ■ HDMI compatibility with this unit Audio signal types Audio signal formats Compatible HDMI components 2ch Linear PCM 2ch, 32-192 kHz, 16/20/24 bit CD, DVD-Video, DVD-Audio, etc. Multi-ch Linear PCM 5.1 ch, 32-96 kHz, 16/20/24 bit DVD-Audio, etc. Bitstream Dolby Digital, DTS DVD-Video, etc. 95 ADVANCED OPERATION • Video or audio signals input at audio input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. • Connect the HDMI OUT jack of other components (such as a DVD player) to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit. Connect the HDMI OUT jack of this unit to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack of other components (such as a projector). • You need a commercially available HDMI cable to connect this unit to other HDMI-compatible components. Use a HDMI cable shorter than 5 m (15 ft) to ensure stable operations and to prevent losses of video quality. • This unit is not compatible with HDCP-incompatible HDMI or DVI components. • Use a conversion cable (HDMI jack ↔ DVI-D jack) to connect this unit to other DVI components. • Digital video signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output from analog video output jacks. • GUI displays or analog video signals input at video input jacks cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack. To display analog video signals, connect them to analog video output jacks. • Audio signals input at input jacks other than the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 of this unit cannot be digitally output at the HDMI OUT jack. • This unit is not compatible with multi-stereo area audio signals of Super Audio CDs. You can connect devices (such as a DVD player) to the i.LINK jack or the MULTI CH INPUT jacks. • When connected to a DVD player, audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. In case the DVD player connected to this unit does not output DVD multichannel audio signals at the HDMI OUT jack, connect the DVD player to the i.LINK jack or analog multi-channel audio input jacks. • When CPPM copy-protected DVD audio plays back, video and audio signals may not be output depending on the type of the DVD player. • Video and audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack cannot be output at the HDMI OUT jack when this unit is set to the standby mode or the power is turned off. • When connecting other HDMI components to this unit, refer to the instruction manuals for those components. • When HDMI audio signals are output from components like a DVD player, the audio signal format (such as sampling frequencies) may be restricted depending on the HDMI video signal format. • Do not disconnect or connect the HDMI cable from this unit or turn off the power of the HDMI/DVI components connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit while data is being transferred. Doing so may disrupt playback or cause noise. USING HDMI Connecting HDMI components See page 23 for connection information. ■ HDMI video and audio signal flow Video or audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack you selected using Select in the GUI menu (see page 97) or the INPUT selector on the front panel are output at the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. In addition, audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to speakers, headphones and REC OUT. DVD player HDMI OUT Video signals Audio signals This unit HDMI IN HDMI OUT Audio signals TV Video signals Audio signals HDMI IN Speakers Headphones REC OUT Notes • Digital audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks are not output at the analog AUDIO OUT jacks. • Audio signals input at the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack are output to REC OUT only when REC OUT/ZONE 2 on the front panel is set to SOURCE/REMOTE. Some audio signals may not be output to REC OUT depending on the signal type. ■ Connecting HDMI video components HDMI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 HDMI OUT Digital video signals Component coaxial Component D Component coaxial Component D Analog video signals S-video S-video Analog video signals Component RCA Component RCA Analog video signals ■ Connecting HDMI audio components i.LINK (AUDIO) HDMI IN 1 HDMI IN 2 HDMI OUT Digital audio signals Digital audio (optical/coaxial) Digital audio (optical/coaxial) Digital audio signals Analog audio Analog audio Analog audio signals ■ Error messages In case of an error, an error message appears on the GUI or the front panel display. Device Over: more than 5 HDMI components (including this unit) are connected. Reduce the number of the connected HDMI components HDCP Error: HDCP testing failed. Check whether the connected HDMI components support HDCP copy protection standards. 96 ■ HDMI indicator Lights up when an HDMI component is connected, and this unit is playing back audio signals input via HDMI. Flashes when an HDMI component is connected, but this unit is playing back audio signals input via connections other than HDMI or no audio signals are being input via HDMI connections. Turns off when no HDMI component is connected. USING HDMI Basic HDMI operations Changing HDMI parameters ■ Assigning HDMI components Assigning an HDMI component to a specific input allows you to select the video input signals from that component together with the audio signals received via the HDMI connection for simultaneous playback. You can change HDMI parameters in the GUI or the front panel display menu. Note Display Speaker B HDMI Select i.LINK Select Input Assign Stereo/Surround Support Audio If you want to change the input assignment of a registered HDMI component, use Input Assign in the GUI menu (see page 98) or INPUT ASSIGN in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). y ■ Listening to playback from HDMI components Input Assign and Support Audio are also available in the front panel display system options menu (see page 90). However, Select and Information are only available in the GUI menu. Perform the following steps to listen to playback from a registered HDMI component. If the HDMI component has been assigned to a specific input 1 Rotate the INPUT selector to select the input assigned to the HDMI component. 2 Press AUDIO SELECT repeatedly to set “AUTO” or “HDMI” as the input mode. V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER ■ Select (Select) Use this feature to select the HDMI component assigned to either the HDMI IN or HDMI IN 2 jack of this unit. HDMI > Select > Choices: IN 1, IN 2 Select IN 1 or IN 2 to choose the HDMI component assigned to either HDMI input jack. PHONO SP A Display Speaker B Select IN 1 Input Assign IN 2 Support Audio Zone 3 Volume dB VOLUME A.SEL:AUTO L R or Note V-AUX DVR/VCR2 VCR 1 CBL/SAT DTV DVD MD/TAPE CD-R CD TUNER PHONO SP A A.SEL:HDMI Start playback on the connected HDMI component. VOLUME L R When the HDMI component connected to the selected HDMI IN jack is not transmitting audio signals (e.g. Super Audio CD or DVI) and AUDIO SELECT is set to AUTO, audio signals input at the analog or other digital input jacks will be selected to play back. It may take a few seconds before this unit outputs sound. 97 ADVANCED OPERATION 3 dB USING HDMI ■ Input Assign (Input assign) This unit comes with two HDMI IN jacks (HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2). As a default settings, HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 are assigned to DVD and CBL/SAT respectively, but you may alter these settings if necessary. The same HDMI component cannot be assigned to the HDMI IN 1 and HDMI IN 2 jacks at the same time. HDMI > Input Assign > Choices: IN 1, IN 2 Select the HDMI component you want to assign to the HDMI IN 1 or HDMI IN 2 jack. Assignable HDMI components: DVD, DTV, CBL/SAT, VCR1, DVR/VCR2, V-AUX Display Speaker B IN 1 DVD IN 2 DTV Input Mode CBL/SAT ■ Support Audio (Support audio) Use this feature to select whether to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit or on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. HDMI > Support Audio > Choices: RX-V4600, Other • Select RX-V4600 to play back HDMI audio signals on this unit. The audio signals input at the HDMI IN jacks of this unit are not output to the HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. • Select Other to play back HDMI audio signals on another HDMI component connected to the HDMI OUT jack of this unit. 98 Select Dimmer Input Assign Speaker B Support Audio RX-V4600 Information Other Input Mode Zone 3 Volume ■ Information (Information) Use this feature to display information about audio signals input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. HDMI > Information > Choices: Input, Output Output Model --Type --Format --Input --- Input Mode Error Display Input Displaying information about HDMI video signal input HDMI > Information > Input > Model: displays the model name of the HDMI component connected to the HDMI IN jack you selected. Some HDMI components may not provide this unit with their model information. Type: displays the type of video signals (HDMI or DVI) input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. Format: displays the format of video signals input at the HDMI IN jack you selected. Input: displays the name of the HDMI IN jack you selected. Error: displays information about an error. Displaying information about HDMI video signal output HDMI > Information > Output > Model: displays the model name of the component connected to the HDMI OUT jack you selected. Type: displays the type of component (HDMI or DVI) connected to the HDMI OUT jack. Error: displays information about an error. EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS EDITING SOUND FIELD PARAMETERS What is a sound field? A significant factor that creates the rich, full tones of a live instrument are the multiple reflections from the walls of the room. In addition to making the sound “live”, these reflections enable us to tell where the player is situated, and the size and shape of the room in which we are sitting. ■ Elements of a sound field In any environment, in addition to the direct sound coming straight to our ears from the player’s instrument, there are two distinct types of sound reflections that combine to make up the sound field: Changing parameter settings You can enjoy good quality sound with the factory preset parameters. Although you do not have to change the initial settings, you can change some of the parameters to better suit the input source or your listening room. The following parameters are not always found in every program. 1 Set AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then press TOP on the remote control. AMP TOP TITLE SOURCE Early reflections Reflected sounds reach our ears extremely rapidly (50 ms – 100 ms after the direct sound), after reflecting from one surface only – for example, from the ceiling or a wall. Early reflections help add clarity to the direct sound. TV 2 Select Stereo/Surround, then press h. Reverberations These are caused by reflections from more than one surface – walls, ceiling, the back of the room – so numerous that they merge together to form a continuous sonic “afterglow”. They are non-directional, and lessen the clarity of the direct sound. Direct sound, early reflections and subsequent reverberation taken together help us to determine the subjective size and shape of the room, and it is this information that the digital sound field processor reproduces in order to create sound fields. If you could create the appropriate early reflections and subsequent reverberations in your listening room, you would be able to create your own listening environment. The acoustics in your room could be changed to those of a concert hall, a dance floor, or virtually any size room at all. This ability to create sound fields at will is exactly what YAMAHA has done with the digital sound field processor. STEREO 3 MUSIC Munich ENTERTAINMENT Vienna MOVIE THEATER Freiburg Select the desired sound field program, then press h to access and adjust. Munich DSP Level Vienna Init. Delay Freiburg Room Size Note You cannot change parameter values when Memory Guard is set to “On”. If you want to change the parameter values, set Memory Guard to “Off” (see page 68). ■ Resetting parameters to the factory values To reset all parameters Use Sur.Initialize (see page 67). 99 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Memory back-up The memory back-up circuit prevents the stored data from being lost even if this unit is set in the standby mode, the power cable is disconnected from the AC outlet, or the power supply is temporarily cut due to power failure. However, if the power is cut for more than one week, the parameter values will return to the factory settings. If this happens, edit the parameter value again. SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS You can adjust the values of certain digital sound field parameters so the sound fields are recreated accurately in your listening room. Not all of the following parameters are found in every program. ■ DSP Level (DSP level) Function: Description: Adjusts the level of all the DSP effect sounds within a narrow range. Depending on the acoustics of your listening room, you may want to increase or decrease the DSP effect level relative to the level of the direct sound. Control Range: –6 dB to +3 dB ■ Init. Delay (Initial delay) Function: Description: Control range: Changes the apparent distance the sound source is from the reflection face by adjusting the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection heard by the listener. The smaller the value, the closer the reflection face seems to the sound source. The larger the value, the farther it seems. For a small room, set to a small value. For a large room, set to a large value. 1 to 99 ms Source sound Time Initial delay Level Level Level Early reflections Initial delay Time Initial delay Time Sound source Reflection face Small value = 1 ms Large value = 99 ms ■ Room Size (Room size) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. The larger the value, the larger the surround sound field becomes. As the sound is repeatedly reflected around a room, the larger the hall is, the longer the time between the original reflected sound and the subsequent reflections. By controlling the time between the reflected sounds, you can change the apparent size of the virtual venue. Changing this parameter from one to two, doubles the apparent length of the room. 0.1 to 2.0 Time Early reflections Time Level Level Level Source sound Time Sound source Small value = 0.1 100 Large value = 2.0 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Liveness (Liveness) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the reflectivity of the virtual walls in the hall by changing the rate at which the early reflections decay. The early reflections of a source sound decay much faster in a room with acoustically absorbent wall surfaces than in one which has highly reflective surfaces. A room with acoustically absorbent surfaces is referred to as “dead”, while a room with highly reflective surfaces is referred to as “live”. The LIVENESS parameter lets you adjust the early reflection decay rate, and thus the “liveness” of the room. 0 to 10 Source sound Time Level Dead Level Level Live Time Small reflected sound Small value = 0 Time Large reflected sound Large value = 10 ■ Sur.Init.Delay (Surround initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection on the surround side of the sound field. You can only adjust this parameter when at least two front channels and two surround channels are used. 1 to 49 ms ■ Sur.Room Size (Surround room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 ■ Sur.Liveness (Surround liveness) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual walls in the surround sound field. 0 to 10 ■ SB.Init.Delay (Surround back initial delay) Function: Control range: Adjusts the delay between the direct sound and the first reflection in the surround back sound field. 1 to 49 ms ■ SB.Room Size (Surround back room size) Function: Control range: Adjusts the apparent size of the surround back sound field. 0.1 to 2.0 Function: Control range: ADDITIONAL INFORMATION ■ SB.Liveness (Surround back liveness) Adjusts the apparent reflectivity of the virtual wall in the surround back sound field. 0 to 10 101 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Rev. Time (Reverberation time) Function: Description: Control range: Adjusts the amount of time it takes for the dense, subsequent reverberation sound to decay by 60 dB (at 1 kHz). This changes the apparent size of the acoustic environment over an extremely wide range. The longer the reverberation time, the more “live” the listening room environment seems. The shorter the reverberation time, the more “dead” the listening room environment seems. 1.0 to 5.0 s Source sound Reverberation Reverberation Early reflections 60 dB 60 dB Reverberation time Sound source 60 dB Reverberation time Reverberation time Short reverberation Long reverberation Large value = 5.0 s Small value = 1.0 s ■ Rev. Delay (Reverberation delay) Function: Description: Level Control range: Adjusts the time difference between the beginning of the direct sound and the beginning of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the later the reverberation sound begins. A later reverberation sound makes you feel like you are in a larger acoustic environment. 0 to 250 ms Source sound (dB) 60 dB Reverberation Time Reverberation delay Reverberation time ■ Rev. Level (Reverberation level) Adjusts the volume of the reverberation sound. The larger the value, the stronger the reverberation becomes. 0 to 100% Level Function: Description: Control range: Source sound Reverberation level Time 102 SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Dialogue Lift (Dialog lift) Function: Description: Choices: Adjusts the height of the front and center channel sounds by assigning some of the front and center channel elements to the presence speakers. The larger the parameter, the higher the position of the front and center channel sound. 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 For 7ch Stereo Function: Control range: Adjusts the volume level for each channel in 7-channel stereo mode. 0 – 100% Center Level (Center level) Surround L Level (Surround left level) Surround R Level (Surround right level) Sur. Back Level (Surround back level) Presence L Level (Presence left level) Presence R Level (Presence right level) For PL x Music and PL Music Panorama (Panorama) Function: Extends the front stereo image to include the surround speakers for a wraparound effect. Choices: Off, On Dimension (Dimension) Function: Gradually adjusts the sound field either towards the front or towards the rear. Control range: –3 (towards the rear) to +3 (towards the front), initial setting is STD (standard) Center Width (Center width) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. A larger value adjusts the center image towards the front left and right speakers. Control range: 0 (center channel sound is output only from center speaker) to 7 (center channel sound is output only from front left and right speakers), initial setting is 3 For Neo:6 Music Center Image (Center image) Function: Adjusts the center image from all three front speakers to varying degrees. Control range: 0.0 to 1.0 FOCUS Function: Adjusts the clearness of a sound image by elevating the perception of the sound image to compensate for non-optimally placed speakers from a lower location. A larger value makes speakers sound as if they are positioned at ear level. Control range: 0 to 8 TruBass Function: Adjusts the lower register by producing the perception of improved low frequency performance. A larger value improves bass even without a subwoofer and provides deeper, richer bass in the presence of a subwoofer. Control range: 0 to 8 103 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION For SRS Circle Surround SOUND FIELD PARAMETER DESCRIPTIONS ■ Decode Type (Decoder type) For MOVIE THEATER Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using MOVIE THEATER programs. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 For THX Cinema Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using THX Cinema. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 For SURROUND Standard Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Standard. Pro Logic / PL Movie / PL Music / PL Game / PL x Movie / PL x Music / PL x Game / Neo:6 Cinema / Neo:6 Music / CS Cinema* / CS Music* (* U.S.A. model only) For SURROUND Enhanced Function: Choices: Selects the decoder used to playback 2-channel sources using SURROUND Enhanced. Pro Logic / Pro Logic / Pro Logic x / Neo:6 Note Pro Logic x appears when the surround back speakers are available, and Pro Logic available. appears when the surround back speakers are not ■ Initialize (Initialize) Function: Choices: Initializes the parameters for each sound field subprogram. NO, YES Note If you want to initialize all of the parameters within a sound field program group, use Sur.Initialize (see page 67). 104 TROUBLESHOOTING TROUBLESHOOTING Refer to the chart below when this unit does not function properly. If the problem you are experiencing is not listed below or if the instruction below does not help, set this unit to the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, and contact the nearest authorized YAMAHA dealer or service center. ■ General Problem This unit fails to turn on when STANDBY/ ON (or SYSTEM POWER) is pressed, or enters in the standby mode soon after the power has been turned on. No sound Remedy Refer to page The power cable is not connected or the plug is not completely inserted. Connect the power cable firmly. The impedance setting is incorrect. Set the impedance to match your speakers. The protection circuitry has been activated. Make sure all speaker wire connections on this unit and on all speakers are secure and that the wire for each connection does not touch anything other than its respective connection. This unit has been exposed to a strong external electric shock (such as lightning and strong static electricity). Set this unit in the standby mode, disconnect the power cable, plug it back in after 30 seconds, then use it normally. — Incorrect input or output cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18–23 The optimizer microphone is connected. Disconnect the optimizer microphone. The input mode is set to “i.LINK”, “HDMI”, “Coax/Opt” or “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto”. No appropriate input source has been selected. Select an appropriate input source with INPUT, MULTI CH INPUT or the input selector buttons on the remote control. 33 Speaker connections are not secure. Secure the connections. 15 The front speakers to be used have not been selected properly. Select the front speakers by pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the front panel (or by setting AMP/SOURCE/TV to AMP, then pressing SPEAKERS A or B on the remote control). 33 The volume is turned down. Turn up the volume. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE or any operation buttons of this unit to cancel a mute and adjust the volume. 35 The input mode is set to “Analog” while playing a source encoded with a DTS signal. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”. The signals this unit cannot reproduce are being received from a source component e.g.: a CD-ROM. Play a source whose signals this unit can reproduce. The i.LINK components connected to this unit do not support the DTCP copy protection standards. Connect i.LINK components that support the DTCP copy protection standards. — The HDMI components connected to this unit do not support the HDCP copy protection standards. Connect HDMI components that support the HDCP copy protection standards. — Support Audio is set to Other and HDMI audio signals are not being played back on this unit. Set Support Audio to RX-V4600 in the GUI menu. The output and input for the picture are connected to different types of video jacks. Turn on the video conversion function. — 26 15–17 — 40 40 — 98 66 105 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION No picture Cause TROUBLESHOOTING Problem The sound suddenly goes off. Only the speaker on one side can be heard. Cause Remedy Refer to page Check that the impedance selector setting is correct. 26 Check the speaker wires are not touching each other and then turn this unit back on. — The sleep timer has turned the unit off. Turn on the power, and play the source again. — The sound is muted. Press MUTE to cancel a mute. 35 Incorrect cable connections. Connect the cables properly. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. 18 Incorrect balance settings in the GUI menu. Adjust the Speaker Level settings. The protection circuitry has been activated because of a short circuit, etc. 65 Only the center speaker outputs substantial sound. When playing a monaural source with a CINEMA DSP program, the source signal is directed to the center channel, and the front and surround speakers output effect sounds. No sound from the effect speakers The sound field programs are turned off. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn them on. You are using a source or program combination that does not output sound from all channels. Try another sound field program. The output level of the center speaker is set to minimum. Raise the level of the center speaker. Center is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the center speaker. One of the HiFi DSP programs (except for 7ch Stereo) has been selected. Try another sound field program. The output level of the surround speakers is set to minimum. Raise the output level of the surround speakers. Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 A monaural or stereo source is being played with STRAIGHT. Press STRAIGHT/EFFECT to turn on the sound fields. — Presence speakers are selected. Select “Surround Back” in PR/SB Select. 61 Surround is set to “None” in Speaker Set. If the surround left and right speakers are set to “None”, surround back speakers are automatically set to “None”. Select the appropriate setting for the surround left and right speakers. 62 Surround Back is set to “None” in Speaker Set. Select “Small x1”, “Small x2”, “Large x1” or “Large x2”. 63 Bass Out is set to “Front” when a Dolby Digital or DTS signal is being played. Select “SWFR” or “Both”. Bass Out is set to “SWFR” or “Front” when a 2-channel source is being played. Select “Both”. No sound from the center speaker No sound from the surround speakers No sound from the surround back speakers No sound from the subwoofer The source does not contain low bass signals. 106 39 34 65 62 34 62 63 63 TROUBLESHOOTING Problem Dolby Digital or DTS sources cannot be played. (Dolby Digital or DTS indicator on the front panel display does not light up.) Cause Remedy The connected component is not set to output Dolby Digital or DTS digital signals. Make an appropriate setting following the operations instructions for your component. The input mode is set to “Analog”. Set the input mode to “Auto” or “Coax/Opt”. Refer to page — 40 Incorrect cable connections. Firmly connect the audio plugs. If the problem persists, the cables may be defective. — No connection from the turntable to the GND terminal. Connect the grounding cord of your turnable to the GND terminal of this unit. 22 The volume level is low while playing a record. The record is being played on a turntable with an MC cartridge. The turntable should be connected to this unit through an MC-head amplifier. The volume level cannot be increased, or the sound is distorted. The component connected to the OUT (REC) jacks of this unit is turned off. Turn on the power to the component. The sound effect cannot be recorded. It is not possible to record the sound effect with a recording component. A source cannot be recorded by a digital recording component connected to this DIGITAL OUTPUT jack. The source component is not connected to this unit’s DIGITAL INPUT jacks. A “humming” sound can be heard. 22 — Connect the source component to the DIGITAL INPUT jacks. 18–22 Some components cannot record the Dolby Digital or DTS sources. A source cannot be recorded by an analog component connected to the AUDIO OUT jacks. The source component is not connected to this unit’s analog AUDIO IN jacks. Connect the source component to the analog AUDIO IN jacks. The sound field parameters and some other settings on this unit cannot be changed. Memory Guard is set to “On”. This unit does not operate properly. The internal microcomputer has been frozen by an external electric shock (such as lightning or excessive static electricity) or by a power supply with low voltage. Disconnect the AC power cable from the outlet and then plug it in again after about 30 seconds. “CHECK SP WIRES” appears on the front panel display. Speaker cables are short circuited. Make sure all speaker cables are connected correctly. There is noise interference from digital or radiofrequency equipment, or this unit. This unit is too close to the digital or radio-frequency equipment. The picture is disturbed. The video source uses scrambled or encoded signals to prevent dubbing. This unit suddenly enters the standby mode. The internal temperature becomes too high and the overheat protection circuitry has been activated. 18–22 Select “Off”. 68 — 15 — Wait for about 1 hour until this unit cools down and then turn it back on. — 107 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION Move this unit further away from such equipment. TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Tuner Problem AM 108 Remedy Refer to page The characteristics of FM stereo broadcasts may cause this problem when the transmitter is too far away or the antenna input is poor. Check the antenna connections. Try using a high-quality directional FM antenna. 24 Use the manual tuning method. 41 There is distortion, and clear reception cannot be obtained even with a good FM antenna. There is multipath interference. Adjust the antenna position to eliminate multipath interference. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is too weak. Previously preset stations can no longer be tuned in. This unit has been disconnected for a long period. Preset the stations again. The desired station cannot be tuned in with the automatic tuning method. The signal is weak or the antenna connections are loose. Tighten the AM loop antenna connections and orient it for the best reception. — Use the manual tuning method. 41 There are continuous crackling and hissing noises. Noises result from lightning, fluorescent lamps, motors, thermostats and other electrical equipment. Use an outdoor antenna and a ground wire. This will help somewhat, but it is difficult to eliminate all noise. There are buzzing and whining noises. A TV set is being used nearby. Move this unit away from the TV. FM stereo reception is noisy. FM Cause Use a high-quality directional FM antenna. Use the manual tuning method. — 24 41 42 — — TROUBLESHOOTING ■ Remote control Problem The remote control does not work or function properly. Wrong distance or angle. Refer to page The remote control will function within a maximum range of 6 m (20 ft) and no more than 30 degrees offaxis from the front panel. 9 Direct sunlight or lighting (from an inverter type of fluorescent lamp, etc.) is striking the remote control sensor of this unit. Reposition this unit. The batteries are weak. Replace all batteries. 4 AMP/SOURCE/TV is set incorrectly. Set AMP/SOURCE/TV correctly. When operating this unit, set it to the AMP position. When operating the component selected by the input selector button, set it to the SOURCE position. When operating the TV set in the DTV or PHONO area, set it to the TV position. — Set the remote control code correctly using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 71 Try setting another code of the same manufacturer using “LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES” at the end of this manual. 71 The remote control code was not correctly set. The remote control does not “learn” new functions. Remedy Cause — This unit’s library code and the remote control ID do not match. Switch the library code. Even if the remote control code is correctly set, there are some models that do not respond to the remote control. Program the necessary functions independently into the programmable buttons using the Learn feature. The batteries of this remote control and/or the other remote control are too weak. Replace the batteries. The distance between the two remote controls is too much or too little. Place the remote controls at the proper distance. The signal coding or modulation of the other remote control is not compatible with this remote control. Learning is not possible. Memory capacity is full. Delete other unnecessary functions to make room for the new functions. 71 73 4 73 — 78 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 109 GLOSSARY GLOSSARY Audio formats ■ Dolby Digital Dolby Digital is a digital surround sound system that gives you completely independent multi-channel audio. It provides 5 full-range audio channels; 3 front channels (left, center, and right), and 2 surround stereo channels. An additional channel especially for bass effects, called LFE (low frequency effect) is also provided giving the system a total of 5.1-channels (LFE is counted as a 0.1 channel). By using 2-channel stereo for the surround speakers, more accurate moving sound effects and surround sound environment are possible than with Dolby Surround. The wide dynamic range (maximum to minimum volume) reproduced by the 5 full-range channels and the precise sound orientation generated using digital sound processing provide listeners with a previously unheard of excitement and realism. ■ Dolby Digital EX Dolby Digital EX creates 6 full-bandwidth output channels from 5.1-channel sources. This is done by using a matrix decoder that derives 3 surround channels from the 2 in the original recording. For best results, Dolby Digital EX should be used with movie sound tracks recorded with Dolby Digital Surround EX. With this additional channel, you can experience more dynamic and realistic moving sound especially with scenes that have “flyover” and “fly-around” effects. ■ Dolby Pro Logic Dolby Pro Logic is an improved technique used to decode vast numbers of existing Dolby Surround software. This new technology enables a 5-channel playback with 2 front left and right channels, 1 center channel, and 2 surround left and right channels (instead of only 1 surround channel for conventional Pro Logic technology). Music and Game modes are also available for 2-channel sources in addition to the Movie mode. ■ Dolby Pro Logic x Dolby Pro Logic x is a new technology enabling 6.1 or 7.1 multi-channel playback from 2-channel or multichannel sources. There is a Music mode for music, a Movie mode for movies and a Game mode for games. 110 ■ Dolby Surround Dolby Surround uses a 4 channel analog recording system to reproduce realistic and dynamic sound effects: 2 front left and right channels (stereo), a center channel for dialog (monaural), and a surround channel for special sound effects (monaural). The surround channel reproduces sound within a narrow frequency range. Dolby Surround is widely used with nearly all video tapes and laser discs, and in many TV and cable broadcasts as well. The Dolby Pro Logic decoder built into this unit employs a digital signal processing system that automatically stabilizes the volume on each channel to enhance moving sound effects and directionality. ■ DSD Direct Stream Digital (DSD) technology stores audio signals on digital storage media, such as Super Audio CDs. Using DSD, signals are stored as single bit values at a high-frequency sampling rate of approximately 2.8224 MHz, while noise shaping and oversampling are used to reduce distortion, a common occurrence with very high quantization of audio signals. Due to the a high sampling rate, better audio quality can be achieved than that offered by the PCM format used for normal audio CDs. ■ DTS 96/24 DTS 96/24 offers an unprecedented level of audio quality for multi-channel sound on DVD-Video, and is fully backward-compatible with all DTS decoders. “96” refers to a 96 kHz sampling rate (compared to the typical 48 kHz sampling rate). “24” refers to 24-bit word length. DTS 96/24 offers sound quality transparent to the original 96/24 master, and 96/24 5.1-channel sound with full-quality full-motion video for music programs and motion picture soundtracks on DVD-video. ■ DTS (Digital Theater Systems) Digital Surround DTS digital surround was developed to replace the analog soundtracks of movies with a 6-channel digital sound track, and is now rapidly gaining popularity in movie theaters around the world. Digital Theater Systems Inc. has developed a home theater system so that you can enjoy the depth of sound and natural spatial representation of DTS digital surround in your home. This system produces practically distortion-free 6-channel sound (technically, left, right and center channels, 2 surround channels, plus an LFE 0.1 channel as a subwoofer, for a total of 5.1-channels). This unit incorporates a DTS-ES decoder that enables 6.1- channel reproduction by adding a surround back channel to the existing 5.1-channel format. GLOSSARY ■ Neo:6 Neo:6 decodes conventional 2-channel sources for 6 channel playback by. It enables playback with the fullrange channels with higher separation comparable to digital discrete signal playback. Two modes are available; “Music mode” for playing music sources and “Cinema mode” for movies. ■ PCM (Linear PCM) Linear PCM is a signal format under which an analog audio signal is digitized, recorded and transmitted without using any compression. This is used as a method of recording CDs and DVD audio. The PCM system uses a technique for sampling the size of the analog signal per very small unit of time. Standing for “pulse code modulation”, the analog signal is encoded as pulses and then modulated for recording. ■ SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) SRS CS (SRS Circle Surround ) is a high-performance 6.1 channel matrix surround sound decoding system. It is the next-generation of the original SRS Circle Surround technology, incorporating powerful industry-first features including the dialog clarity enhancement technology and added cinema-like bass to the front channels and subwoofer. Sound field programs ■ CINEMA DSP Since the Dolby Surround and DTS systems were originally designed for use in movie theaters, their effect is best felt in a theater having many speakers and designed for acoustic effects. Since home conditions, such as room size, wall material, number of speakers, and so on, can differ so widely, it’s inevitable that there are differences in the sound heard. Based on a wealth of actually measured data, YAMAHA CINEMA DSP uses YAMAHA original sound field technology to combine Dolby Pro Logic, Dolby Digital and DTS systems to provide the visual and audio experience of a movie theater in the listening room of your own home. ■ SILENT CINEMA ■ Virtual CINEMA DSP ■ ASA (Advanced Speaker Array) ASA is a proprietary THX technology which processes the sound fed to 2 side and 2 back surround speakers to provide the optimal surround sound experience. When you set up your home theater system using all eight speaker outputs (Left, Center, Right, Surround Right, Surround Back Right, Surround Back Left, Surround Left and Subwoofer) placing the two Surround Back speakers close together facing the front of the room will provide the largest sweet spot. If for practical reasons you have to place the Surround Back speakers apart, you will need to go THX Audio Set-up screen and choose the setting that most closely corresponds to the speaker spacing, which will re-optimized the surround sound-field. ASA is used in three new modes: THX Select2 Cinema, THX Music Mode and THX Games Mode. ■ ITU-R ITU-R is the radio communication sector of the ITU (International Telecommunication Union). ITU-R recommends a standard speaker placement which is used in many critical listening rooms, such as mastering studios. ■ LFE 0.1 channel This channel is for the reproduction of low bass signals. The frequency range for this channel is 20 Hz to 120 Hz. This channel is counted as 0.1 because it only enforces a low frequency range compared to the full-range reproduced by the other 5/6 channels in Dolby Digital or DTS 5.1/6.1-channel systems. ■ Sampling frequency and number of quantized bits When digitizing an analog audio signal, the number of times the signal is sampled per second is called the sampling frequency, while the degree of fineness when converting the sound level into a numeric value is called the number of quantized bits. The range of rates that can be played back is determined based on the sampling rate, while the dynamic range representing the sound level difference is determined by the number of quantized bits. In principle, the higher the sampling frequency, the wider the range of frequencies that can be played back, and the higher the number of quantized bits, the more finely the sound level can be reproduced. YAMAHA has developed a Virtual CINEMA DSP algorithm that allows you to enjoy DSP sound field surround effects without any surround speakers by using virtual surround speakers. It is even possible to enjoy Virtual CINEMA DSP using a minimal two-speaker system that does not include a center speaker. 111 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION YAMAHA has developed a natural, realistic sound effect DSP algorithm for headphones. Parameters for headphones have been set for each sound field so that accurate representations of all the sound field programs can be enjoyed on headphones. Audio information GLOSSARY ■ THX Cinema processing THX is an exclusive set of standards and technologies established by the world-renowned film production company, Lucasfilm Ltd. THX grew from George Lucas’ personal desire to make your experience of the film soundtrack, in both movie theatres and in your home theatre, as faithful as possible to what the director intended. Movie soundtracks are mixed in special movie theatres called dubbing stages and are designed to be played back in movie theatres with similar equipment and conditions. This same soundtrack is then transferred directly onto Laserdisc, VHS tape, DVD, etc., and is not changed for playback in a small home theatre environment. THX engineers developed patented technologies to accurately translate the sound from the movie theatre environment into the home, correcting the tonal and spatial errors that occur. On this product, when the THX indicator is on, THX features are automatically added in Cinema modes (e.g. THX Cinema, THX Surround EX). Adaptive decorrelation In a movie theatre, a large number of surround speakers help create an enveloping surround sound experience, but in a home theatre there are usually only two speakers. This can make the surround speakers sound like headphones that lack spaciousness and envelopment. The surround sounds will also collapse into the closest speaker as you move away from the middle seating position. Adaptive decorrelation slightly changes one surround channel's time and phase relationship with respect to the other surround channel. This expands the listening position and creates – with only two speakers – the same spacious surround experience as in a movie theatre. Re-equalization The tonal balance of a film soundtrack will be excessively bright and harsh when played back over audio equipment in the home because film soundtracks were designed to be played back in large movie theatres using very different professional equipment. Re-equalization restores the correct tonal balance for watching a movie soundtrack in a small home environment. Timbre matching The human ear changes our perception of sound depending on the direction from which it is coming. In a movie theatre, there is an array of surround speakers so that the surround information is all around you. In a home theatre, you use only two speakers located to the side of your head. The timbre matching feature filters the information going to the surround speakers so that they more closely match the tonal characteristics of the sound coming from the front speakers. This ensures seamless panning between the front and surround speakers. 112 ■ THX Games Mode For the replay of stereo and multi-channel game audio the THX Games Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 and 2.0 encoded game sources such as analog, PCM, DTS and Dolby Digital. This accurately places all game audio surround information, providing a full 360 degree playback environment. THX Games Mode is unique as it gives you a smooth transition of audio in all points of the surround field. ■ THX Music Mode For the replay of multi-channel music the THX Music Mode should be selected. In this mode THX ASA processing is applied to the surround channels of all 5.1 encoded music sources such as DTS, Dolby Digital and DVD-Audio to provide a wide stable rear soundstage. ■ THX Select2 Before any home theatre component can be THX Select2 certified, it must incorporate all the features described in THX Cinema processing and also pass a rigorous series of quality and performance tests. Only then can a product feature the THX Select2 logo, which is your guarantee that the Home Theatre products you purchase will give you superb performance for many years to come. THX Select2 requirements cover every aspect of the product including power amplifier and pre-amplifier performance and operation, and hundreds of other parameters in both the digital and analog domain. ■ THX Select2 Cinema mode THX Select2 Cinema mode plays 5.1 movies using all 8 speakers giving you the best possible movie watching experience. In this mode ASA processing blends the side surround speakers and back surround speakers providing the optimal mix of ambient and directional surround sounds. DTS-ES (Matrix and 6.1 Discrete) and Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded soundtracks will be automatically detected in THX Select2 Cinema mode if the appropriate flag has been encoded. Some Dolby Digital Surround EX soundtracks are missing the digital flag that allows automatic switching. If you know that the movie that you are watching is encoded in Surround EX, you can manually select the THX Surround EX playback mode; otherwise, THX Select2 Cinema mode will apply ASA processing to provide optimum replay. GLOSSARY ■ THX Surround EX THX Surround EX-Dolby Digital Surround EX is a joint development of Dolby Laboratories and the THX Ltd. In a movie theater, film soundtracks that have been encoded with Dolby Digital Surround EX technology are able to reproduce an extra channel which has been added during the mixing of the program. This channel, called Surround Back, places sounds behind the listener in addition to the currently available front left, front center, front right, surround right, surround left and subwoofer channels. This additional channel provides the opportunity for more detailed imaging behind the listener and brings more depth, spacious ambience and sound localization than ever before. Movies that were created using the Dolby Digital Surround EX technology, when released into the home consumer market may exhibit wording to that effect on the packaging. A list of movies created using this technology can be found on the Dolby web site at www.dolby.com. A list of available DVD software titles encoded with this technology can be found at www.thx.com. Only receiver and controller products bearing the THX Surround EX logo, when in the THX Surround EX mode, faithfully reproduce this new technology in the home. This product may also engage the THX Surround EX mode during the playback of 5.1 channel material that is not Dolby Digital Surround EX encoded. In such cases the information delivered to the Surround Back channel will be program dependent and may or may not be pleasing depending on the particular soundtrack and the tastes of the individual listener. Video signal information ■ Component video signal With the component video signal system, the video signal is separated into the Y signal for the luminance and the PB and PR signals for the chrominance. Color can be reproduced more faithfully with this system because each of these signals is independent. The component signal is also called the “color difference signal” because the luminance signal is subtracted from the color signal. A monitor with component input jacks is required in order to use the component signal for output. ■ Composite video signal With the composite video signal system, the video signal is composed of three basic elements of a video picture; color, brightness and synchronization data. A composite video jack on a video component transmits these three elements combined. ■ S-video signal With the S-video signal system, the video signal normally transmitted using a pin cable is separated and transmitted as the Y signal for the luminance and the C signal for the chrominance through the S-video cable. Using the S VIDEO jack eliminates video signal transmission loss and allows recording and playback of even more beautiful images. ADDITIONAL INFORMATION 113 PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION PARAMETRIC EQUALIZER INFORMATION This unit employs YAMAHA Parametric Room Acoustic Optimizer (YPAO) technology, together with the Parametric EQ settings (see page 59), to optimize the frequency characteristics of its parametric equalizer to match your listening environment. YPAO uses a combination of the following three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) to provide highly precise adjustment of the frequency characteristics. ■ Q factor The width of the specified frequency band is referred to as the Q factor. This parameter is adjustable between the values 0.5 and 10. ■ Frequency This parameter is adjustable in one-third octave increments between 63 Hz and 16 kHz. ■ Gain This parameter is adjustable in increments of 0.5 dB between –20 and +6 dB. YPAO adjusts frequency characteristics to suit your listening requirements using a combination of the above three parameters (Frequency, Gain and Q factor) for each equalizer band in this unit’s parametric equalizer. This unit has 7 equalizer bands for each channel. The use of multiple equalizer bands enables more precise adjustments of frequency characteristics (as in Figure 2). This is not possible using only a single equalizer band (as in Figure 1). Figure 1 Frequency characteristic after correction Gain Band 1 Frequency Original frequency characteristic Figure 2 Gain Frequency characteristic after correction Band 1 Frequency Band 2 114 Original frequency characteristic SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS AUDIO SECTION • Minimum RMS Output Power for Front, Center, Surround, Surround back 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω ..................................... 130 W • Maximum Power (EIAJ) [Asia, General, China and Korea models] 1 kHz, 10% THD, 8 Ω ..........................................................180 W • Dynamic Power (IHF) [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia models] 8/6/4/2 Ω ........................................................ 165/205/260/340 W • DIN Standard Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.7% THD, 4 Ω .........................................................190 W • Dynamic Headroom [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China, Korea and Australia models] 8 Ω ...................................................................................... 1.03 dB • IEC Output Power [U.K. and Europe models] 1 kHz, 0.04% THD, 8 Ω .......................................................140 W • Residual Noise (IHF-A Network) Front L/R ................................................................ 150 µV or less • Channel Separation (1 kHz/10 kHz) PHONO (shortened) to Front L/R ............... 60 dB/55 dB or more CD (5.1 kΩ shortened) to Front L/R ........... 60 dB/45 dB or more • Tone Control Characteristics (Front L/R) BASS Boost/Cut ....................................................... ±6 dB/50 Hz BASS Turnover Frequency ..................................................350 Hz TREBLE Boost/Cut ................................................ ±6 dB/20 kHz TREBLE Turnover Frequency ............................................3.5 kHz • Filter Characteristics (fc=40/60/80/90/100/110/120/160/200 Hz) H.P.F. (Front, Center, Surround, Surround back) ...........12 dB/oct. L.P.F. (Subwoofer) .........................................................24 dB/oct. VIDEO SECTION • Video Signal Type (Wall Paper) [Asia, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ................ PAL [U.S.A., Canada, General and Korea models] .................... NTSC • Damping Factor (IHF) 20 Hz to 20 kHz, 8 Ω................................................... 140 or more • Video Signal Type (Video Conversion) [Asia, General, China, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] .............................................................................................. PAL [Other models] .................................................................... NTSC • Input Sensitivity/Input Impedance PHONO .................................................................. 3.5 mV/47 kΩ CD, etc. ................................................................. 200 mV/47 kΩ MULTI CH INPUT ............................................... 200 mV/47 kΩ • Signal Level Composite ................................................................. 1 Vp-p/75 Ω S-video ............................ 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.286 Vp-p/75 Ω (C) Component ................... 1 Vp-p/75 Ω (Y), 0.7 Vp-p/75 Ω (Pb/Pr) • Maximum Input Signal PHONO (1 kHz, 0.1% THD) .............................. 100 mV or more CD, etc. (1 kHz, 0.5% THD) .................................. 2.4 V or more • Maximum Input Level .......................................... 1.5 Vp-p or more • Output Level/Output Impedance REC OUT ............................................................ 200 mV/1.2 kΩ PRE OUT ................................................................... 1.0 V/500 Ω SUBWOOFER ........................................................... 2.0 V/500 Ω ZONE 2/ZONE 3 OUT ............................................. 1.0 V/1.2 kΩ [U.S.A., Canada, Australia, U.K. and Europe models] • Headphone Jack Rated Output/Impedance CD, etc. (1 kHz, 40 mV, 8 Ω) ............................... 150 mV/100 Ω • Frequency Response CD to Front L/R ............................... 10 Hz to 100 kHz, +0/–3 dB • RIAA Equalization Deviation PHONO (20 Hz to 20 kHz) .......................................... 0 ± 0.5 dB • Total Harmonic Distortion PHONO to REC OUT (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 1 V) ......................................... 0.02% or less CD, etc. to Front L/R (20 Hz to 20 kHz, 65 W, 8 Ω) ............................... 0.04% or less • Frequency Response (MONITOR OUT) Composite, S-video .................................. 5 Hz to 10 MHz, –3 dB Component ............................................... 5 Hz to 60 MHz, –3 dB FM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] ........................... 87.5 to 107.9 MHz [Asia and General models] ........ 87.5/87.50 to 108.0/108.00 MHz [Other models] ............................................ 87.50 to 108.00 MHz • Usable Sensitivity (IHF) ....................................... 1.0 µV (11.2 dBf) • Selectivity ................................................................................ 70 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) Mono/Stereo .............................................................. 76 dB/70 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) Mono/Stereo ................................................................ 0.2%/0.3% HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) Stereo .....................................................................................42 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB • Frequency Response Stereo .............................................. 20 Hz to 15 kHz, +0.5, –2 dB HD [U.S.A. model only] ................ 20 Hz to 18 kHz, +0.5, –3 dB • Antenna Input (unbalanced) ..................................................... 75 Ω 115 ADDITIONAL INFORMATION • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF-A Network) PHONO (5 mV) to Front L/R [U.S.A., Canada, Asia, General, China and Korea models] .............................................................................. 86 dB or more [Australia, U.K. and Europe models] ...................... 81 dB or more CD, etc. (250 mV) to Front L/R .......................................... 100 dB • Signal to Noise Ratio ................................................ 60 dB or more SPECIFICATIONS AM SECTION • Tuning Range [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. 530 to 1710 kHz [Asia and General models] ................. 530/531 to 1710/1611 kHz [Other models] .................................................... 531 to 1611 kHz • Usable Sensitivity ............................................................. 300 µV/m • Signal to Noise Ratio (IHF) HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 80 dB • Harmonic Distortion (1 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ..................................................... 0.03% • Stereo Separation (1 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ...................................................... 70 dB • Frequency Response (20 Hz to 12.5 kHz) HD [U.S.A. model only] ............................................. +0.5/–3 dB GENERAL • Power Supply [U.S.A. and Canada models] .............................. AC 120 V, 60 Hz [General model] .............. AC 110/120/220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [Asia model].................................... AC 220/230–240 V, 50/60 Hz [China model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 50 Hz [Korea model] .................................................... AC 220 V, 60 Hz [Australia model] ............................................... AC 240 V, 50 Hz [U.K. and Europe models] ................................. AC 230 V, 50 Hz • Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] ................................. 500 W/630 VA [Other models] ................................................................... 500 W • Standby Power Consumption [U.S.A. and Canada models] .................................... 0.2 W or less [General model] (AC 240 V, 50 Hz) ...................... 0.33 W or less [Other models] ....................................................... 0.15 W or less • Maximum Power Consumption [General model only] 6ch, 10% THD .................................................................. 1100 W • AC Outlets [U.S.A. and Canada models]..... 2 (Total 100 W/0.8 A maximum) [Australia and U.K. models] .............. 1 (Total 100 W maximum) [Asia and General models] ................... 2 (Total 50 W maximum) [China and Europe models] ................ 2 (Total 100 W maximum) • Dimensions (W x H x D) .............................. 435 x 171 x 438.5 mm (17-1/8” x 6-3/4” x 17-1/4”) • Weight .................................................................. 18.0 kg (39.7 lbs) 116 LIST OF REMOTE CONTROL CODES CABLE ABC 0030, 0035 AMERICAST 0926 BELL SOUTH 0926 BIRMINGHAM CABLE COMMUNICATIONS 0303 BRITISH TELECOM 0030 CABLE & WIRELESS 1095 DAERYUNG 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 DIRECTOR 0503 FILMNET 0470 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837, GOLDSTAR 0171 HAMLIN 0036, 0300 JERROLD 0030, 0303, 0503, 0837 LG 0171 MNET 0470 MEMOREX 0027 MOTOROLA 0303, 0503, 0837, 1133 NTL 1095 NOOS 0844 ONO 1095 PVP STEREO VISUAL MATRIX 0030 PACE 0264, 1087, 1095 PANASONIC 0027, 0035, 0134 PARAGON 0027 PHILIPS 0332, 0344 PIONEER 0171, 0560, 0904, 1904 PULSAR 0027 QUASAR 0027 REGAL 0300, 0306 RUNCO 0027 SAGEM 0844 SAMSUNG 0027, 0171 SCIENTIFIC ATLANTA 0035, 0504, 0904, 1904 SONY 1033 STARCOM 0030 SUPERCABLE 0303 TS 0030 TELE+1 0470 TELEWEST 1095 TORX 0030 TOSHIBA 0027 TRANS PX 0303 UNITED CABLE 0030 ZENITH 0027, 0552, 0926 CD PLAYER AIWA 0184 ARCAM 0184 AUDIO RESEARCH 0184 AUDIO TON 0184 AUDIOLAB 0184 AUDIOMECA 0184 CAIRN 0184 CALIFORNIA AUDIO LABS 0056 CARVER 0184, 0206 CYRUS 0184 DKK 0027 DMX ELECTRONICS 0184 DENON 0900 DYNAMIC BASS 0206 EMERSON 0332 FISHER 0206 GENEXXA 0059, 0332 GOODMANS 0332 GRUNDIG 0184 HARMAN/KARDON 0184, 0200 HITACHI 0059 JVC 0099 KENWOOD 0055, 0064 KRELL 0184 LXI 0332 LINN 0184 MCS 0056 MAGNAVOX 0184, 0332 MARANTZ 0056, 0184 MATSUI 0184 MEMOREX 0332 MERIDIAN 0184 MICROMEGA 0184 MIRO 0027 MISSION 0184 MYRYAD 0184 NAD 0027 NSM 0184 NAIM 0184 OPTIMUS 0027, 0059, 0064, 0206, 0332 PANASONIC 0056 PHILIPS 0184 PIONEER 0059, 0332 POLK AUDIO 0184 PROTON 0184 QED 0184 QUAD 0184 QUASAR 0056 RCA 0059, 0206, 0332 REALISTIC 0206 REVOX 0184 ROTEL 0184 SAE 0184 SANSUI 0184, 0332 SANYO 0206 SCOTT 0332 SEARS 0332 SHARP 0064 SIMAUDIO 0184 SONIC FRONTIERS 0184 SONY 0027 SYMPHONIC 0332 TAG MCLAREN 0184 TANDY 0059 TECHNICS 0056 THORENS 0184 THULE 0184 UNIVERSUM 0184 VICTOR 0099 WARDS 0184 YAMAHA 2300, 2301 CD RECORDER KENWOOD MARANTZ PHILIPS YAMAHA 0653 0653 0653 2400 DVD PLAYER ACOUSTIC SOLUTIONS 0757 ALBA 0744 AMSTRAD 0740 APEX DIGITAL 0699, 0744, 0782, 0821, 0823, 0857, 1127 BLAUPINKT 0744 BLUE PARADE 0598 BUSH 0740 CENTREX 0699 CLATRONIC 0815 CYBERHOME 0741 DVD2000 0548 DAEWOO 0811, 0797 DANSAI 0797 DECCA 0797 DENON 0517 DIAMOND 0795 DIGITREX 0699 EMERSON 0618 ENTERPRISE 0618 FISHER 0697 GE 0549, 0744 GO VIDEO 0742 GOLDSTAR 0768 GRADIENTE 0678 GREENHILL 0744 GRUNDIG 0566 HITACHI 0600, 0691 HITEKER 0699 JVC 0585, 0650 KLH 0744 KENWOOD 0517, 0561 KOSS 0678 LG 0768 LIMIT 0795 MAGNAVOX 0530, 0702 MARANTZ 0566 MEMOREX 0858 MICO 0750 MICROSOFT 0549 MINTEK 0744 MITSUBISHI 0548 MUSTEK 0757 NESA 0744 ONKYO 0530 ORITRON 0678 PALSONIC 0699 PANASONIC 0517, 0659, 1389 PHILIPS 0530, 0566, 0673, 0881 PIONEER 0552, 0598, 0658, 0659 POLK AUDIO 0566 PROSCAN 0549 QWESTAR 0678 RCA 0549, 0598, 0744 ROTEL 0650 SM ELECTRONIC 0757 SAMSUNG 0600 SANYO 0697 SHARP 0657 SHERWOOD 0797 SHINSONIC 0560 SLIM ART 0811 SONY 0560, 0891 SYLVANIA 0702 TATUNG 0797 TEAC 0598, 0744 TECHNICS 0517 THETA DIGITAL 0598 THOMSON 0549 TOSHIBA 0530 URBAN CONCEPTS 0530 XBOX 0549 YAMAHA 0517, 0566, 0572, 2100, 2101, 2102 ZENITH 0530, 0618, 0768 ZEUS 0811 DVD RECORDER PANASONIC PHILIPS PIONEER TOSHIBA YAMAHA 2800, 2801, 2802 2808 2804, 2805, 2806 2803 2807 LD PLAYER CARVER 0091 DENON 0086 MARANTZ 0091 MITSUBISHI 0086 NAD 0086 NAGSMI 0086 OPTIMUS 0086 PHILIPS 0091 PIONEER 0086 SALORA 0091 SONY 0228 TELEFUNKEN 0086 YAMAHA 2200 MD RECORDER KENWOOD ONKYO SHARP SONY YAMAHA 0708 0895 0888 0517 2500, 2501, 2502 RECEIVER (TUNER) ADC AIWA 0558 0185, 1116, 1415, 1432, 1668 ALCO 1417 ANAM 1636 APEX DIGITAL 1284 AUDIOLAB 1216 AUDIOTRONIC 1216 AUDIOVOX 1417 BOSE 1256 CAMBRIDGE SOUNDWORKS 1397 i CAPETRONIC 0558 CARVER 1116, 1216 CENTREX 1284 DENON 1387 FERGUSON 0558 FINE ARTS 1216 GRUNDIG 1216 HARMAN/KARDON 0137, 1331 INTEGRA 0162, 1325 JBL 0137, 1333 JVC 0101, 0558, 1401, 1522 KLH 1417, 1439 KENWOOD 1054, 1340 MCS 0066 MAGNAVOX 0558, 1116, 1216, 1296, MARANTZ 0066, 1116, 1216, 1316 MICROMEGA 1216 MUSICMAGIC 1116 MYRYAD 1216 NAD 0347 NORCENT 1416 ONKYO 0162, 0869, 1325 OPTIMUS 0558, 1050 PANASONIC 0066, 1315, 1545, 1790 PHILIPS 1116, 1216, 1293, 1295, 1296, 1310, 1316 PIONEER 0041, 0558, 1050, 1411 POLK AUDIO 1316 PROSCAN 1281 QUASAR 0066 RCA 0558, 1050, 1281, 1417, 1636, SABA 0558 SANSUI 1116 SCHNEIDER 0558 SONY 0185, 1085, 1185, 1685, 1785 STEREOPHONICS 1050 SUNFIRE 1340 TEAC 1417 TECHNICS 0066, 1335, 1336, 1545 TELEFUNKEN 0558 THOMSON 1281 THORENS 1216 UHER 0558 VENTURER 1417 VICTOR 0101 WARDS 0041, 0185 YAMAHA 0203, 1203, 1358, 2600, 2601, 2602, 2603 SATELLITE TUNER @SAT ABSAT ALBA ALPHASTAR AMSTRAD ASTON ASTRO ATSAT AVALON ii 1327 0150 0482 0799 0874 0169, 1156 0200 1327 0423 BLAUPUNKT 0200 BRITISH SKY BROADCASTING 0874, 1202 CANAL DIGITAL 0880 CANAL SATELLITE 0880 CANAL+ 0880 CHAPARRAL 0243 CITYCOM 1203 CONNEXIONS 0423 CROSSDIGITAL 1136 CYRUS 0227 D-BOX 0750, 1154 DMT 1102 DNT 0227, 0423 DAERYUNG 0423 DAEWOO 1323 DIGENIUS 0326 DIRECTV 0274, 0419, 0593, 0666, 0751, 0776, 0846, 1103, 1136, 1169, 1776, 1883 DISH NETWORK SYSTEM 0802, 1032 DISHPRO 0802, 1032 DISTRATEL 0111 DREAM MULTIMEDIA 1264 ECHOSTAR 0194, 0423, 0637, 0802, 0880, 0898, 1032, 1113 ENGEL 1044 EXPRESSVU 0802 FTE 0890 FINLUX 0482 FRACARRO 0898 FUBA 0423 GE 0593 GOI 0802 GALAXIS 0890, 1138 GENERAL INSTRUMENT 0896 GOLD BOX 0880 GRUNDIG 0200, 0874 HTS 0802 HIRSCHMANN 0200, 0423 HITACHI 0482, 0846 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEM 0776, 1169, 1776 HUMAX 0890, 1203 INVIDEO 0898 JVC 0802 KATHREIN 0150, 0200, 0227, 0276, 0685, 1248 KREISELMEYER 0200 LABGEAR 1323 LOGIX 1044 LORENZEN 0326 MAGNAVOX 0749, 0751 MANHATTAN 0482, 1044, 1110 MARANTZ 0227 MEDIASAT 0880 MEMOREX 0751 METRONIC 0111 MITSUBISHI 0776 MOTOROLA 0896 MYRYAD 0227 NEXT LEVEL 0896 NOKIA 0482, 0750, 0778, 1154, 1250, 1750 OCTALTV 1032 ORBITECH PACE 1127 0482, 0874, 1202, 1350 PANASONIC 0274, 0728, 0874, 1347 PANDA 0482 PAYSAT 0751 PHILIPS 0160, 0227, 0482, 0749, 0751, 0776, 0880, 1103, 1169, 1776 PIONEER 0880 PROMAX 0482 PROSCAN 0419, 0593 RCA 0170, 0419, 0593, 0882 RFT 0227 RADIOSHACK 0896 RADIOLA 0227 RADIX 0423 SKY 0874, 0883, 1202 SM ELECTRONIC 1227 SABRE 0482 SAGEM 0847, 1141, 1280 SAMSUNG 1044, 1136, 1303, 1319 SAT CONTROL 1327 SATSTATION 1110 SCHWAIGER 1138 SEEMANN 0423 SIEMENS 0200 SONY 0666, 0874, 1666 STAR CHOICE 0896 STRONG 1327 TPS 0847, 1280 TANTEC 0482 TECHNISAT 1126, 1127 TELESTAR 1127 THOMSON 0482, 0880, 1073, 1318 TOPFIELD 1233 TOSHIBA 0776, 0817, 1776 ULTIMATETV 0419, 0666 UNIDEN 0749, 0751 UNIVERSUM 0200 VENTANA 0227 WISI 0200, 0423, 0482 XSAT 0150 ZEHNDER 1102 ZENITH 0883, 1883 TAPE DECK AIWA 0056 CARVER 0056 GRUNDIG 0056 HARMAN/KARDON 0056 MAGNAVOX 0056 MARANTZ 0056 MYRYAD 0056 OPTIMUS 0054 PHILIPS 0056 PIONEER 0054 POLK AUDIO 0056 RCA 0054 REVOX 0056 SANSUI 0056 SONY 0270 THORENS 0056 WARDS 0054 YAMAHA 2700,2701 TV AGB AOC 0543 0036, 0057, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0135, 0205, 0207, 0478 ASA 0131 AWA 0036 ACURA 0036 ADDISON 0119, 0135, 0680 ADMIRAL 0120, 0190, 0490 ADVENT 0788 AIKO 0119 AKAI 0036, 0057, 0235, 0388, 0543, 0729, 0839 AKURA 0291 ALBA 0036, 0064, 0398, 0695 AMERICA ACTION 0207 AMPRO 0778 AMSTRAD 0036, 0064, 0198, 0398, 0439, 0460, 0543 ANAM 0036, 0207, 0277 ANAM NATIONAL 0277, 0677 ANITECH 0036 APEX DIGITAL 0775, 0792, 0794 AUDIOSONIC 0064, 0136 BANG & OLUFSEN 0592 BASIC 0036 BAUR 0064, 0388, 0539 BAYSONIC 0207 BEAUMARK 0205 BEKO 0397, 0513, 0741, 0742 BELL & HOWELL 0181 BEON 0064 BLAUPUNKT 0222 BLUE SKY 0695, 1064 BONDSTEC 0274 BRADFORD 0207 BRANDT 0136, 0362 BROKSONIC 0263, 0490 BUSH 0036, 0064, 0398, 0401, 0695, 1064 CCE 0064 CGE 0274 CTC 0274 CXC 0207 CANDLE 0057 CARNIVALE 0057 CARVER 0081, 0197 CASCADE 0036 CATHAY 0064 CELEBRITY 0027 CELERA 0792 CENTURION 0064 CHANGHONG 0792 CHING TAI 0036, 0119 CHUN YUN 0027, 0036, 0119, 0207 CHUNG HSIN 0080, 0135, 0207 CIMLINE 0036 CINERAL 0119, 0478 CITIZEN 0057, 0087, 0119 CLARION 0207 CLARIVOX 0064 CLATRONIC 0274, 0397 CONDOR 0347, 0397 CONRAC 0835 CONTEC CRAIG CROSLEY CROWN 0036, 0207 0207 0081 0036, 0064, 0207, 0397, 0445 CURTIS MATHES 0057, 0074, 0081, 0087, 0120, 0172, 0181, 0193, 0478, 0729, 1174, 1374 DAEWOO 0036, 0057, 0064, 0119, 0135, 0181, 0197, 0205, 0207, 0401, 0478, 0650, 0661, 1688 DANSAI 0064 DAYTON 0036 DE GRAAF 0235, 0575 DECCA 0064, 0543 DENON 0172 DIGATRON 0064 DIXI 0036, 0064 DUMONT 0044 DWIN 0747, 0801 ECE 0064 ELBE 0286 ELECTROBAND 0027 ELIN 0064, 0575 ELITE 0347 ELTA 0036 EMERSON 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0388, 0490, 0650 ENVISION 0057,0840 EPSON 0860 ERRES 0064 ETHER 0036, 0057 ETRON 0036 EUROPHON 0543 FERGUSON 0064, 0100, 0136, 0265, 0314, 0362, 0587 FIDELITY 0388 FINLANDIA 0235, 0373 FINLUX 0064, 0131, 0132, 0373, 0543 FIRSTAR 0036, 0263 FIRSTLINE 0036, 0274, 0695 FISHER 0131, 0181, 0235, 0397 FLINT 0482 FORMENTI 0064, 0347 FORTRESS 0120 FRONTECH 0190, 0274, 0291 FUJITSU 0710, 0836 FUNAI 0207, 0198, 0291 FUTURETECH 0207 GE 0057, 0074, 0078, 0119, 0205, 0207, 0478, 0587, 1174, 1374, 1481 GEC 0064, 0543 GATEWAY 1782, 1783 GELOSO 0036 GENEXXA 0190 GIBRALTER 0044, 0057 GOLDSTAR 0057, 0064, 0136, 0181, 0205, 0404 GOODMANS 0064, 0398, 0401, 0661 GOREMJE 0397 GRADIENTE 0080, 0197 GRAETZ 0190, 0388 GRANADA 0064, 0235, 0366, 0543 GRANDIN 0637 GRUNDIG 0064, 0222, 0514, 0583, 0614 GRUNPY 0207 HCM 0036, 0439 HALLMARK 0205 HANKOOK 0057, 0205, 0207 HANSEATIC 0064, 0347, 0388, 0455, 0583 HANTAREX 0543 HARMAN/KARDON 0081 HARVARD 0207 HAVERMY 0120 HELLO KITTY 0478 HINARI 0036, 0064 HISAWA 0482 HITACHI 0036, 0057, 0119, 0132, 0136, 0172, 0190, 0205, 0252, 0383, 0508, 0575, 0605, 1172, 1283 HUA TUN 0036 HUANYU 0401 HYPSON 0064, 0291 ICE 0291, 0398 ITS 0398 ITT 0190, 0388, 0575 IMPERIAL 0274, 0397, 0445 INDIANA 0064 INFINITY 0081 INGELEN 0190 INNO HIT 0543 INNOVA 0064 INTEQ 0044 INTERFUNK 0064, 0190, 0274, 0388, 0539 INTERVISION 0064, 0291, 0404 JBL 0081 JCB 0027 JVC 0080, 0398, 0490, 0680, 0710 JEAN 0036, 0078, 0119, 0183, 0263 JENSEN 0788 KEC 0207 KTV 0057, 0207 KAISUI 0036 KAPSCH 0190 KARCHER 0637 KATHREIN 0583 KENDO 0064 KENWOOD 0057 KNEISSEL 0286, 0462 KOLIN 0080, 0135, 0207 KORPEL 0064 KOYODA 0036 L&S ELECTRONIC 0835 LG 0057, 0064, 0087, 0135, 0205, 0741 LXI 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0205 LEYCO 0064, 0291 LIESENK & TTER 0064 LOEWE 0539 LUXOR 0383, 0388 M ELECTRONIC 0036, 0064, 0131, 0132, 0136, 0190, 0314, 0373, 0401, 0507 MGA 0057, 0177, 0205 MTC 0057, 0087, 0539 MAGNADYNE 0274, 0543 MAGNAFON 0543 MAGNAVOX 0057, 0081, 1281, 1481 MANESTH 0291, 0347 MARANTZ 0057, 0064, 0081, 0583 MARK 0064 MATSUI 0036, 0064, 0235, 0398, 0514, 0543 MATSUSHITA 0277, 0677 MEDIATOR 0064 MEDION 0695, 0835, 1064 MEGATRON 0172, 0205 MEMOREX 0036, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0277, 0490, 1064 METZ 0474 MICROMAXX 0835 MICROSTAR 0835 MIDLAND 0044, 0074, 0078 MINERVA 0514 MINOKA 0439 MITSUBISHI 0057, 0120, 0135, 0177, 0181, 0205, 0207, 0263, 0277, 0539, 0863, 1277 MIVAR 0318,0319, 0543, 0636 MOTOROLA 0120 MULTITECH 0036, 0207 MYRYAD 0583 NAD 0183, 0205, 0388, 0893 NEC 0036, 0057, 0078, 0181, 0183, 0197, 0205, 0482, 0524, 1731 NEI 0064 NTC 0119 NECKERMANN 0064, 0583 NETSAT 0064 NEWAVE 0036, 0119, 0120, 0205 NIKKAI 0064, 0291 NIKKO 0057, 0119, 0205 NOKIA 0388, 0500, 0507, 0575, 0658 NORCENT 0775, 0851 NORDMENDE 0136, 0314, 0587 OCEANIC 0190, 0388 ONWA 0207, 0460 OPTIMUS 0181, 0193, 0277, 0677 OPTONICA 0120 ORION 0064, 0263, 0347, 0490, 0543 OSAKI 0291, 0439 OTTO VERSAND 0064, 0347, 0539, 0583 PALLADIUM 0397, 0445 PANAMA 0291 PANASONIC 0064, 0078, 0081, 0190, 0277, 0677, 1437 PATHE CINEMA 0265, 0347 PAUSA 0036 PENNEY 0057, 0074, 0078, 0087, 0183, 0205, 1374 PERDIO 0347 PHILCO 0057, 0064, 0081, 0172, 0205, 0207, 0274, 0490, 1688 PHILIPS 0027, 0057, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0119, 0135, 0205, 0401, 0583, 0717, 1481 PHONOLA 0064 PILOT 0057 PIONEER 0136, 0190, 0193, 0314, 0706, 0787, 0893 PORTLAND 0119 PRANDONI-PRINCE 0543 PRIMA 0788 PRISM 0078 PROFEX 0036, 0388 PROSCAN 0074 PROTECH 0036, 0064, 0274, 0291, 0445, 0695 PROTON 0036, 0057, 0205 PULSAR 0044 QUASAR 0078, 0277, 0677 QUELLE 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 R-LINE 0064 RCA 0027, 0057, 0074, 0117, 0119, 0205, 0706, 1074, 1174, 1274, 1374, 1474, 1481, 1574 RFT 0455 RADIOSHACK 0057, 0074, 0181, 0205, 0207 RADIOLA 0064 RADIOMARELLI 0543 REALISTIC 0057, 0181, 0205, 0207 REDIFFUSION 0388 REOC 0741 REVOX 0064 REX 0190, 0286, 0291 ROADSTAR 0036, 0291, 0445 RUNCO 0044, 0057, 0524, 0630 SBR 0064 SEG 0291, 0695 SEI 0543 SKY 0064 SSS 0207 SABA 0136, 0190, 0314, 0362 SACCS 0265 SAGEM 0637 SAISHO 0036, 0291, 0543 SALORA 0190, 0380, 0388, 0575 SAMBERS 0543 SAMPO 0036, 0057, 0119, 0120, 0181, 0198, 0205, 0677, 1782 SAMSUNG 0036, 0057, 0064, 0087, 0117, 0119, 0181, 0205, 0291, 0397, 0583, 0614, 0645, 0729, 0793, 0839, 0841 SANSEI 0478 SANSUI 0490 SANYO 0131, 0181, 0207, 0235, 0366, 0826 SCHAUB LORENZ 0388 SCHNEIDER 0064, 0274, 0398, 0695 SCOTCH 0205 SCOTT 0205, 0207, 0263 iii SEARS 0074, 0081, 0181, 0183, 0198, 0205 SELECO 0190, 0286 SEMIVOX 0207 SEMP 0183 SHARP 0057, 0120, 0677 SHEN YING 0036, 0119 SHENG CHIA 0036, 0120, 0263 SIAREM 0543 SIEMENS 0064, 0222 SINUDYNE 0543 SKANTIC 0383 SKYGIANT 0207 SKYWORTH 0064 SOLAVOX 0190 SONITRON 0235 SONOKO 0036, 0064 SONOLOR 0190, 0235 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0677, 0861, 1127, 1532, 1678 SOUNDESIGN 0205, 0207 SOUNDWAVE 0064, 0445 SOWA 0078, 0087, 0119, 0183, 0205 SQUAREVIEW 0198 STANDARD 0036 STARLITE 0207 STERN 0190, 0286 SUPREME 0027 SYLVANIA 0057, 0081, 0198 SYMPHONIC 0198, 0207 SYNCO 0027, 0087, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0478 SYSLINE 0064 T+A 0474 TCM 0835 TMK 0205 TNCI 0044 TVS 0490 TACICO 0036, 0119, 0205 TAI YI 0036 TANDY 0120, 0190 TASHIKO 0119, 0677 TATUNG 0036, 0064, 0078, 0081, 0087, 0181, 0183, 0543 TEAC 0036, 0064, 0291, 0439, 0445, 0482, 0695, 1064 TEC 0274 TECHNEMA 0347 TECHNICS 0078, 0277, 0677 TECHWOOD 0078 TECO 0036, 0078, 0119, 0120, 0205, 0291, 0680 TEKNIKA 0081, 0087, 0119, 0177, 0207 TELEFUNKEN 0136, 0289, 0362, 0652, 0729 TELEMEISTER 0347 TELETECH 0036 TENSAI 0347 TERA 0057 THOMSON 0136, 0314, 0587, 0652, 1474 THORN 0064, 0131, 0388, 0539 TOSHIBA 0087, 0181, 0183, 0535, 0645, 0677, 0859, 1283, 1383, 1683, 1731 TRIUMPH 0543 TUNTEX 0036, 0057, 0119 iv UHER 0347 UNIVERSUM 0064, 0131, 0132, 0291, 0373, 0397, 0519 VECTOR RESEARCH 0057 VESTEL 0064 VICTOR 0080, 0277, 0677, 0680 VIDEOSAT 0274 VIDIKRON 0081 VIDTECH 0205 VIEWSONIC 1782 VISION 0347 VOXSON 0190 WALTHAM 0383 WARDS 0057, 0081, 0205, 0893 WATSON 0064, 0347 WAYCON 0183 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0064, 0347, 0490, 0650 YAMAHA 0057, 0796, 0860, 2900 (projector), 2901 (projector), 2902 YAPSHE 0277 YOKO 0064, 0291 ZENITH 0044, 0119, 0205, 0490 VCR ASA ADMIRAL ADVENTURA AIKO AIWA 0064, 0108 0075 0027 0305 0027, 0064, 0334, 0375, 0379 AKAI 0068, 0342 AKIBA 0099 ALBA 0099, 0305, 0342, 0379 AMERICA ACTION 0305 AMERICAN HIGH 0062 AMSTRAD 0027 ANAM 0064, 0253, 0267, 0305, 0507 ANAM NATIONAL 0253, 1589 ANITECH 0099 ASHA 0267 ASUKA 0064 AUDIOVOX 0064, 0305 BAIRD 0027, 0068, 0131 BASIC LINE 0099, 0305 BEAUMARK 0267 BELL & HOWELL 0131 BLAUPUNKT 0253 BRANDT 0347 BRANDT ELECTRONIC 0068 BROKSONIC 0211, 0375, 1506 BUSH 0099, 0305, 0379 CCE 0099, 0305 CGE 0027 CALIX 0064 CANON 0062 CARVER 0108 CIMLINE 0099 CINERAL 0305 CITIZEN 0064, 0305, 1305 COLT 0099 COMBITECH 0379 CRAIG 0064, 0074, 0099, 0267 CROWN 0099, 0305 CURTIS MATHES 0062, 0068, 0087, 1062 CYBERNEX 0267 CYRUS 0108 DAEWOO 0072, 0131, 0305, 0669, 1305 DANSAI 0099 DE GRAAF 0069 DECCA 0027, 0108 DENON 0069 DUAL 0068 DUMONT 0027, 0108, 0131 DYNATECH 0027 ESC 0267, 0305 ELCATECH 0099 ELECTROHOME 0064 ELECTROPHONIC 0064 EMEREX 0059 EMERSON 0027, 0062, 0064, 0070, 0072, 0211, 0267, 0305, 1305, 1506 FERGUSON 0068, 0347 FIDELITY 0027 FINLANDIA 0108, 0131 FINLUX 0027, 0069, 0108, 0131 FIRSTLINE 0064, 0070, 0072, 0099 FISHER 0074, 0131 FUJI 0060, 0062 FUJITSU 0027, 0072 FUNAI 0027 GE 0062, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 GEC 0108 GARRARD 0027 GENERAL 0072 GO VIDEO 0459 GOLDHAND 0099 GOLDSTAR 0064, 0252, 0507, 1264 GOODMANS 0027, 0064, 0099, 0305 GRADIENTE 0027 GRAETZ 0068, 0131, 0267 GRANADA 0108, 0131 GRANDIN 0027, 0064, 0099 GRUNDIG 0099, 0108, 0253, 0374 HCM 0099 HI-Q 0074 HANSEATIC 0064 HARLEY DAVIDSON 0027 HARMAN/KARDON 0108 HARWOOD 0099 HINARI 0099, 0267, 0379 HITACHI 0027, 0064, 0068, 0069, 0267 HUGHES NETWORK SYSTEMS 0069 HYPSON 0099 ITT 0068, 0131, 0267 ITV 0064, 0305 IMPERIAL 0027 INTERFUNK 0108 JVC 0068, 0072, 0094 JENSEN 0068 KEC 0064, 0305 KLH 0099 KAISUI 0099 KENWOOD KODAK KOLIN KORPEL LG 0068, 0094 0062, 0064 0068, 0070 0099 0064, 0069, 0072, 0507 LXI 0064 LENCO 0305 LEYCO 0099 LLOYD’S 0027 LOEWE 0064, 0108, 1589 LOGIK 0099, 0267 LUXOR 0070, 0075, 0131 M ELECTRONIC 0027 MEI 0062 MGA 0070, 0267 MGN TECHNOLOGY 0267 MTC 0027, 0267 MAGNASONIC 1305 MAGNAVOX 0027, 0062, 0066, 0108, 1808 MAGNIN 0267 MANESTH 0072, 0099 MARANTZ 0062, 0108 MARTA 0064 MATSUI 0375, 0379 MATSUSHITA 0062 MEDION 0375 MEMOREX 0027, 0062, 0064, 0066, 0074, 0075, 0131, 0267, 0334, 0375, 1264 MEMPHIS 0099 METZ 0064, 0374, 1589 MINOLTA 0069 MITSUBISHI 0068, 0070, 0094, 0108, 0834 MOTOROLA 0062, 0075 MULTITECH 0027, 0099 MURPHY 0027 MYRYAD 0108 NAD 0131 NEC 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075, 0094, 0131 NATIONAL 0253 NECKERMANN 0108 NESCO 0099 NEWAVE 0064 NIKKO 0064 NOBLEX 0267 NOKIA 0068, 0131, 0267 NORDMENDE 0068, 0347 OCEANIC 0027, 0068 OKANO 0342, 0375 OLYMPUS 0062, 0253 OPTIMUS 0064, 0075, 0131, 0459 ORION 0211, 0375, 0379, 1506 OSAKI 0027, 0064, 0099 OTTO VERSAND 0108 PALLADIUM 0064, 0068, 0099 PANASONIC 0062, 0252, 0253, 0643, 1062, 1589 PATHE MARCONI 0068 PENNEY 0062, 0064, 0069, 0267, 1062, 1264 PENTAX 0069 PERDIO 0027 PHILCO 0062 PHILIPS 0062, 0108, 0645, 1108, 1208 PHONOLA 0108 PILOT 0064 PIONEER 0069, 0094, 0108 POLK AUDIO 0108 PROFITRONIC 0267 PROLINE 0027 PROSCAN 0087, 1087 PROTEC 0099 PULSAR 0066 PYE 0108 QUASAR 0062, 1062 QUELLE 0108 RCA 0062, 0069, 0087, 0267, 0834, 1062, 1087 RADIOSHACK 0027 RADIOLA 0108 RADIX 0064 RANDEX 0064 REALISTIC 0027, 0062, 0064, 0074, 0075, 0131 REOC 0375 REPLAYTV 0641, 0643 REX 0068 ROADSTAR 0064, 0099, 0267, 0305 RUNCO 0066 SBR 0108 SEG 0267 SEI 0108 STS 0069 SABA 0068, 0347 SALORA 0070 SAMPO 0064, 0075 SAMSUNG 0072, 0267, 0459 SANKY 0066, 0075 SANSUI 0027, 0068, 0094, 1506 SANYO 0074, 0131, 0267 SAVILLE 0379 SCHAUB LORENZ 0027, 0068, 0131 SCHNEIDER 0027, 0099, 0108 SCOTT 0070, 0072, 0211 SEARS 0027, 0062, 0064, 0069, 0074, 0131, 1264 SELECO 0068 SEMP 0072 SHARP 0075, 0834 SHINTOM 0099, 0131 SIEMENS 0064, 0108, 0131 SILVA 0064 SINGER 0072, 0099 SINUDYNE 0108 SONIC BLUE 0641, 0643 SONTEC 0064 SONY 0027, 0059, 0060, 0062, 0663, 1259 SUNKAI 0375 SUNSTAR 0027 SUNTRONIC 0027 SYLVANIA 0027, 0062, 0108, 0070, 1808 SYMPHONIC 0027 TMK 0267 TANDY 0027, 0131 TASHIKO 0027, 0064 TATUNG 0027, 0068, 0072, 0094, 0108 TEAC 0027, 0068, 0305, 0334, 0669 TECHNICS 0062, 0253 TECO 0062, 0064, 0068, 0075 TEKNIKA 0027, 0062, 0064 TELEAVIA 0068 TELEFUNKEN 0068, 0347 TENOSAL 0099 TENSAI 0027 THOMAS 0027 THOMSON 0068, 0087, 0094, 0347 THORN 0068, 0131 TIVO 0645, 0663 TOSHIBA 0068, 0070, 0072, 0094, 0108, 0872 TOTEVISION 0064, 0267 UHER 0267 UNITECH 0267 UNIVERSUM 0027, 0064, 0108, 0267 VECTOR 0072 VICTOR 0068, 0094 VIDEO CONCEPTS 0072 VIDEOMAGIC 0064 VIDEOSONIC 0267 VILLAIN 0027 WARDS 0027, 0062, 0069, 0074, 0075, 0087, 0099, 0108, 0267 WHITE WESTINGHOUSE 0099 XR-1000 0027, 0062, 0099 YAMAHA 0068 YAMISHI 0099 YOKAN 0099 YOKO 0267 ZENITH 0027, 0060, 0066, 1506 v RX-V4600_U-cv.fm Page 1 Wednesday, March 16, 2005 10:08 AM U RX-V4600 RX-V4600 AV Receiver © 2005 YAMAHA ELECTRONICS CORPORATION, USA 6660 ORANGETHORPE AVE., BUENA PARK, CALIF. 90620, U.S.A. YAMAHA CANADA MUSIC LTD. 135 MILNER AVE., SCARBOROUGH, ONTARIO M1S 3R1, CANADA YAMAHA ELECTRONIK EUROPA G.m.b.H. SIEMENSSTR. 22-34, 25462 RELLINGEN BEI HAMBURG, GERMANY YAMAHA ELECTRONIQUE FRANCE S.A. RUE AMBROISE CROIZAT BP70 CROISSY-BEAUBOURG 77312 MARNE-LA-VALLEE CEDEX02, FRANCE YAMAHA ELECTRONICS (UK) LTD. YAMAHA HOUSE, 200 RICKMANSWORTH ROAD WATFORD, HERTS WD18 7GQ, ENGLAND YAMAHA SCANDINAVIA A.B. J A WETTERGRENS GATA 1, BOX 30053, 400 43 VÄSTRA FRÖLUNDA, SWEDEN YAMAHA MUSIC AUSTRALIA PTY, LTD. 17-33 MARKET ST., SOUTH MELBOURNE, 3205 VIC., AUSTRALIA All rights reserved. OWNER’S MANUAL Printed in Malaysia WF09590
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64
  • Page 65 65
  • Page 66 66
  • Page 67 67
  • Page 68 68
  • Page 69 69
  • Page 70 70
  • Page 71 71
  • Page 72 72
  • Page 73 73
  • Page 74 74
  • Page 75 75
  • Page 76 76
  • Page 77 77
  • Page 78 78
  • Page 79 79
  • Page 80 80
  • Page 81 81
  • Page 82 82
  • Page 83 83
  • Page 84 84
  • Page 85 85
  • Page 86 86
  • Page 87 87
  • Page 88 88
  • Page 89 89
  • Page 90 90
  • Page 91 91
  • Page 92 92
  • Page 93 93
  • Page 94 94
  • Page 95 95
  • Page 96 96
  • Page 97 97
  • Page 98 98
  • Page 99 99
  • Page 100 100
  • Page 101 101
  • Page 102 102
  • Page 103 103
  • Page 104 104
  • Page 105 105
  • Page 106 106
  • Page 107 107
  • Page 108 108
  • Page 109 109
  • Page 110 110
  • Page 111 111
  • Page 112 112
  • Page 113 113
  • Page 114 114
  • Page 115 115
  • Page 116 116
  • Page 117 117
  • Page 118 118
  • Page 119 119
  • Page 120 120
  • Page 121 121
  • Page 122 122
  • Page 123 123
  • Page 124 124
  • Page 125 125
  • Page 126 126

Yamaha RX-V4600 - AV Receiver Manual de usuario

Categoría
Receptor
Tipo
Manual de usuario
Este manual también es adecuado para